Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisCombining different perspectives from materials science, engineering, and computer science, this reference provides a unified view of the various aspects necessary for the successful realization of intelligent systems. The editors and authors are from academia and research institutions with close ties to industry, and are thus able to offer first-hand information here. They adopt a unique, three-tiered approach such that readers can gain basic, intermediate, and advanced topical knowledge. The technology section of the book is divided into chapters covering the basics of sensor integration in materials, the challenges associated with this approach, data processing, evaluation, and validation, as well as methods for achieving an autonomous energy supply. The applications part then goes on to showcase typical scenarios where material-integrated intelligent systems are already in use, such as for structural health monitoring and smart textiles.Table of ContentsForeword XV Preface XIX Part One Introduction 1 1 On Concepts and Challenges of Realizing Material-Integrated Intelligent Systems 3Stefan Bosse and Dirk Lehmhus 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 System Development Methodologies and Tools (Part Two) 7 1.3 Sensor Technologies and Material Integration (Part Three and Four) 8 1.4 Signal and Data Processing (Part Five) 15 1.5 Networking and Communication (Part Six) 17 1.6 Energy Supply and Management (Part Seven) 21 1.7 Applications (Part Eight) 21 References 24 Part Two System Development 29 2 Design Methodology for Intelligent Technical Systems 31Mareen Vaßholz, Roman Dumitrescu, and Jürgen Gausemeier 2.1 From Mechatronics to Intelligent Technical Systems 32 2.2 Self-Optimizing Systems 36 2.3 Design Methodology for Intelligent Technical Systems 38 2.3.1 Domain-Spanning Conceptual Design 41 2.3.2 Domain-Specific Conceptual Design 50 References 51 3 Smart Systems Design Methodologies and Tools 55Nicola Bombieri, Franco Fummi, Giuliana Gangemi, Michelangelo Grosso, Enrico Macii, Massimo Poncino, and Salvatore Rinaudo 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 Smart Electronic Systems and Their Design Challenges 56 3.3 The Smart Systems Codesign before SMAC 57 3.4 The SMAC Platform 60 3.4.1 The Platform Overview 61 3.4.1.1 System C–SystemVue Cosimulation 61 3.4.1.2 ADS and the Thermal Simulation 63 3.4.1.3 EMPro Extension and ADS Integration 64 3.4.1.4 Automated EM – Circuit Cosimulation in ADS 64 3.4.1.5 HIF Suite Toolsuite 65 3.4.1.6 The MEMS+ Platform 66 3.4.2 The (Co)Simulation Levels and the Design–Domains Matrix 67 3.5 Case Study: A Sensor Node for Drift-Free Limb Tracking 69 3.5.1 System Architecture 71 3.5.2 Model Development and System-Level Simulation 71 3.5.3 Results 73 3.6 Conclusions 76 Acknowledgments 77 References 77 Part Three Sensor Technologies 81 4 Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) 83Li Yunjia 4.1 Introduction 83 4.1.1 What Is MEMS 83 4.1.2 Why MEMS 84 4.1.3 MEMS Sensors 84 4.1.4 Goal of This Chapter 85 4.2 Materials 85 4.2.1 Silicon 85 4.2.2 Dielectrics 86 4.2.3 Metals 87 4.3 Microfabrication Technologies 87 4.3.1 Silicon Wafers 87 4.3.2 Lithography 88 4.3.3 Etching 91 4.3.4 Deposition Techniques 93 4.3.5 Other Processes 94 4.3.6 Surface and Bulk Micromachining 95 4.4 MEMS Sensor 95 4.4.1 Resistive Sensors 95 4.4.2 Capacitive Sensors 99 4.5 Sensor Systems 103 References 104 5 Fiber-Optic Sensors 107Yi Yang, Kevin Chen, and Nikhil Gupta 5.1 Introduction to Fiber-Optic Sensors 107 5.1.1 Sensing Principles 108 5.1.2 Types of Optical Fibers 108 5.2 Trends in Sensor Fabrication and Miniaturization 110 5.3 Fiber-Optic Sensors for Structural Health Monitoring 112 5.3.1 Sensors for Cure Monitoring of Composites 114 5.3.2 Embedded FOS in Composite Materials 114 5.3.3 Surface-Mounted FOS in Composite Materials 115 5.3.4 FOS for Structural Monitoring 115 5.3.4.1 Aerospace Structures 115 5.3.4.2 Civil Structures 116 5.3.4.3 Marine Structures 116 5.4 Frequency Modulation Sensors 117 5.4.1 Bragg Grating Sensors 117 5.4.2 Fabry–Pérot Interferometer Sensor 118 5.4.3 Whispering Gallery Mode Sensors 119 5.5 Intensity Modulation Sensors 122 5.5.1 Fiber Microbend Sensors 122 5.5.2 Fiber-Optic Loop Sensor 123 5.6 Some Challenges in SHM of Composite Materials 128 5.7 Summary 128 Acknowledgments 129 References 129 6 Electronics Development for Integration 137Jan Vanfleteren 6.1 Introduction 137 6.1.1 Standard Flat Rigid Printed Circuits Boards and Components Assembly 137 6.1.2 Flexible Circuits 138 6.1.3 Need for Alternative Circuit and Packaging Materials 140 6.2 Chip Package Miniaturization Technologies 140 6.2.1 Ultrathin Chip Package Technology 140 6.2.2 UTCP Circuit Integration 142 6.2.2.1 UTCP Embedding 142 6.2.2.2 UTCP Stacking 143 6.2.3 Applications 143 6.3 Elastic Circuits 145 6.3.1 Printed Circuit Board-Based Elastic Circuits 145 6.3.2 Thin Film Metal-Based Elastic Circuits 148 6.3.3 Applications 148 6.3.3.1 Wearable Light Therapy 148 6.3.4 Stretchable Displays 149 6.4 2.5D Rigid Thermoplastic Circuits 152 6.5 Large Area Textile-Based Circuits 153 6.5.1 Electronic Module Integration Technology 154 6.5.2 Applications 155 6.6 Conclusions and Outlook 157 References 157 Part Four Material Integration Solutions 159 7 Sensor Integration in Fiber-Reinforced Polymers 161Maryam Kahali Moghaddam, Mariugenia Salas, Michael Koerdt, Christian Brauner, Martina Hübner, Dirk Lehmhus, and Walter Lang 7.1 Introduction to Fiber-Reinforced Polymers 161 7.2 Applications of Integrated Systems in Composites 164 7.2.1 Production Process Monitoring and Quality Control of Composites 164 7.2.1.1 Monitoring of the Resin Flow 166 7.2.1.2 Analytical Modeling of Resin Front by Means of Simulation 166 7.2.1.3 Monitoring the Resin Curing 166 7.2.2 In-Service Applications of Integrated Systems 167 7.2.2.1 Use for Structural Health Monitoring (SHM) 167 7.2.2.2 Use As Support to Nondestructive Evaluation and Testing (NDE/NDT) 170 7.3 Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Production and Sensor Integration Processes 170 7.3.1 Overview of Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Production Processes 170 7.3.2 Sensor Integration in Fiber-Reinforced Polymers: Selected Case Studies 175 7.4 Electronics Integration and Data Processing 179 7.4.1 Materials Integration of Electronics 180 7.4.2 Electronics for Wireless Sensing 181 7.5 Examples of Sensors Integrated in Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Composites 183 7.5.1 Ultrasound Reflection Sensing 183 7.5.2 Pressure Sensors 184 7.5.3 Thermocouples 186 7.5.4 Fiber Optic Sensors 187 7.5.5 Interdigital Planar Capacitive Sensors 188 7.6 Conclusion 192 Acknowledgments 193 References 193 8 Integration in Sheet Metal Structures 201Welf-Guntram Drossel, Roland Müller, Matthias Nestler, and Sebastian Hensel 8.1 Introduction 201 8.2 Integration Technology 204 8.3 Forming of Piezometal Compounds 205 8.4 Characterization of Functionality 208 8.5 Fields of Application 211 8.6 Conclusion and Outlook 212 References 212 9 Sensor and Electronics Integration in Additive Manufacturing 217Dirk Lehmhus and Matthias Busse 9.1 Introduction to Additive Manufacturing 217 9.2 Overview of AM Processes 224 9.3 Links between Sensor Integration and Additive Manufacturing 228 9.4 AM Sensor Integration Case Studies 230 9.4.1 Cavity-Based Sensor and Electronic System Integration 236 9.4.2 Multiprocess Hybrid Manufacturing Systems 239 9.4.3 Toward a Single AM Platform for Structural Electronics Fabrication 243 9.5 Conclusion and Outlook 245 Abbreviations 246 References 248 Part Five Signal and Data Processing: The Sensor Node Level 257 10 Analog Sensor Signal Processing and Analog-to-Digital Conversion 259John Horstmann, Marco Ramsbeck, and Stefan Bosse 10.1 Operational Amplifiers 260 10.2 Analog-to-Digital Converter Specifications 262 10.3 Data Converter Architectures 268 10.4 Low-Power ADC Designs and Power Classification 276 10.5 Moving Window ADC Approach 277 References 279 11 Digital Real-Time Data Processing with Embedded Systems 281Stefan Bosse and Dirk Lehmhus 11.1 Levels of Information 281 11.2 Algorithms and Computational Models 283 11.3 Scientific Data Mining 287 11.4 Real-Time and Parallel Processing 291 References 297 12 The Known World: Model-Based Computing and Inverse Numeric 301Armin Lechleiter and Stefan Bosse 12.1 Physical Models in Parameter Identification 302 12.2 Noisy Data Due to Sensor and Modeling Errors 304 12.3 Coping with Noisy Data: Tikhonov Regularization and Parameter Choice Rules 306 12.4 Tikhonov Regularization 308 12.5 Rules for the Choice of the Regularization Parameter 309 12.6 Explicit Minimizers for Linear Models 311 12.7 The Soft-Shrinkage Iteration 312 12.8 Iterative Regularization Schemes 313 12.9 Gradient Descent Schemes 314 12.10 Newton-Type Regularization Schemes 317 12.11 Numerical Examples in Load Reconstruction 318 References 326 13 The Unknown World: Model-Free Computing and Machine Learning 329Stefan Bosse 13.1 Machine Learning – An Overview 329 13.2 Learning of Data Streams 331 13.3 Learning with Noise 333 13.4 Distributed Event-Based Learning 333 13.5 ε-Interval and Nearest-Neighborhood Decision Tree Learning 334 13.6 Machine Learning – A Sensorial Material Demonstrator 336 References 340 14 Robustness and Data Fusion 343Stefan Bosse 14.1 Robust System Design on System Level 345 References 348 Part Six Networking and Communication: The Sensor Network Level 349 15 Communication Hardware 351Tim Tiedemann 15.1 Communication Hardware in Their Applications 351 15.2 Requirements for Embedded Communication Hardware 352 15.3 Overview of Physical Communication Classes 354 15.4 Examples of Wired Communication Hardware 356 15.5 Examples of Wireless Communication Hardware 358 15.6 Examples of Optical Communication Hardware 360 15.7 Summary 360 References 361 16 Networks and Communication Protocols 363Stefan Bosse 16.1 Network Topologies and Network of Networks 364 16.2 Redundancy in Networks 365 16.3 Protocols 366 16.4 Switched Networks versus Message Passing 368 16.5 Bus Systems 369 16.6 Message Passing and Message Formats 370 16.7 Routing 370 16.8 Failures, Robustness, and Reliability 377 16.9 Distributed Sensor Networks 378 16.10 Active Messaging and Agents 381 References 382 17 Distributed and Cloud Computing: The Big Machine 385Stefan Bosse 17.1 Reference 386 18 The Mobile Agent and Multiagent Systems 387Stefan Bosse 18.1 The Agent Computation and Interaction Model 389 18.2 Dynamic Activity-Transition Graphs 394 18.3 The Agent Behavior Class 395 18.4 Communication and Interaction of Agents 396 18.5 Agent Programming Models 397 18.6 Agent Processing Platforms and Technologies 404 18.7 Agent-Based Learning 415 18.8 Event and Distributed Agent-Based Learning of Noisy Sensor Data 416 References 420 Part Seven Energy Supply 423 19 Energy Management and Distribution 425Stefan Bosse 19.1 Design of Low-Power Smart Sensor Systems 426 19.2 A Toolbox for Energy Analysis and Simulation 430 19.3 Dynamic Power Management 434 19.3.1 CPU-Centric DPM 435 19.3.2 I/O-Centric DPM 437 19.3.3 EDS Algorithm 438 19.4 Energy-Aware Communication in Sensor Networks 440 19.5 Energy Distribution in Sensor Networks 442 19.5.1 Distributed Energy Management in Sensor Networks Using Agents 443 References 446 20 Microenergy Storage 449Robert Kun, Chi Chen, and Francesco Ciucci 20.1 Introduction 449 20.2 Energy Harvesting/Scavenging 451 20.3 Energy Storage 452 20.3.1 Capacitors 452 20.3.2 Batteries 458 20.3.3 Fuel Cells 467 20.3.3.1 Low-Temperature Fuel Cells 469 20.3.3.2 High-Temperature Fuel Cells 469 20.3.4 Other Storage Systems 469 20.4 Summary and Perspectives 470 References 470 21 Energy Harvesting 479Rolanas Dauksevicius and Danick Briand 21.1 Introduction 479 21.2 Mechanical Energy Harvesters 480 21.2.1 Piezoelectric Micropower Generators 482 21.2.2 Micropower Generators Based on Electroactive Polymers 489 21.2.3 Electrostatic Micropower Generators 490 21.2.4 Electromagnetic Micropower Generators 491 21.2.5 Triboelectric Nanogenerators 492 21.2.6 Hybrid Micropower Generators 493 21.2.7 Wideband and Nonlinear Micropower Generators 494 21.2.8 Concluding Remarks 495 21.3 Thermal Energy Harvesters 496 21.3.1 Introduction to Thermoelectric Generators 496 21.3.2 Thermoelectric Materials and Efficiency 499 21.3.3 Other Thermal-to-Electrical Energy Conversion Techniques 501 21.4 Radiation Harvesters 502 21.4.1 Light Energy Harvesters 502 21.4.2 RF Energy Harvesters 506 21.5 Summary and Perspectives 507 References 512 Part Eight Application Scenarios 529 22 Structural Health Monitoring (SHM) 531Dirk Lehmhus and Matthias Busse 22.1 Introduction 531 22.2 Motivations for SHM System Implementation 536 22.3 SHM System Classification and Main Components 540 22.3.1 Sensor and Actuator Elements for SHM Systems 542 22.3.2 Communication in SHM Systems 550 22.3.3 SHM Data Evaluation Approaches and Principles 552 22.4 SHM Areas and Application and Case Studies 555 22.5 Implications of Material Integration for SHM Systems 561 22.6 Conclusion and Outlook 562 References 564 23 Achievements and Open Issues Toward Embedding Tactile Sensing and Interpretation into Electronic Skin Systems 571Ali Ibrahim, Luigi Pinna, Lucia Seminara, and Maurizio Valle 23.1 Introduction 571 23.2 The Skin Mechanical Structure 573 23.2.1 Transducers and Materials 573 23.2.2 An Example of Skin Integration into an Existing Robotic Platform 575 23.3 Tactile Information Processing 579 23.4 Computational Requirements 582 23.4.1 Electrical Impedance Tomography 582 23.4.2 Tensorial Kernel 583 23.5 Conclusions 585 References 585 24 Intelligent Materials in Machine Tool Applications: A Review 595Hans-Christian Möhring 24.1 Applications of Shape Memory Alloys (SMA) 596 24.2 Applications of Piezoelectric Ceramics 596 24.3 Applications of Magnetostrictive Materials 598 24.4 Applications of Electro- and Magnetorheological Fluids 600 24.5 Intelligent Structures and Components 601 24.6 Summary and Conclusion 603 References 604 25 New Markets/Opportunities through Availability of Product Life Cycle Data 613Thorsten Wuest, Karl Hribernik, and Klaus-Dieter Thoben 25.1 Product Life Cycle Management 613 25.1.1 Closed-Loop and Item-Level PLM 615 25.1.2 Data and Information in PLM 615 25.1.3 Supporting Concepts for Data and Information Integration in PLM 616 25.2 Case Studies 617 25.2.1 Case Study 1: Life Cycle of Leisure Boats 617 25.2.1.1 Sensors Used 618 25.2.1.2 Potential Application of Sensorial Materials 619 25.2.1.3 Limitations and Opportunities of Sensorial Materials 619 25.2.2 Case Study 2: PROMISE – Product Life Cycle Management and Information Using Smart Embedded Systems 620 25.2.2.1 Sensors Used 620 25.2.2.2 Potential Application of Sensorial Materials 621 25.2.2.3 Limitations and Opportunities of Sensorial Materials 621 25.2.3 Case Study 3: Composite Bridge 622 25.2.3.1 Sensors Used 623 25.2.3.2 Potential Application of Sensorial Materials 623 25.2.3.3 Limitations and Opportunities of Sensorial Materials 623 25.3 Potential of Sensorial Materials in PLM Application 623 Acknowledgment 624 References 624 26 Human–Computer Interaction with Novel and Advanced Materials 629Tanja Döring, Robert Porzel, and Rainer Malaka 26.1 Introduction 629 26.2 New Forms of Human–Computer Interaction 630 26.3 Applications and Scenarios 633 26.3.1 Domestic and Personal Devices 633 26.3.1.1 The Marble Answering Machine 633 26.3.1.2 Living Wall: An Interactive Wallpaper 634 26.3.1.3 Sprout I/O and Shutters: Ambient Textile Information Displays 634 26.3.1.4 FlexCase: A Flexible Sensing and Display Cover 635 26.3.2 Learning, Collaboration, and Entertainment 635 26.3.2.1 Tangibles for Learning and Creativity 635 26.3.2.2 inFORM: Supporting Remote Collaboration through Shape Capture and Actuation 636 26.3.2.3 The Soap Bubble Interface 637 26.4 Opportunities and Challenges 637 26.5 Conclusions 639 References 639 Index 645

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book of its kind?providing comprehensive information on oxide thermoelectrics This timely book explores the latest research results on the physics and materials science of oxide thermoelectrics at all scales. It covers the theory, design and properties of thermoelectric materials as well as fabrication technologies for devices and their applications. Written by three distinguished materials scientists, Oxide Thermoelectric Materials reviews: the fundamentals of electron and phonon transport; modeling of thermoelectric modules and their optimization; synthetic processes, structures, and properties of thermoelectric materials such as Bi2Te3- and skutterudite-based materials and Si-Ge alloys. In addition, the book provides a detailed description of the construction of thermoelectric devices and their applications. -Contains fundamentals and applications of thermoelectric materials and devices, and discusses their near-future perspectives -Introduces new, promising materials and technologies, such as nanostructured materials, perovskites, and composites -Paves the way for increased conversion efficiencies of oxides -Authored by well-known experts in the field of thermoelectrics Oxide Thermoelectric Materials is a well-organized guidebook for graduate students involved in physics, chemistry, or materials science. It is also helpful for researchers who are getting involved in thermoelectric research and development. Table of ContentsForeword ix Part I Theories and Fundamentals 1 1 Electron Transport Model in Nano Bulk Thermoelectrics 3 1.1 History of Conducting Oxides 3 1.2 Structural Characteristics of Oxides 8 1.3 Band Structure of Conventional Oxides 11 1.4 Electrical Properties 11 1.5 Model for Thermoelectric Oxides 15 1.6 Effect of Interface on Electron Transport 17 References 22 2 Controlling the Thermal Conductivity of Bulk Nanomaterials 25 2.1 Bonding and Lattice Vibration 25 2.2 Lattice Distortions in Determining Thermal Properties 25 2.2.1 Point Defects and Dislocations 25 2.2.2 Peierls Distortion 27 2.2.3 Octahedral Distortion in Manganite Perovskites 28 2.3 Callaway Model and the Minimum Thermal Properties 30 2.4 Temperature Relationship in Thermal Properties 32 2.5 Model for Lattice Thermal Conductivity 36 2.5.1 Kinetic Theory 36 2.5.2 Boltzmann Equation 36 2.5.3 Phonon–Phonon Collisions 38 2.6 Interfacial Thermal Conductivity 40 2.7 Model for Nano Bulk Materials 43 2.8 Minimum Value for Oxides 48 References 49 Part II Materials 53 3 Nonoxide Materials 55 3.1 Bi2Te3-Based Materials 55 3.2 Skutterudite-Based Materials 59 3.3 Si–Ge Alloys 62 3.4 Other Alloy Materials 66 References 71 4 Binary Oxides 77 4.1 Introduction for ZnO 77 4.2 Property of ZnO 77 4.2.1 Structure 77 4.2.2 Lattice Parameters 77 4.2.3 Electronic Band Structure 77 4.2.4 Mechanical Properties 79 4.2.5 Thermal Expansion Coefficients 79 4.2.6 Thermal Conductivity 80 4.2.7 Specific Heat 80 4.2.8 Electrical Properties of Undoped ZnO 81 4.3 Doping for ZnO-Based Thermoelectric Materials 81 4.4 ZnO Nanostructures 84 4.5 Introduction for In2O3 87 4.6 Property of In2O3 88 4.6.1 Structure 88 4.6.2 Electronic Band Structure 89 4.6.3 Thermal Properties and Electrical Properties 89 4.7 Doping for In2O3-BasedThermoelectricMaterials 90 4.8 In2O3 Nanostructures 94 4.9 TiO2 and Others 98 References 101 5 Perovskite-Type Oxides 105 5.1 Introduction for Perovskite-Type Oxides 105 5.2 Crystal Structure and Electronic Structure of Perovskite-Type Oxides 106 5.2.1 Crystal Structure 106 5.2.2 Electronic Structure 107 5.3 A- and B-Sites Doping for Perovskite-Type Oxides 108 5.3.1 SrTiO3 108 5.3.2 CaMnO3 109 5.3.3 LaCoO3 111 5.4 Double Perovskites 112 5.4.1 Structure of Double Perovskites 112 5.4.2 Thermoelectric Properties of A′A′′B2O5+𝛿 113 5.4.3 Thermoelectric Properties of A2B′B′′O6 113 5.4.4 Doping Modulation 115 5.4.5 Composite Ceramics 118 5.5 Nanostructure Property Relationships in Perovskite-Type Oxides 120 References 124 6 Oxide Cobaltites 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 NaxCoO2 133 6.3 Ca3Co4O9 138 6.3.1 Single Dopants of Ca3Co4O9 139 6.3.2 Dual Dopants of Ca3Co4O9 144 6.3.3 Texture for Ca3Co4O9 147 6.3.4 Nanocomposites for Ca3Co4O9 147 6.4 New Concepts for Oxide Cobaltites 150 References 151 7 Promising Complex Oxides for High Performance 155 7.1 Crystal Structure–Property Relationships 155 7.2 History of Complex Superconductors 156 7.3 Ternary Oxyselenides 158 7.3.1 Donor Doping on [Bi2O2]2+ Layers 158 7.3.2 Donor Doping on [Se]2− Layers 160 7.3.3 The Solid Solution of Bi2O2Se and Bi2O2Te 160 7.4 Quaternary Oxyselenides 164 7.4.1 Thermoelectric Properties 166 7.4.2 Band Gap Tuning 168 7.4.3 Texturing 168 7.4.4 Modulation Doping 169 7.4.5 Nanocompositing 171 7.5 Complexity Through Disorder in the Unit Cell 173 7.6 Complex Unit Cells 174 References 176 8 New Thermoelectric Materials and Nanocomposites 179 8.1 Nanocomposite Design 180 8.1.1 Energy-filtering Design 180 8.1.2 All-Scale Hierarchical Architectures 181 8.1.3 Quantum Nanostructured Bulk Materials 183 8.2 Organic Thermoelectric Materials 183 8.2.1 p-Type Organic Thermoelectric Materials 184 8.2.2 PEDOT 184 8.2.3 PANI 187 8.2.3.1 The Molecular Structure of PANI 188 8.2.3.2 Conductive Mechanism of PANI 188 8.2.3.3 Synthesis of PANI 188 8.2.3.4 Electrochemical Method 189 8.2.4 Doping of PANI 189 8.2.5 Tuning the Work Function of Polyaniline 190 8.2.6 n-Type Thermoelectric Materials 192 8.3 Organic/Inorganic Thermoelectric Nanocomposites 192 8.3.1 0D Nanoparticles/Polymer 192 8.3.2 1D Nanowires or Nanotubes/Polymer 193 8.3.3 2D Nanosheets/Polymer 197 References 201 Part III Devices and Application 207 9 Oxide Materials Preparation 209 9.1 Synthesis Method of Nanopowder 209 9.1.1 Solid-State Reaction 209 9.1.2 Solution Preparation 210 9.1.2.1 Sol–Gel Method 211 9.1.2.2 Precipitation and Coprecipitation Method 211 9.1.2.3 Hydrothermal Method 213 9.1.3 Gas-Phase Reaction 214 9.2 Advanced Bulk Technology 214 9.2.1 Spark Plasma Sintering 215 9.2.2 Hot-Press Sintering 215 9.2.3 Microwave Sintering 217 9.2.4 Two-Step Sintering 218 9.2.5 Phase-Transformation Sintering 219 9.3 Sintering Conditions on the Properties of Bulk 219 9.3.1 Effect of Sintering Temperature 219 9.3.2 Effect of Sintering Atmosphere 220 9.3.3 Effect of the Addition for Sintering 220 References 221 10 Modeling and Optimizing of Thermoelectric Devices 229 10.1 Introduction to Thermoelectric Devices 229 10.2 The Theoretical Analysis 230 10.3 The Model Design 232 10.4 The Interfaces in Thermoelectric Modules 236 10.5 The Simulation and the Optimization 238 10.6 The Measurement Theories and Systems 241 10.7 All-oxide Thermoelectric Device 242 References 245 11 Photovoltaic Application of Thermoelectric Materials and Devices 247 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Photovoltaic–Thermoelectric Integration Devices 248 11.3 Photoelectric–Thermoelectric Composite Materials 253 References 260 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume in the "Advances in Electrochemical Sciences and Engineering" series focuses on problem-solving, illustrating how to translate basic science into engineering solutions. The book's concept is to bring together engineering solutions across the range of nano-bio-photo-micro applications, with each chapter co-authored by an academic and an industrial expert whose collaboration led to reusable methods that are relevant beyond their initial use. Examples of experimental and/or computational methods are used throughout to facilitate the task of moving atomistic-scale discoveries and understanding toward well-engineered products and processes based on electrochemical phenomena.Table of ContentsSeries Preface xi Preface xiii 1 Introductory Perspectives 1A. Paul Alivisatos andWojciech T. Osowiecki References 4 2 The Joint Center for Energy Storage Research: A New Paradigm of Research, Development, and Demonstration 7Thomas J. Carney, Devin S. Hodge, Lynn Trahey, and Fikile R. Brushett 2.1 Background and Motivation 7 2.2 Lithium-ion Batteries: Current State of the Art 8 2.3 Beyond Li-Ion Batteries 9 2.4 JCESR Legacies and a New Paradigm for Research 9 2.5 The JCESR Team 13 2.6 JCESR Operational Tools 16 2.7 Intellectual Property Management 17 2.8 Communication Tools 17 2.9 JCESR Change Decision Process 17 2.10 Safety in JCESR 19 2.11 Battery Technology Readiness Level 20 2.12 JCESR Deliverables 21 2.13 Scientific Tools in JCESR 22 2.14 Techno-economic Modeling 23 2.14.1 Techno-economic Modeling of a Metal–Air System for Transportation Applications 23 2.14.2 Techno-economic Modeling of Flow Batteries for Grid Storage Applications 25 2.15 The Electrochemical Discovery Laboratory 27 2.15.1 The Effect of TraceWater on Beyond Li-ion Devices 27 2.15.2 Stability of Redox Active Molecules 28 2.16 Electrolyte Genome 28 2.16.1 Screening of Redox Active Molecules for Redox Flow 29 2.16.2 Examination of Multivalent Intercalation Materials 30 2.17 Combining the Electrolyte Genome with Techno-economic Modeling 31 2.18 Prototype Development 31 2.19 Legacy of JCESR 33 2.20 Conclusion 34 Acknowledgments 34 References 34 3 Determination of Redox Reaction Mechanisms in Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 41Kevin H.Wujcik, Dunyang R.Wang, Alexander A. Teran, Eduard Nasybulin, Tod A. Pascal, David Prendergast, and Nitash P. Balsara 3.1 Basics of Lithium–Sulfur Chemistry 41 3.2 End Products of Electrochemical Reactions in the Sulfur Cathode 44 3.3 Intermediate Products of Electrochemical Reactions in the Sulfur Cathode 45 3.3.1 Reactions of S8 45 3.3.2 Reactions of Li2S8 46 3.3.3 Reactions of Li2S4 47 3.3.4 Reactions of Li2S2 48 3.3.5 Production of Radical Anions 49 3.4 Fingerprinting Lithium Polysulfide Intermediates 49 3.4.1 X-ray Absorption Spectroscopy 50 3.4.2 Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 53 3.4.3 UV–Vis Spectroscopy 54 3.4.4 Raman Spectroscopy 57 3.4.5 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 57 3.5 In Situ Spectroscopic Studies of Li–S Batteries 58 3.5.1 X-ray Absorption Spectroscopy 58 3.5.2 Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 59 3.5.3 UV–Vis Spectroscopy 60 3.5.4 Raman Spectroscopy 60 3.5.5 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 61 3.6 Practical Considerations 62 3.7 Concluding Remarks 64 Acknowledgment 68 References 68 4 From the Lab to Scaling-up Thin Film Solar Absorbers 75Hariklia Deligianni, Lubomyr T. Romankiw, Daniel Lincot, and Pierre-Philippe Grand 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 State-of-the-art Electrodeposition for Photovoltaics 79 4.2.1 Electrodeposited CuInGaSe2 (CIGS) 80 4.2.1.1 Metal Layers 80 4.2.1.2 Electrodeposition of Copper 81 4.2.1.3 Electrodeposition of Indium 82 4.2.1.4 Electrodeposition of Gallium 85 4.2.2 Single Cu—In—Ga—Se—O Multicomponent Chemistries 89 4.2.2.1 Cu—In—Se Co-deposition 89 4.2.2.2 Cu—In—Ga—Se Co-deposition 91 4.2.2.3 Cu—In—Ga—O Co-deposition 92 4.2.2.4 Cu—In—Ga Co-deposition 93 4.2.3 AnnealingMethods 93 4.2.4 Fabrication of Solar Cells 95 4.3 Electrodeposited Cu2ZnSn(Se,S)4 (CZTS) and Emerging Materials 97 4.3.1 Cu2ZnSn(Se,S)4 (CZTS) 97 4.4 From the Rotating Disk to the Paddle Cell as a Scale-up Platform 99 4.4.1 Introduction to Scale-up 99 4.4.2 Entirely New Solution Agitation Method 100 4.4.3 The Paddle Agitation Technique Is More Readily Scalable 101 4.4.4 Electrical Contact Between the Thin Seed Layer and the Source of Current 103 4.4.5 Previous Scale-up of the Paddle Cell 103 4.4.6 Scale-up of the Paddle Cell to 15 cm× 15 cm 104 4.4.7 Scale-up of the Paddle Cell to 30 cm× 60 cm 107 4.4.8 ImprovingWithin-Wafer Uniformity, Reproducibility, and Demonstration of Scalability 108 4.4.8.1 Within-Wafer Uniformity 108 4.4.8.2 Wafer-to-Wafer Reproducibility 109 4.5 Scaling-up to 60 cm× 120 cm from Tiny Electrodes to Meters 110 4.5.1 A 1 m2 min−1 Continuous Industrial Scale 110 4.5.2 Bath Control 116 4.5.2.1 Insoluble Anode 118 4.5.2.2 Soluble Anode 118 4.5.2.3 Bath Maintenance and Reproducibility and Steady-State Operation 119 4.6 Conclusions 121 Acknowledgments 122 References 123 5 Thin-film Head and the Innovator’s Dilemma 129Keishi Ohashi 5.1 Introduction 129 5.2 Thin-film Head Technology 130 5.2.1 Magnetic Properties for HDD 130 5.2.2 Permalloy 130 5.2.3 Thin-film Head 132 5.2.4 Magnetic Domain Noise 133 5.3 Data Storage Business in Japan 137 5.3.1 MagneticThin-films for HDD in the 1980s 137 5.3.2 Use of Optics 138 5.3.3 High-Moment Head Core Material 138 5.3.4 High-Ms Write Heads 141 5.4 The Innovator’s Dilemma 142 5.4.1 Thin-film Head is not Disruptive 142 5.4.2 Small HDD 143 5.4.3 MR Head 144 5.4.4 GMR Head 145 5.5 TMR Head 147 5.5.1 Infinite MR Ratio 147 5.5.2 Suspicions Surrounding the TMR Head 147 5.5.3 Low-Resistance TMR Head 148 5.5.4 MGO:The Final Push 150 5.5.5 Exploring New Markets 151 5.6 Discussion 151 Acknowledgments 152 References 153 6 Development of Fully-Continuous Electrokinetic Dewatering of Phosphatic Clay Suspensions 159Rui Kong, Arthur Dizon, Saeed Moghaddam, andMark E. Orazem 6.1 Introduction 159 6.1.1 Phosphatic Clay Suspensions 160 6.1.2 Industrial Scope 160 6.1.3 Why is Separation ofWater from Clay Difficult? 161 6.2 Current Methods 162 6.2.1 Flocculation 162 6.2.2 Mechanical Dewatering 163 6.2.3 Electrokinetic Separation 163 6.3 Development of Dewatering Technologies for Phosphatic Clays 164 6.3.1 Lab-scale Batch Dewatering 165 6.3.2 Semi-continuous Operation to Recover Clear Supernatant 168 6.3.3 Semi-continuous Operation to Recover Solids 170 6.3.4 Continuous Operation 172 6.3.5 Energy and Power Requirements for All Prototypes Tested 175 6.4 Economic Assessment for On-site Implementation 179 6.4.1 Hydrogen Emission 179 6.4.2 Capital and Operation Costs 180 6.4.2.1 Power and Energy consumption for On-site Operations 181 6.4.2.2 Operation cost 181 6.4.2.3 Capital Cost 183 6.4.3 Results 184 6.5 Our Next Prototype: Dual-zone Continuous Operation 185 6.6 Conclusions 186 Acknowledgments 187 References 187 Contents ix 7 Breaking the Chemical Paradigm in Electrochemical Engineering: Case Studies and Lessons Learned from Plating to Polishing 193E. Jennings Taylor, Maria E. Inman, Holly M. Garich, Heather A. McCrabb, Stephen T. Snyder, and Timothy D. Hall 7.1 Introduction 193 7.1.1 Perspective 194 7.2 A Brief Overview of Pulse Reverse Current Plating 196 7.2.1 Mass Transport Effects in Pulse Current Plating 198 7.2.2 Current Distribution Effects in Pulse Current Plating 200 7.2.3 Grain Size Effects in Pulse Current Plating 204 7.2.4 Current Efficiency Effects in Pulse Current Plating 205 7.2.5 Concluding Remarks for Pulse Current Plating 205 7.3 Early Developments in Pulse Plating 206 7.3.1 LevelingWithout Levelers Using Pulse Reverse Current Plating 207 7.3.2 DuctilityWithout Brighteners Using Pulse Current Plating 210 7.4 Transition of Pulse Current Plating Concepts to Surface Finishing 211 7.4.1 Pulse Voltage Deburring of Automotive Planetary Gears 212 7.4.2 Transition to Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing of Passive Materials 214 7.4.3 Sequenced Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing of Semiconductor Valves 216 7.4.4 Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing of Strongly Passive Materials 220 7.4.5 Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing of Niobium Superconducting Radio Frequency Cavities 223 7.4.6 Transition Pulse Reverse Voltage Electropolishing to Niobium Superconducting Radio Frequency Cavities 226 7.5 ConcludingThoughts 232 Acknowledgments 233 References 234 8 The Interaction Between a Proton and the Atomic Network in Amorphous Silica Glass Made a Highly Sensitive Trace Moisture Sensor 241Yusuke Tsukahara, Nobuo Takeda, Kazushi Yamanaka, and Shingo Akao 8.1 Unexpected Long Propagation of Surface AcousticWaves Around a Sphere 241 8.2 Invention of a Ball SAWDevice and Application to Gas Sensors 243 8.3 Unexpected Fluctuations in the Output Signal of the Gas Sensor Leading to the Development of Trace Moisture Sensors 249 8.4 Sol–Gel Silica Film for the Trace Moisture Sensors 253 8.5 A Thermodynamic Model of Interaction ofWater Vapor with Amorphous Silica Glass 254 8.6 Concluding Remarks 257 References 257 9 From Sensors to Low-cost Instruments to Networks: Semiconducting Oxides as Gas-Sensitive Resistors 261David E.Williams 9.1 Overview 261 9.2 Basic Science of Semiconducting Oxides as Gas-Sensitive Resistors 266 9.2.1 Multiscale Modeling of Gas-Sensitive Resistors 266 9.2.1.1 Introduction 266 9.2.1.2 Effective Medium Model 1: Rationalization of Composition Effects on Response 268 9.2.1.3 Effective Medium Model 2: Diffusion–Reaction Effects on Response; Effects of Electrode Geometry and “Self-Diagnostic” Devices 270 9.2.1.4 Microstructure Model: Percolation and Equivalent Circuit Representation 277 9.2.2 Surface Segregation and Surface Modification Effects 284 9.2.2.1 Surface Modification by “Poisoning” 284 9.2.2.2 Surface Modification by Segregation 286 9.2.2.3 Surface Grafting as a Means for Altering Response 288 9.2.3 Surface Defect and Reaction Models 288 9.3 Commercial Development of Sensors and Instruments 291 9.3.1 Introduction 291 9.3.2 Development of a Low-Cost Instrument for Measurement of Ozone in theAtmosphere 298 9.3.3 Signal Drift Detection 303 9.3.4 A Low-Cost Instrument for Measurement of Atmospheric Nitrogen Dioxide 304 9.3.5 Networks of Instruments in the Atmosphere 306 9.4 Conclusion and Prospects 311 Acknowledgment 313 References 314 Index 323

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive overview of the research developments in the burgeoning field of metal-air batteries An innovation in battery science and technology is necessary to build better power sources for our modern lifestyle needs. One of the main fields being explored for the possible breakthrough is the development of metal-air batteries. Metal-Air Batteries: Fundamentals and Applications offers a systematic summary of the fundamentals of the technology and explores the most recent advances in the applications of metal-air batteries. Comprehensive in scope, the text explains the basics in electrochemical batteries and introduces various species of metal-air batteries. The author-a noted expert in the field-explores the development of metal-air batteries in the order of Li-air battery, sodium-air battery, zinc-air battery and Mg-O2 battery, with the focus on the Li-air battery. The text also addresses topics such as metallic anode, discharge products, parasitic reactions, electrocatalysts, mediator, and X-ray diffraction study in Li-air battery. Metal-Air Batteries provides a summary of future perspectives in the field of the metal-air batteries. This important resource: -Covers various species of metal-air batteries and their components as well as system designation -Contains groundbreaking content that reviews recent advances in the field of metal-air batteries -Focuses on the battery systems which have the greatest potential for renewable energy storage Written for electrochemists, physical chemists, materials scientists, professionals in the electrotechnical industry, engineers in power technology, Metal-Air Batteries offers a review of the fundamentals and the most recent developments in the area of metal-air batteries. Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction to Metal–Air Batteries: Theory and Basic Principles 1Zhiwen Chang and Xin-bo Zhang 1.1 Li–O2 Battery 1 1.2 Sodium–O2 Battery 5 References 7 2 Stabilization of Lithium-Metal Anode in Rechargeable Lithium–Air Batteries 11Bin Liu,Wu Xu, and Ji-Guang Zhang 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Recent Progresses in Li Metal Protection for Li–O2 Batteries 13 2.2.1 Design of Composite Protective Layers 13 2.2.2 New Insights on the Use of Electrolyte 18 2.2.3 Functional Separators 25 2.2.4 Solid-State Electrolytes 29 2.2.5 Alternative Anodes 30 2.3 Challenges and Perspectives 30 Acknowledgment 32 References 32 3 Li–Air Batteries: Discharge Products 41Xuanxuan Bi, RongyueWang, and Jun Lu 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Discharge Products in Aprotic Li–O2 Batteries 43 3.2.1 Peroxide-based Li–O2 Batteries 43 3.2.1.1 Electrochemical Reactions 43 3.2.1.2 Crystalline and Electronic Band Structure of Li2O2 44 3.2.1.3 Reaction Mechanism and the Coexistence of Li2O2 and LiO2 47 3.2.2 Superoxide-based Li–O2 Batteries 52 3.2.3 Problems and Challenges in Aprotic Li–O2 Batteries 54 3.2.3.1 Decomposition of the Electrolyte 54 3.2.3.2 Degradation of the Carbon Cathode 55 3.3 Discharge Products in Li–Air Batteries 56 3.3.1 Challenges to Exchanging O2 to Air 56 3.3.2 Effect ofWater on Discharge Products 56 3.3.2.1 Effect of Small Amount ofWater 56 3.3.2.2 Aqueous Li–O2 Batteries 57 3.3.3 Effect of CO2 on Discharge Products 59 3.3.4 Current Li–Air Batteries and Perspectives 60 Acknowledgment 61 References 61 4 Electrolytes for Li–O2 Batteries 65Alex R. Neale, Peter Goodrich, Christopher Hardacre, and Johan Jacquemin 4.1 General Li–O2 Battery Electrolyte Requirements and Considerations 65 4.1.1 Electrolyte Salts 69 4.1.2 Ethers and Glymes 73 4.1.3 Dimethyl Sulfoxide (DMSO) and Sulfones 76 4.1.4 Nitriles 78 4.1.5 Amides 79 4.1.6 Ionic Liquids 80 4.1.7 Solid-State Electrolytes 86 4.2 Future Outlook 87 References 87 5 Li–Oxygen Battery: Parasitic Reactions 95Xiahui Yao, Qi Dong, Qingmei Cheng, and DunweiWang 5.1 The Desired and Parasitic Chemical Reactions for Li–Oxygen Batteries 95 5.2 Parasitic Reactions of the Electrolyte 96 5.2.1 Nucleophilic Attack 97 5.2.2 Autoxidation Reaction 99 5.2.3 Acid–Base Reaction 100 5.2.4 Proton-mediated Parasitic Reaction 100 5.2.5 Additional Parasitic Chemical Reactions of the Electrolyte: Reduction Reaction 102 5.3 Parasitic Reactions at the Cathode 102 5.3.1 The Corrosion of Carbon in the Discharge Process 104 5.3.2 The Corrosion of Carbon in the Recharge Process 106 5.3.3 Catalyst-induced Parasitic Chemical Reactions 106 5.3.4 Alternative Cathode Materials and Corresponding Parasitic Chemistries 110 5.3.5 Additives and Binders 111 5.3.6 Contaminations 111 5.4 Parasitic Reactions on the Anode 112 5.4.1 Corrosion of the Li Metal 114 5.4.2 SEI in the Oxygenated Atmosphere 114 5.4.3 Alternative Anodes and Associated Parasitic Chemistries 115 5.5 New Opportunities from the Parasitic Reactions 116 5.6 Summary and Outlook 117 References 118 6 Li–Air Battery: Electrocatalysts 125Zhiwen Chang and Xin-bo Zhang 6.1 Introduction 125 6.2 Types of Electrocatalyst 126 6.2.1 Carbonaceous Materials 126 6.2.1.1 Commercial Carbon Powders 126 6.2.1.2 Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 126 6.2.1.3 Graphene 127 6.2.1.4 Doped Carbonaceous Material 128 6.2.2 Noble Metal and Metal Oxides 129 6.2.3 Transition Metal Oxides 130 6.2.3.1 Perovskite Catalyst 131 6.2.3.2 Redox Mediator 133 6.3 Research of Catalyst 135 6.4 Reaction Mechanism 138 6.5 Summary 141 References 142 7 Lithium–Air BatteryMediator 151Zhuojian Liang, Guangtao Cong, YuWang, and Yi-Chun Lu 7.1 Redox Mediators in Lithium Batteries 151 7.1.1 Redox Mediators in Li–Air Batteries 151 7.1.2 Redox Mediators in Li-ion and Lithium-flow Batteries 153 7.1.2.1 Overcharge Protection in Li-ion Batteries 153 7.1.2.2 Redox Targeting Reactions in Lithium-flow Batteries 154 7.2 Selection Criteria and Evaluation of Redox Mediators for Li–O2 Batteries 156 7.2.1 Redox Potential 156 7.2.2 Stability 157 7.2.3 Reaction Kinetics and Mass Transport Properties 161 7.2.4 Catalytic Shuttle vs Parasitic Shuttle 163 7.3 Charge Mediators 166 7.3.1 LiI (Lithium Iodide) 170 7.3.2 LiBr (Lithium Bromide) 172 7.3.3 Nitroxides: TEMPO (2,2,6,6-Tetramethylpiperidinyloxyl) and Others 176 7.3.4 TTF (Tetrathiafulvalene) 180 7.3.5 Tris[4-(diethylamino)phenyl]amine (TDPA) 182 7.3.6 Comparison of the Reported Charge Mediators 183 7.4 Discharge Mediator 186 7.4.1 Iron Phthalocyanine (FePc) 190 7.4.2 2,5-Di-tert-butyl-1,4-benzoquinone (DBBQ) 192 7.5 Conclusion and Perspective 194 References 195 8 Spatiotemporal Operando X-ray Diffraction Study on Li–Air Battery 207Di-Jia Liu and Jiang-Lan Shui 8.1 Microfocused X-ray Diffraction (μ-XRD) and Li–O2 Cell Experimental Setup 207 8.2 Study on Anode: Limited Reversibility of Lithium in Rechargeable LAB 209 8.3 Study on Separator: Impact of Precipitates to LAB Performance 217 8.4 Study on Cathode: Spatiotemporal Growth of Li2O2 During Redox Reaction 222 References 230 9 Metal–Air Battery: In Situ Spectroelectrochemical Techniques 233IainM. Aldous, Laurence J. Hardwick, Richard J. Nichols, and J. Padmanabhan Vivek 9.1 Raman Spectroscopy 233 9.1.1 In Situ Raman Spectroscopy for Metal–O2 Batteries 233 9.1.2 BackgroundTheory 233 9.1.3 Practical Considerations 235 9.1.3.1 Electrochemical Roughening 235 9.1.3.2 Addressing Inhomogeneous SERS Enhancement 237 9.1.4 In Situ Raman Setup 238 9.1.5 Determination of Oxygen Reduction and Evolution Reaction MechanismsWithin Metal–O2 Batteries 239 9.2 Infrared Spectroscopy 247 9.2.1 Background 247 9.2.2 IR Studies of Electrochemical Interfaces 247 9.2.3 Infrared Spectroscopy for Metal–O2 Battery Studies 249 9.3 UV/Visible Spectroscopic Studies 253 9.3.1 UV/Vis Spectroscopy 254 9.3.2 UV/Vis Spectroscopy for Metal–O2 Battery Studies 255 9.4 Electron Spin Resonance 257 9.4.1 Cell Setup 259 9.4.2 Deployment of Electrochemical ESR in Battery Research 259 9.5 Summary and Outlook 262 References 262 10 Zn–Air Batteries 265Tongwen Yu, Rui Cai, and Zhongwei Chen 10.1 Introduction 265 10.2 Zinc Electrode 266 10.3 Electrolyte 268 10.4 Separator 270 10.5 Air Electrode 271 10.5.1 Structure of Air Electrode 271 10.5.2 Oxygen Reduction Reaction 271 10.5.3 Oxygen Evolution Reaction 272 10.5.4 Electrocatalyst 273 10.5.4.1 Noble Metals and Alloys 274 10.5.4.2 Transition Metal Oxides 275 10.5.4.3 Inorganic–Organic Hybrid Materials 278 10.5.4.4 Metal-free Materials 282 10.6 Conclusions and Outlook 288 References 288 11 Experimental and Computational Investigation of Nonaqueous Mg/O2 Batteries 293Jeffrey G. Smith, Gülin Vardar, CharlesW. Monroe, and Donald J. Siegel 11.1 Introduction 293 11.2 Experimental Studies of Magnesium/Air Batteries and Electrolytes 295 11.2.1 Ionic Liquids as Candidate Electrolytes for Mg/O2 Batteries 295 11.2.2 Modified Grignard Electrolytes for Mg/O2 Batteries 299 11.2.3 All-inorganic Electrolytes for Mg/O2 Batteries 303 11.2.4 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 307 11.3 Computational Studies of Mg/O2 Batteries 310 11.3.1 Calculation of Thermodynamic Overpotentials 310 11.3.2 Charge Transport in Mg/O2 Discharge Products 315 11.4 Concluding Remarks 320 References 321 12 Novel Methodologies to Model Charge Transport in Metal–Air Batteries 331Nicolai RaskMathiesen,Marko Melander,Mikael Kuisma, Pablo García-Fernández, and JuanMaria García Lastra 12.1 Introduction 331 12.2 Modeling Electrochemical Systems with GPAW 333 12.2.1 Density FunctionalTheory 333 12.2.2 Conductivity from DFT Data 335 12.2.3 The GPAWCode 337 12.2.4 Charge Transfer Rates with Constrained DFT 338 12.2.4.1 MarcusTheory of Charge Transfer 338 12.2.4.2 Constrained DFT 339 12.2.4.3 Polaronic Charge Transport at the Cathode 341 12.2.5 Electrochemistry at Solid–Liquid Interfaces 342 12.2.5.1 Modeling the Electrochemical Interface 342 12.2.5.2 Implicit Solvation at the Electrochemical Interface 343 12.2.5.3 Generalized Poisson–Boltzmann Equation for the Electric Double Layer 344 12.2.5.4 Electrode PotentialWithin the Poisson–Boltzmann Model 345 12.2.6 Calculations at Constant Electrode Potential 346 12.2.6.1 The Need for a Constant Potential Presentation 346 12.2.6.2 Grand Canonical Ensemble for Electrons 347 12.2.6.3 Fictitious Charge Dynamics 349 12.2.6.4 Model in Practice 350 12.2.7 Conclusions 351 12.3 Second Principles for MaterialModeling 351 12.3.1 The Energy in SP-DFT 352 12.3.2 The Lattice Term (E(0)) 353 12.3.3 Electronic Degrees of Freedom 354 12.3.4 Model Construction 357 12.3.5 Perspectives on SP-DFT 358 Acknowledgments 359 References 359 13 Flexible Metal–Air Batteries 367Huisheng Peng, Yifan Xu, Jian Pan, Yang Zhao, LieWang, and Xiang Shi 13.1 Introduction 367 13.2 Flexible Electrolytes 368 13.2.1 Aqueous Electrolytes 368 13.2.1.1 PAA-based Gel Polymer Electrolyte 369 13.2.1.2 PEO-based Gel Polymer Electrolyte 369 13.2.1.3 PVA-based Gel Polymer Electrolyte 371 13.2.2 Nonaqueous Electrolytes 373 13.2.2.1 PEO-based Polymer Electrolyte 373 13.2.2.2 PVDF-HFP-based Polymer Electrolyte 377 13.2.2.3 Ionic Liquid Electrolyte 377 13.3 Flexible Anodes 378 13.4 Flexible Cathodes 381 13.4.1 Modified Stainless Steel Mesh 381 13.4.2 Modified Carbon Textile 382 13.4.3 Carbon Nanotube 384 13.4.4 Graphene-based Cathode 385 13.4.5 Other Composite Electrode 386 13.5 Prototype Devices 386 13.5.1 Sandwich Structure 387 13.5.2 Fiber Structure 390 13.6 Summary 394 References 394 14 Perspectives on the Development of Metal–Air Batteries 397Zhiwen Chang and Xin-bo Zhang 14.1 Li–O2 Battery 397 14.1.1 Lithium Anode 397 14.1.2 Electrolyte 398 14.1.3 Cathode 398 14.1.4 The Reaction Mechanisms 399 14.1.5 The Development of Solid-state Li–O2 Battery 399 14.1.6 The Development of Flexible Li–O2 Battery 400 14.2 Na–O2 Battery 401 14.3 Zn–air Battery 402 References 403 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe International System of Units, the SI, provides the foundation for all measurements in science, engineering, economics, and society. The SI has been fundamentally revised in 2019. The new SI is a universal and highly stable unit system based on invariable constants of nature. Its implementation rests on quantum metrology and quantum standards, which base measurements on the manipulation and counting of single quantum objects, such as electrons, photons, ions, and flux quanta. This book explains and illustrates the new SI, its impact on measurements, and the quantum metrology and quantum technology behind it. The book is based on the book ?Quantum Metrology: Foundation of Units and Measurements? by the same authors. From the contents: -Measurement -The SI (Système International d?Unités) -Realization of the SI Second: Thermal Beam Cs Clock, Laser Cooling, and the Cs Fountain Clock -Flux Quanta, Josephson Effect, and the SI Volt -Quantum Hall Effect, the SI Ohm, and the SI Farad -Single-Charge Transfer Devices and the SI Ampere -The SI Kilogram, the Mole, and the Planck constant -The SI Kelvin and the Boltzmann Constant -Beyond the present SI: Optical Clocks and Quantum Radiometry -Outlook Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi List of Abbreviations xv 1 Introduction 1 References 3 2 Some Basics 5 2.1 Measurement 5 2.1.1 Limitations of Measurement Uncertainty 5 2.1.1.1 The Fundamental Quantum Limit 6 2.1.1.2 Noise 7 2.2 The SI (Système International d’Unités) 9 2.2.1 The Second: Unit of Time 11 2.2.2 The Meter: Unit of Length 13 2.2.3 The Kilogram: Unit of Mass 14 2.2.4 The Ampere: Unit of Electric Current 15 2.2.5 The Kelvin: Unit of Thermodynamic Temperature 16 2.2.6 The Mole: Unit of Amount of Substance 18 2.2.7 The Candela: Unit of Luminous Intensity 19 2.2.8 Summary: Base and Derived Units of the SI 21 References 21 3 Realization of the SI Second: Thermal Beam Cs Clock, Laser Cooling, and the Cs Fountain Clock 23 3.1 The Thermal Beam Cs Clock 25 3.2 Techniques for Laser Cooling and Trapping of Atoms 28 3.2.1 Doppler Cooling, Optical Molasses, and Magneto-Optical Traps 29 3.2.2 Cooling Below the Doppler Limit 31 3.3 The Cs Fountain Clock 32 References 35 4 Flux Quanta, Josephson Effect, and the SI Volt 39 4.1 Josephson Effect and Quantum Voltage Standards 39 4.1.1 Basics of Superconductivity 39 4.1.2 Basics of the Josephson Effect 41 4.1.2.1 AC and DC Josephson Effect 42 4.1.2.2 Mixed DC and AC Voltages: Shapiro Steps 43 4.1.3 Basic Physics of Real Josephson Junctions 44 4.1.4 Josephson Voltage Standards 46 4.1.4.1 General Overview: Materials and Technology of Josephson Arrays 47 4.1.4.2 SIS Josephson Voltage Standards 48 4.1.4.3 Programmable Binary Josephson Voltage Standards 50 4.1.4.4 Pulse-Driven AC Josephson Voltage Standards 53 4.1.5 Metrology with Josephson Voltage Standards 57 4.1.5.1 DC Voltage, the SI Volt 57 4.1.5.2 The Conventional Volt in the Previous SI 59 4.1.5.3 AC Measurements with Josephson Voltage Standards 59 4.2 Flux Quanta and SQUIDs 62 4.2.1 Superconductors in External Magnetic Fields 62 4.2.1.1 Meissner–Ochsenfeld Effect 63 4.2.1.2 Flux Quantization in Superconducting Rings 65 4.2.1.3 Josephson Junctions in External Magnetic Fields and Quantum Interference 66 4.2.2 Basics of SQUIDs 67 4.2.3 Applications of SQUIDs in Measurement 71 4.2.3.1 Real DC SQUIDs 71 4.2.3.2 SQUID Magnetometers and Magnetic Property Measurement Systems 73 4.2.3.3 Cryogenic Current Comparators: Current and Resistance Ratios 74 4.2.3.4 Biomagnetic Measurements 76 4.3 Traceable Magnetic Flux Density Measurements 77 References 80 5 Quantum Hall Effect, the SI Ohm, and the SI Farad 87 5.1 Basic Physics of Three- and Two-Dimensional Semiconductors 88 5.1.1 Three-Dimensional Semiconductors 88 5.1.2 Two-Dimensional Semiconductors 90 5.2 Two-Dimensional Electron Systems in Real Semiconductors 91 5.2.1 Basic Properties of Semiconductor Heterostructures 92 5.2.2 Epitaxial Growth of Semiconductor Heterostructures 93 5.2.3 Semiconductor Quantum Wells 94 5.2.4 Modulation Doping 95 5.3 The Hall Effect 97 5.3.1 The Classical Hall Effect 97 5.3.1.1 The Classical Hall Effect in Three Dimensions 97 5.3.1.2 The Classical Hall Effect in Two Dimensions 98 5.3.2 Physics of the Quantum Hall Effect 99 5.4 Metrology Using the Quantum Hall Effect 103 5.4.1 DC Quantum Hall Resistance Standards, the SI Ohm 103 5.4.2 The Conventional Ohm in the Previous SI 104 5.4.3 Technology of DC Quantum Hall Resistance Standards and Resistance Scaling 106 5.4.4 AC Quantum Hall Resistance Standards, the SI Farad 108 5.4.5 Relation Between Electrical Metrology and the Fine-Structure Constant 110 5.5 Graphene for Resistance Metrology 111 5.5.1 Basic Properties of Graphene 111 5.5.2 Fabrication of Graphene Monolayers for Resistance Metrology 113 5.5.3 Quantum Hall Effect in Monolayer Graphene 115 References 117 6 Single-Charge Transfer Devices and the SI Ampere 123 6.1 Basic Physics of Single-Electron Transport 124 6.1.1 Single-Electron Tunneling 124 6.1.2 Coulomb Blockade in SET Transistors 125 6.1.3 Coulomb Blockade Oscillations and Single-Electron Detection 127 6.1.4 Clocked Single-Electron Transfer 129 6.2 Quantized Current Sources 130 6.2.1 Metallic Single-Electron Pumps 131 6.2.2 Semiconducting Quantized Current Sources 133 6.2.2.1 GaAs-Based SET Devices 133 6.2.2.2 Silicon-Based SET Devices 137 6.2.3 Superconducting Quantized Current Sources 138 6.2.4 Self-Referenced Quantized Current Sources 140 6.3 Realization of the SI Ampere 142 6.3.1 Ampere Realization via the SI Volt and SI Ohm 142 6.3.2 Direct Ampere Realization with Quantized Current Sources 144 6.4 Consistency Tests: Quantum Metrology Triangle 144 References 146 7 The SI Kilogram, the Mole, and the Planck Constant 153 7.1 From “Monitoring the Stability of the Kilogram” to the Planck Constant 156 7.2 The Avogadro Experiment 158 7.3 The Kibble Balance Experiment 165 7.4 The Mole: Unit of Amount of Substance 169 7.5 The CODATA Evaluation of the Value of the Defining Planck Constant and the Maintenance and Dissemination of the Kilogram 170 7.5.1 The CODATA Evaluation and the Final Value of the Defining Planck Constant, h 170 7.5.2 Realization, Maintenance, and Dissemination of the Kilogram 172 References 173 8 The SI Kelvin and the Boltzmann Constant 181 8.1 Primary Thermometers 182 8.1.1 Dielectric Constant Gas Thermometry 183 8.1.2 Acoustic Gas Thermometry 184 8.1.3 Radiation Thermometry 186 8.1.4 Doppler Broadening Thermometry 187 8.1.5 Johnson Noise Thermometry 189 8.1.6 Coulomb Blockade Thermometry 191 8.2 The CODATA Evaluation of the Value of the Defining Boltzmann Constant, Realization and Dissemination of the New Kelvin 193 8.2.1 The CODATA Evaluation of the Final Value of the Defining Boltzmann Constant 193 8.2.2 Realization and Dissemination of the Kelvin 194 References 194 9 Beyond the Present SI: Optical Clocks and Quantum Radiometry 201 9.1 Optical Clocks and a New Second 201 9.1.1 Femtosecond Frequency Combs 204 9.1.2 Trapping of Ions and Neutral Atoms for Optical Clocks 209 9.1.2.1 Ion Traps 209 9.1.2.2 Optical Lattices 211 9.1.3 Neutral Atomic clocks 211 9.1.4 Atomic Ion Clocks 214 9.1.5 Possible Variation of the Fine-Structure Constant, 𝛼 217 9.2 Single-Photon Metrology and Quantum Radiometry 220 9.2.1 Single-Photon Sources 222 9.2.1.1 (NV) Color Centers in Diamond 223 9.2.1.2 Semiconductor Quantum Dots 225 9.2.2 Single-Photon Detectors 227 9.2.2.1 Nonphoton-Number-Resolving Detectors 227 9.2.2.2 Photon-Number-Resolving Detectors 228 9.2.3 Metrological Challenge 229 References 230 10 Outlook 245 References 246 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisHeterogeneous Catalysis for Sustainable Energy Explore the state-of-the-art in heterogeneous catalysis In Heterogeneous Catalysis for Sustainable Energy, a team of distinguished researchers delivers a comprehensive and cutting-edge treatment of recent advancements in energy-related catalytic reactions and processes in the field of heterogeneous catalysis. The book includes extensive coverage of the hydrogen economy, methane activation, methanol-to-hydrocarbons, carbon dioxide conversion, and biomass conversion. The authors explore different aspects of the technology, like reaction mechanisms, catalyst synthesis, and the commercial status of the reactions. The book also includes: A thorough introduction to the hydrogen economy, including hydrogen production, the reforming of oxygen-containing chemicals, and advances in Fischer-Tropsch Synthesis Comprehensive explorations of methane activation, including steam and dry reforming of methane and methane activation over zeolite catalysts Practical discussions of alkane activation, including cracking of hydrocarbons to light olefins and catalytic dehydrogenation of light alkanes In-depth examinations of zeolite catalysis and carbon dioxide as C1 building block Perfect for catalytic, physical, and surface chemists, Heterogeneous Catalysis for Sustainable Energy also belongs in the libraries of materials scientists with an interest in energy-related reactions and processes in the field of heterogeneous catalysis.Table of ContentsPART I: INTRODUCTION Chapter 1 Heterogeneous Catalysis in Face of Energy Challenges PART II: HYDROGEN ECONOMY Chapter 2 Water-gas Shift Reaction Chapter 3 Reforming of Oxygenates Chapter 4 The Fischer-Tropsch Synthesis Chapter 5 Ammonia Synthesis PART III: METHANE ACTIVATION Chapter 6 Steam and Dry Reforming of Methane Chapter 7 Oxidative Coupling and Dehydroaromatisation Chapter 8 Selective Oxidation to C1 Oxygenates Chapter 9 Halogenation and Oxy-halogenation PART IV: ALKANE ACTIVATION Chapter 10 Catalytic Cracking over Solid Acids Chapter 11 Catalytic Dehydrogenation of Light Alkanes Chapter 12 Selective Oxidation to Oxygenates PART V: METHANOL-TO-HYDROCARBONS Chapter 13 Zeolite Catalysts and Their Behaviors Chapter 14 Reaction and Deactivation Mechanism Chapter 15 Insights from Theoretical Calculations Chapter 16 Commercial Status and Economics PART VI: CARBON DIOXIDE AS C1 BUILDING BLOCK Chapter 17 Overview on CO2 mission and Utilization Chapter 18 Chemical Fixation into Carbonates Chapter 19 Reduction to Methanol PART VII: BIOMASS CONVERSION Chapter 20 Catalytic Conversion of Triglycerides Chapter 21 Catalytic Conversion of Glycerol Chapter 22 Conversion of Carbohydrates and Their Derivatives Chapter 23 Nitrogen Containing Platform Molecules to Chemicals PART VIII: PROSPECT Chapter 24 Summary and Outlook

Read more less

Book SynopsisNovel Electrochemical Energy Storage Devices Explore the latest developments in electrochemical energy storage device technologyIn Novel Electrochemical Energy Storage Devices, an accomplished team of authors delivers a thorough examination of the latest developments in the electrode and cell configurations of lithium-ion batteries and electrochemical capacitors. Several kinds of newly developed devices are introduced, with information about their theoretical bases, materials, fabrication technologies, design considerations, and implementation presented.You’ll learn about the current challenges facing the industry, future research trends likely to capture the imaginations of researchers and professionals working in industry and academia, and still-available opportunities in this fast-moving area. You’ll discover a wide range of new concepts, materials, and technologies that have been developed over the past few decades to advance the technologies of lithium‑ion batteries, electrochemical capacitors, and intelligent devices. Finally, you’ll find solutions to basic research challenges and the technologies applicable to energy storage industries.Readers will also benefit from the inclusion of: A thorough introduction to energy conversion and storage, and the history and classification of electrochemical energy storage An exploration of materials and fabrication of electrochemical energy storage devices, including categories, EDLCSs, pseudocapacitors, and hybrid capacitors A practical discussion of the theory and characterizations of flexible cells, including their mechanical properties and the limits of conventional architectures A concise treatment of the materials and fabrication technologies involved in the manufacture of flexible cells Perfect for materials scientists, electrochemists, and solid-state chemists, Novel Electrochemical Energy Storage Devices will also earn a place in the libraries of applied physicists, and engineers in power technology and the electrotechnical industry seeking a one-stop reference for portable and smart electrochemical energy storage devices.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Abbreviations xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Energy Conversion and Storage: A Global Challenge 1 1.2 Development History of Electrochemical Energy Storage 3 1.3 Classification of Electrochemical Energy Storage 4 1.4 LIBs and ECs: An Appropriate Electrochemical Energy Storage 6 1.5 Summary and Outlook 10 References 10 2 Materials and Fabrication 15 2.1 Mechanisms and Advantages of LIBs 15 2.1.1 Principles 15 2.1.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 16 2.2 Mechanisms and Advantages of ECs 18 2.2.1 Categories 18 2.2.2 EDLCs 18 2.2.3 Pseudocapacitor 20 2.2.4 Hybrid Capacitors 21 2.3 Roadmap of Conventional Materials for LIBs 22 2.4 Typical Positive Materials for LIBs 23 2.4.1 LiCoO2 Materials 23 2.4.2 LiNiO2 and Its Derivatives 25 2.4.3 LiMn2O4 Material 26 2.4.4 LiFePO4 Material 27 2.4.5 Lithium–Manganese-rich Materials 28 2.4.6 Commercial Status of Main Positive Materials 28 2.5 Typical Negative Materials for LIBs 29 2.5.1 Graphite 29 2.5.2 Soft and Hard Carbon 31 2.6 New Materials for LIBs 33 2.6.1 Nanocarbon Materials 33 2.6.2 Alloy-Based Materials 35 2.6.3 Metal Lithium Negative 39 2.7 Materials for Conventional ECs 39 2.7.1 Porous Carbon Materials 40 2.7.2 Transition Metal Oxides 41 2.7.3 Conducting Polymers 42 2.8 Electrolytes and Separators 42 2.8.1 Electrolytes 42 2.8.2 Separators 45 2.9 Evaluation Methods 46 2.9.1 Evaluation Criteria for LIBs 46 2.9.2 Theoretical Gravimetric and Volumetric Energy Density 46 2.9.3 Practical Energy and Power Density of LIBs 47 2.9.4 Cycle Life 48 2.9.5 Safety 48 2.9.6 Evaluation Methods for ECs 49 2.10 Production Processes for the Fabrication 50 2.10.1 Design 50 2.10.2 Mixing, Coating, Calendering, and Winding 51 2.10.3 Electrolyte Injecting and Formation 51 2.11 Perspectives 51 References 53 3 Flexible Cells: Theory and Characterizations 67 3.1 Limitations of the Conventional Cells 67 3.1.1 Mechanical Properties of Conventional Materials 67 3.1.2 Limitations of Conventional Architectures 68 3.1.3 Limitations of Electrolytes 69 3.2 Mechanical Process for Bendable Cells 69 3.2.1 Effect of Thickness 70 3.2.2 Effect of Flexible Substrates and Neutral Plane 71 3.3 Mechanics of Stretchable Cells 72 3.3.1 Wavy Architectures by Small Deformation Buckling Process 72 3.3.2 Wavy Architectures by Large Deformation Buckling Process 74 3.3.3 Island Bridge Architectures 75 3.4 Static Electrochemical Performance of Flexible Cells 76 3.5 Dynamic Performance of Flexible Cells 77 3.5.1 Bending Characterization 78 3.5.2 Stretching Characterization 78 3.5.3 Conformability Test 79 3.5.4 Stress Simulation by Finite Element Analysis 79 3.5.5 Dynamic Electrochemical Performance During Bending 83 3.5.6 Dynamic Electrochemical Performance During Stretching 85 3.6 Summary and Perspectives 90 References 90 4 Flexible Cells: Materials and Fabrication Technologies 95 4.1 Construction Principles of Flexible Cells 95 4.2 Substrate Materials for Flexible Cells 95 4.2.1 Polymer Substrates 96 4.2.2 Paper Substrate 97 4.2.3 Textile Substrate 98 4.3 Active Materials for Flexible Cells 98 4.3.1 CNTs 98 4.3.2 Graphene 99 4.3.3 Low-Dimensional Materials 99 4.4 Electrolytes for Flexible LIBs 101 4.4.1 Inorganic Solid-state Electrolytes for Flexible LIBs 102 4.4.2 Solid-state Polymer Electrolytes for Flexible LIBs 104 4.5 Electrolytes for Flexible ECs 104 4.6 Nonconductive Substrates-Based Flexible Cells 107 4.6.1 Paper-Based Flexible Cells 108 4.6.2 Textiles-Based Flexible Cells 112 4.6.3 Polymer Substrates-Based Flexible Cells 117 4.7 CNT and Graphene-Based Flexible Cells 121 4.7.1 Free-standing Graphene and CNTs Films for SCs 121 4.7.2 Free-standing Graphene and CNT Films for LIBs 122 4.7.3 Flexible CNTs/Graphene Composite Films for the Cells 125 4.8 Construction of Stretchable Cells by Novel Architectures 127 4.8.1 Stretchable Cells Based onWavy Architecture 127 4.8.2 Stretchable Cells Based on Island-Bridge Architecture 129 4.9 Conclusion and Perspectives 130 4.9.1 Mechanical Performance Improvement 131 4.9.2 Innovative Architecture for Stretchable Cells 132 4.9.3 Electrolytes Development 132 4.9.4 Packaging and Tabs 132 4.9.5 Integrated Flexible Devices 133 References 133 5 Architectures Design for Cells with High Energy Density 147 5.1 Strategies for High Energy Density Cells 147 5.2 Gravimetric and Volumetric Energy Density of Electrodes 149 5.3 Classification of Thick Electrodes: Bulk and Foam Electrodes 151 5.4 Design and Fabrication of Bulk Electrodes 153 5.4.1 Advantages of Bulk Electrodes 153 5.4.2 Low Tortuosity: The Key for Bulk Electrodes 155 5.5 Characterization and Numerical Simulation of Tortuosity 157 5.5.1 Characterization of Tortuosity by X-ray Tomography 157 5.5.2 Numerical Simulation of Tortuosity on Rates by Commercial Software 158 5.6 Fabrication Methods for Bulk Electrodes 159 5.7 Thick Electrodes with Random Pore Structure 160 5.7.1 Pressure-less High-temperature Sintering Process 160 5.7.2 Cold Sintering Process 161 5.7.3 Spark Plasma Sintering Technology 162 5.7.4 Brief Summary for Sintering Technologies 165 5.8 Thick Electrodes with Directional Pore Distribution 165 5.8.1 Iterative Extrusion Method 165 5.8.2 Magnetic-Induced Alignment Method 168 5.8.3 CarbonizedWood Template Method 168 5.8.4 Ice Templates Method 172 5.8.5 3D-Printing for Thick Electrodes 173 5.8.6 Brief Summary for Bulk Electrodes 175 5.9 Carbon-Based Foam Electrodes with High Gravimetric Energy Density 178 5.9.1 Graphene Foam 179 5.9.2 CNTs Foam 181 5.9.3 CNT/Graphene Foam 181 5.10 Carbon-Based Thick Electrodes 182 5.10.1 Low Electronic Conductive Material/Carbon Foam 182 5.10.2 Large Volume Variation Materials/Carbon Foam 186 5.10.3 Compact Graphene Electrodes 188 5.10.4 Summary for Carbon Foam Electrodes 189 5.11 Thick Electrodes Based on the Conductive Polymer Gels 191 5.12 Summary and Perspectives 193 References 195 6 Miniaturized Cells 205 6.1 Introduction 205 6.1.1 Definition of the Miniaturized Cells and Their Applications 205 6.1.2 Classification of Miniaturized Cells 206 6.1.3 Development Trends of the Miniaturized Cells 207 6.2 Evaluation Methods for the Miniaturized Cells 209 6.2.1 Evaluation Methods for Electric Double-layer m-ECs 210 6.2.2 Evaluation methods for m-LIBs and m-ECs 211 6.3 Architectures of Various Miniaturized Cells 212 6.4 Materials for the Miniaturized Cells 213 6.4.1 Electrode Materials 213 6.4.2 Electrolytes for the Miniaturized Cells 214 6.5 Fabrication Technologies for Miniaturized Cells 215 6.5.1 Fabrication of Miniaturized Cells with 2D Parallel Plate Configuration 216 6.6 Fabrication Technologies for 2D Interdigitated Cells 220 6.7 Printing Technologies for 2D Interdigitated Cells 222 6.7.1 Advantages of Printing Technologies 222 6.7.2 Classification of Printing Techniques 222 6.7.3 Screen Printing for Miniaturized Cells 224 6.7.4 Inkjet Printing 228 6.8 Electrochemical Deposition Method for 2D Interdigitated Cells 228 6.9 Laser Scribing for 2D Interdigitated Cells 231 6.10 In Situ Electrode Conversion for 2D Interdigitated Cells 234 6.11 Fabrication Technologies for 3D In-plane Miniaturized Cells 236 6.11.1 3D Printing for 3D Interdigitated Configuration Cells 236 6.11.2 3D Interdigitated Configuration by Electrodeposition 239 6.12 Fabrication of Miniaturized Cells with 3D Stacked Configuration 240 6.12.1 3D Stacked Configuration by Template Deposition 241 6.12.2 3D Stacked Configuration by Microchannel-Plated Deposition Methods 245 6.13 Integrated Systems 247 6.14 Summary and Perspectives 249 References 250 7 Smart Cells 263 7.1 Definition of Smart Materials and Cells 263 7.1.1 Definition of Smart Cells 263 7.1.2 Definition of Smart Materials 263 7.2 Type of Smart Materials 264 7.2.1 Self-healing Materials 264 7.2.2 Shape-memory Alloys 265 7.2.3 Thermal-responding PTC Thermistors 266 7.2.4 Electrochromic Materials 267 7.3 Construction of Smart Cells 268 7.3.1 Self-healing Silicon Anodes 268 7.3.2 Aqueous Self-healing Electrodes 271 7.3.3 Liquid-alloy Self-healing Electrode Materials 273 7.3.4 Thermal-responding Layer 274 7.3.5 Thermal-responding Electrodes Based on the PTC Effect 276 7.3.6 Ionic Blocking Effect-Based Thermal-responding Electrodes 278 7.4 Application of Shape-memory Materials in LIBs and ECs 280 7.4.1 Self-adapting Cells 280 7.4.2 Shape-memory Alloy-Based Thermal Regulator 281 7.5 Self-heating and Self-monitoring Designs 282 7.5.1 Self-heating 283 7.5.2 Self-monitoring 285 7.6 Integrated Electrochromic Architectures for Energy Storage 286 7.6.1 Integration Possibilities 286 7.6.2 Integrated Electrochromic ECs 287 7.6.3 Integrated Electrochromic LIBs 289 7.7 Summary and Perspectives 291 References 292 Index 301

Read more less

Book Synopsis3D and Circuit Integration of MEMS Explore heterogeneous circuit integration and the packaging needed for practical applications of microsystemsMEMS and system integration are important building blocks for the “More-Than-Moore” paradigm described in the International Technology Roadmap for Semiconductors. And, in 3D and Circuit Integration of MEMS, distinguished editor Dr. Masayoshi Esashi delivers a comprehensive and systematic exploration of the technologies for microsystem packaging and heterogeneous integration. The book focuses on the silicon MEMS that have been used extensively and the technologies surrounding system integration.You’ll learn about topics as varied as bulk micromachining, surface micromachining, CMOS-MEMS, wafer interconnection, wafer bonding, and sealing. Highly relevant for researchers involved in microsystem technologies, the book is also ideal for anyone working in the microsystems industry. It demonstrates the key technologies that will assist researchers and professionals deal with current and future application bottlenecks.Readers will also benefit from the inclusion of:A thorough introduction to enhanced bulk micromachining on MIS process, including pressure sensor fabrication and the extension of MIS process for various advanced MEMS devicesAn exploration of epitaxial poly Si surface micromachining, including process condition of epi-poly Si, and MEMS devices using epi-poly SiPractical discussions of Poly SiGe surface micromachining, including SiGe deposition and LP CVD polycrystalline SiGeA concise treatment of heterogeneously integrated aluminum nitride MEMS resonators and filtersPerfect for materials scientists, electronics engineers, and electrical and mechanical engineers, 3D and Circuit Integration of MEMS will also earn a place in the libraries of semiconductor physicists seeking a one-stop reference for circuit integration and the practical application of microsystems.Table of ContentsPart I Introduction 1 1 Overview 3Masayoshi Esashi References 10 Part II System on Chip 13 2 Bulk Micromachining 15Xinxin Li and Heng Yang 2.1 Process Basis of Bulk Micromachining Technologies 16 2.2 Bulk Micromachining Based on Wafer Bonding 20 2.2.1 SOI MEMS 20 2.2.2 Cavity SOI Technology 27 2.2.3 Silicon on Glass Processes: Dissolved Wafer Process (DWP) 29 2.3 Single-Wafer Single-Side Processes 34 2.3.1 Single-Crystal Reactive Etching and Metallization Process (SCREAM) 34 2.3.2 Sacrificial Bulk Micromachining (SBM) 38 2.3.3 Silicon on Nothing (SON) 40 References 45 3 Enhanced Bulk Micromachining Based on MIS Process 49Xinxin Li and Heng Yang 3.1 Repeating MIS Cycle for Multilayer 3D structures or Multi-sensor Integration 49 3.1.1 Pressure Sensors with PS3 Structure 49 3.1.2 P+G Integrated Sensors 52 3.2 Pressure Sensor Fabrication – From MIS Updated to TUB 54 3.3 Extension of MIS Process for Various Advanced MEMS Devices 58 References 58 4 Epitaxial Poly Si Surface Micromachining 61Masayoshi Esashi 4.1 Process Condition of Epi-poly Si 61 4.2 MEMS Devices Using Epi-poly Si 61 References 67 5 Poly-SiGe Surface Micromachining 69Carrie W. Low, Sergio F. Almeida, Emmanuel P. Quévy, and Roger T. Howe 5.1 Introduction 69 5.1.1 SiGe Applications in IC and MEMS 70 5.1.2 Desired SiGe Properties for MEMS 70 5.2 SiGe Deposition 70 5.2.1 Deposition Methods 70 5.2.2 Material Properties Comparison 71 5.2.3 Cost Analysis 72 5.3 LPCVD Polycrystalline SiGe 73 5.3.1 Vertical Furnace 73 5.3.2 Particle Control 75 5.3.3 Process Monitoring and Maintenance 75 5.3.4 In-line Metrology for Film Thickness and Ge Content 76 5.3.5 Process Space Mapping 77 5.4 CMEMS® Process 78 5.4.1 CMOS Interface Challenges 79 5.4.2 CMEMS Process Flow 80 5.4.2.1 Top Metal Module 80 5.4.2.2 Plug Module 84 5.4.2.3 Structural SiGe Module 85 5.4.2.4 Slit Module 85 5.4.2.5 Structure Module 85 5.4.2.6 Spacer Module 85 5.4.2.7 Electrode Module 85 5.4.2.8 Pad Module 86 5.4.3 Release 86 5.4.4 Al–Ge Bonding for Microcaps 87 5.5 Poly-SiGe Applications 88 5.5.1 Resonator for Electronic Timing 88 5.5.2 Nano-electro-mechanical Switches 92 References 94 6 Metal Surface Micromachining 99Minoru Sasaki 6.1 Background of Surface Micromachining 99 6.2 Static Device 100 6.3 Static Structure Fixed after the Single Movement 101 6.4 Dynamic Device 103 6.4.1 MEMS Switch 103 6.4.2 Digital Micromirror Device 104 6.5 Summary 111 References 111 7 Heterogeneously Integrated Aluminum Nitride MEMS Resonators and Filters 113Enes Calayir, Srinivas Merugu, Jaewung Lee, Navab Singh, and Gianluca Piazza 7.1 Overview of Integrated Aluminum Nitride MEMS 113 7.2 Heterogeneous Integration of Aluminum Nitride MEMS Resonators with CMOS Circuits 114 7.2.1 Aluminum Nitride MEMS Process Flow 115 7.2.2 Encapsulation of Aluminum Nitride MEMS Resonators and Filters 116 7.2.3 Redistribution Layers on Top of Encapsulated Aluminum Nitride MEMS 118 7.2.4 Selected Individual Resonator and Filter Frequency Responses 119 7.2.5 Flip-chip Bonding of Aluminum Nitride MEMS with CMOS 121 7.3 Heterogeneously Integrated Self-Healing Filters 123 7.3.1 Application of Statistical Element Selection (SES) to AlN MEMS Filters with CMOS Circuits 123 7.3.2 Measurement of 3D Hybrid Integrated Chip Stack 124 References 127 8 MEMS Using CMOS Wafer 131Weileun Fang, Sheng-Shian Li, Yi Chiu, and Ming-Huang Li 8.1 Introduction: CMOS MEMS Architectures and Advantages 131 8.2 Process Modules for CMOS MEMS 139 8.2.1 Process Modules for Thin Films 140 8.2.1.1 Metal Sacrificial 140 8.2.1.2 Oxide Sacrificial 142 8.2.1.3 TiN-composite (TiN-C) 143 8.2.2 Process Modules for the Substrate 145 8.2.2.1 SF6 and XeF2 (Dry Isotropic) 145 8.2.2.2 KOH and TMAH (Wet Anisotropic) 146 8.2.2.3 RIE and DRIE (Front-side RIE, Backside DRIE) 146 8.3 The 2P4M CMOS Platform (0.35 μm) 148 8.3.1 Accelerometer 148 8.3.2 Pressure Sensor 149 8.3.3 Resonators 150 8.3.4 Others 152 8.4 The 1P6M CMOS Platform (0.18 μm) 154 8.4.1 Tactile Sensors 154 8.4.2 IR Sensor 156 8.4.3 Resonators 158 8.4.4 Others 160 8.5 CMOS MEMS with Add-on Materials 164 8.5.1 Gas and Humidity Sensors 164 8.5.1.1 Metal Oxide 164 8.5.1.2 Polymer 170 8.5.2 Biochemical Sensors 173 8.5.3 Pressure and Acoustic Sensors 175 8.5.3.1 Microfluidic Structures 178 8.6 Monolithic Integration of Circuits and Sensors 180 8.6.1 Multi-sensor Integration 180 8.6.1.1 Gas Sensors 180 8.6.1.2 Physical Sensors 181 8.6.2 Readout Circuit Integration 183 8.6.2.1 Resistive Sensors 183 8.6.2.2 Capacitive Sensors 184 8.6.2.3 Inductive Sensors 188 8.6.2.4 Resonant Sensors 190 8.7 Issues and Concerns 191 8.7.1 Residual Stresses, CTE Mismatch, and Creep of Thin Films 192 8.7.1.1 Initial Deformation – Residual Stress 192 8.7.1.2 Thermal Deformation – Thermal Expansion Coefficient Mismatch 195 8.7.1.3 Long-time Stability – Creep 197 8.7.2 Quality Factor, Materials Loss, and Temperature Stability 199 8.7.2.1 Anchor Loss 201 8.7.2.2 Thermoelastic Damping (TED) 201 8.7.2.3 Material and Interface Loss 201 8.7.3 Dielectric Charging 203 8.7.4 Nonlinearity and Phase Noise in Oscillators 204 8.8 Concluding Remarks 205 References 207 9 Wafer Transfer 221Masayoshi Esashi 9.1 Introduction 221 9.2 Film Transfer 223 9.3 Device Transfer (via-last) 228 9.4 Device Transfer (Via-First) 231 9.5 Chip Level Transfer 236 References 241 10 Piezoelectric MEMS 243T Takeshi Kobayashi (AIST) 10.1 Introduction 243 10.1.1 Fundamental 243 10.1.2 PZT Thin Films Property as an Actuator 244 10.1.3 PZT Thin Film Composition and Orientation 246 10.2 PZT Thin Film Deposition 246 10.2.1 Sputtering 246 10.2.2 Sol–Gel 248 10.2.2.1 Orientation Control 248 10.2.2.2 Thick Film Deposition 249 10.2.3 Electrode Materials and Lifetime of PZT Thin Films 250 10.3 PZT–MEMS Fabrication Process 251 10.3.1 Cantilever and Microscanner 251 10.3.2 Poling 254 References 255 Part III Bonding, Sealing and Interconnection 257 11 Anodic Bonding 259Masayoshi Esashi 11.1 Principle 259 11.2 Distortion 262 11.3 Influence of Anodic Bonding to Circuits 263 11.4 Anodic Bonding with Various Materials, Structures and Conditions 265 11.4.1 Various Combinations 265 11.4.2 Anodic Bonding with Intermediate Thin Films 269 11.4.3 Variation of Anodic Bonding 271 11.4.4 Glass Reflow Process 274 References 276 12 Direct Bonding 279Hideki Takagi 12.1 Wafer Direct Bonding 279 12.2 Hydrophilic Wafer Bonding 279 12.3 Surface Activated Bonding at Room Temperature 283 References 286 13 Metal Bonding 289Joerg Froemel 13.1 Solid Liquid Interdiffusion Bonding (SLID) 290 13.1.1 Au/In and Cu/In 291 13.1.2 Au/Ga and Cu/Ga 294 13.1.3 Au/Sn and Cu/Sn 297 13.1.4 Void Formation 297 13.2 Metal Thermocompression Bonding 298 13.2.1.1 Interface Formation 299 13.2.1.2 Grain Reorientation 299 13.2.1.3 Grain Growth 300 13.3 Eutectic Bonding 301 13.3.1 Au/Si 302 13.3.2 Al/Ge 302 13.3.3 Au/Sn 304 References 304 14 Reactive Bonding 309Klaus Vogel, Silvia Hertel, Christian Hofmann, Mathias Weiser, Maik Wiemer, Thomas Otto, and Harald Kuhn 14.1 Motivation 309 14.2 Fundamentals of Reactive Bonding 309 14.3 Material Systems 311 14.4 State of the Art 312 14.5 Deposition Concepts of Reactive Material Systems 313 14.5.1 Physical Vapor Deposition 313 14.5.1.1 Conclusion Physical Vapor Deposition and Patterning 315 14.5.2 Electrochemical Deposition of Reactive Material Systems 315 14.5.2.1 Dual Bath Technology 316 14.5.2.2 Single Bath Technology 318 14.5.2.3 Conclusion DBT and SBT 319 14.5.3 Vertical Reactive Material Systems With 1D Periodicity 319 14.5.3.1 Dimensioning 320 14.5.3.2 Fabrication 321 14.5.3.3 Conclusion 323 14.6 Bonding With RMS 323 14.7 Conclusion 326 References 326 15 Polymer Bonding 331Xiaojing Wang and Frank Niklaus 15.1 Introduction 331 15.2 Materials for Polymer Wafer Bonding 332 15.2.1 Polymer Adhesion Mechanisms 332 15.2.2 Properties of Polymers for Wafer Bonding 335 15.2.3 Polymers Used in Wafer Bonding 337 15.3 Polymer Wafer Bonding Technology 341 15.3.1 Process Parameters in Polymer Wafer Bonding 341 15.3.2 Localized Polymer Wafer Bonding 348 15.4 Precise Wafer-to-Wafer Alignment in Polymer Wafer Bonding 350 15.5 Practical Examples of Polymer Wafer Bonding Processes 351 15.6 Summary and Conclusions 354 References 354 16 Soldering by Local Heating 361Yu-Ting Cheng and Liwei Lin 16.1 Soldering in MEMS Packaging 361 16.2 Laser Soldering 362 16.3 Resistive Heating and Soldering 365 16.4 Inductive Heating and Soldering 368 16.5 Other Localized Soldering Processes 370 16.5.1 Self-propagative Reaction Heating 370 16.5.2 Ultrasonic Frictional Heating 371 References 374 17 Packaging, Sealing, and Interconnection 377Masayoshi Esashi 17.1 Wafer Level Packaging 377 17.2 Sealing 378 17.2.1 Reaction Sealing 378 17.2.2 Deposition Sealing (Shell Packaging) 380 17.2.3 Metal Compression Sealing 385 17.3 Interconnection 388 17.3.1 Vertical Feedthrough Interconnection 388 17.3.1.1 Through Glass via (TGV) Interconnection 388 17.3.1.2 Through Si via (TSiV) Interconnection 393 17.3.2 Lateral Feedthrough Interconnection 395 17.3.3 Interconnection by Electroplating 401 References 404 18 Vacuum Packaging 409Masayoshi Esashi 18.1 Problems of Vacuum Packaging 409 18.2 Vacuum Packaging by Anodic Bonding 409 18.3 Packaging by Anodic Bonding with Controlled Cavity Pressure 414 18.4 Vacuum Packaging by Metal Bonding 416 18.5 Vacuum Packaging by Deposition 417 18.6 Hermeticity Testing 417 References 420 19 Buried Channels in Monolithic Si 423Kazusuke Maenaka 19.1 Buried Channel/Cavity in LSI and MEMS 423 19.2 Monolithic SON Technology and Related Technologies 425 19.3 Applications of SON 435 References 439 20 Through-substrate Vias 443Zhyao Wang 20.1 Configurations of TSVs 444 20.1.1 Solid TSVs 444 20.1.2 Hollow TSVs 445 20.1.3 Air-gap TSVs 445 20.2 TSV Applications in MEMS 445 20.2.1 Signal Conduction to the Wafer Backside 446 20.2.2 CMOS-MEMS 3D Integration 446 20.2.3 MEMS and CMOS 2.5D Integration 447 20.2.4 Wafer-level Vacuum Packaging 448 20.2.5 Other Applications 450 20.3 Considerations for TSV in MEMS 450 20.4 Fundamental TSV Fabrication Technologies 450 20.4.1 Deep Hole Etching 451 20.4.1.1 Deep Reactive Ion Etching 451 20.4.1.2 Laser Ablation 452 20.4.2 Insulator Formation 454 20.4.2.1 Silicon Dioxide Insulators 454 20.4.2.2 Polymer Insulators 455 20.4.2.3 Air-gaps 455 20.4.3 Conductor Formation 455 20.4.3.1 Polysilicon 456 20.4.3.2 Single Crystalline Silicon 456 20.4.3.3 Tungsten 457 20.4.3.4 Copper 457 20.4.3.5 Other Conductor Materials 459 20.5 Polysilicon TSVs 460 20.5.1 Solid Polysilicon TSVs 460 20.5.2 Air-gap Polysilicon TSVs 463 20.6 Silicon TSVs 464 20.6.1 Solid Silicon TSVs 465 20.6.2 Air-gap Silicon TSVs 467 20.7 Metal TSVs 469 20.7.1 Solid Metal TSVs 470 20.7.2 Hollow Metal TSVs 474 20.7.3 Air-gap Metal TSVs 480 References 481 Index 493

Read more less

Book SynopsisNanotechnology in Electronics Enables readers to understand and apply state-of-the-art concepts surrounding modern nanotechnology in electronics Nanotechnology in Electronics summarizes numerous research accomplishments in the field, covering novel materials for electronic applications (such as graphene, nanowires, and carbon nanotubes) and modern nanoelectronic devices (such as biosensors, optoelectronic devices, flexible electronics, nanoscale batteries, and nanogenerators) that are used in many different fields (such as sensor technology, energy generation, data storage and biomedicine). Edited by four highly qualified researchers and professionals in the field, other specific sample topics covered in Nanotechnology in Electronics include: Graphene-based nanoelectronics biosensors, including the history, properties, and fundamentals of graphene, plus fundamentals of graphene derivatives and the synthesis of graphene Zinc oxide piezoelectronic nanogenerators for low frequency applications, with an introduction to zinc oxide and zinc oxide piezoelectric nanogenerators Investigation of the hot junctionless mosfets, including an overview of the junctionless paradigm and a simulation framework of the hot carrier degradation Conductive nanomaterials for printed/flexible electronics application and metal oxide semiconductors for non-invasive diagnosis of breast cancer The fundamental aspects and applications of multiferroic-based spintronic devices and quartz tuning fork based nanosensors. Containing in-depth information on the topic and written intentionally to help with the practical application of concepts described within, Nanotechnology in Electronics is a must-have reference for materials scientists, electronics engineers, and engineering scientists who wish to understand and harness the state of the art in the field.Table of ContentsNANOTECHNOLOGY AND ELECTRONICS - INTRODUCTION SEMICONDUCTORS FOR NANOELECTRONICS Nanoelectronics and Semiconductors Devices Application of Air-Sensitive Semiconductors in Nanoelectronics Metals for Nanoelectronics Semiconductor Nanowires: From Macroelectronics to Nanoelectronics SiGe QUANTUM STRUCTURES FOR NANOELECTRONICS GRAPHENE-BASED NANOELECTRONIC BIOSENSORS Graphene-Based Nanoelectronic Biosensors Recent Advances in Graphene-Based Biosensors DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF RUBBER-BASED NANOCOMPOSITES Dielectric Properties of Rubbers Dielectric Properties of Natural Rubber-Based Nanocomposites Containing Graphene Dielectric Properties of Silicone Rubber/Tib2 Nanocomposites Dielectric Properties of Tio2/Silicone Rubber Micro- and Nanocomposites DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF NON-RUBBER-BASED NANOCOMPOSITES Dielectric Properties of Polymers Dielectric Properties of Composites Dielectric Properties of Nanocomposites Dielectric Properties of Bio-Nanocomposites ELECTRONIC PROPERTIES OF NANOWIRES AND THEIR ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS Electronics Properties of Nanowires Silicon Nanowires and Their Applications Metallic Nanowires and Their Applications Nanowire Electronic and Optoelectronic Devices Indium Phosphide Nanowires and Their Applications in Optoelectronic Devices Large-Scale Integration of Semiconductor Nanowires for High-Performance Flexible Electronics THEORETICAL ANALYSIS AND MODELING FOR NANOELECTRONICS Theoretical Analysis for Nanoelectronics Modeling for Nanoelectronics HYBRID AND NANOCOMPOSITE MATERIALS FOR FLEXIBLE ORGANIC ELECTRONICS APPLICATIONS Production Methods of Flexible Organic Electronics Properties of Flexible Organic Electronics Limitations of Their Use in Flexible Electronics Applications CARBON NANOTUBE-BASED NANOCOMPOSITES FOR ELECTRONICS APPLICATIONS Carbon Nanotubes (CNT) Based Nanocomposites CNT-Epoxy Composites for Electrically Conductive Adhesives Electrochemical Deposition of CNT-Cu Composites Recent Development of CNT Materials for Li Ion Batteries Polyaniline/Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposite Film-Based Electronic Gas Sensors NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES IN MEDICAL AND BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS Nanoelectronic Devices in Medical Applications Nanoelectronic Devices in Biomedical Applications SILICON-BASED NANOELECTRONICS AND NANOELECTROMECHANICS Silicon-Based Nanoelectromechanics SiO2/Semiconductor Nanoelectronic Materials ENVIRONMENTAL CHALLENGES IN NANOELECTRONICS MANUFACTURING Environmental Problems Effect of Nanoelectronics in Environment ZINC OXIDE PIEZOELECTRIC NANOGENERATORS FOR LOW FREQUENCY APPLICATIONS Zinc Oxide Piezoelectric Nanogenerators Nano-Generators for Low Frequency Applications Zinc Oxide Piezoelectric Nanogenerators for Low Frequency Applications PIEZOELECTRIC ENERGY GENERATION AND HARVESTING AT THE NANO-SCALE: MATERIALS AND DEVICES Piezoelectric Materials and Devices Piezoelectric Energy Generation and Harvesting at The Nano-Scale

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book "Nitride Semiconductor Technology" provides an overview of nitride semiconductors and their uses in optoelectronics and power electronics devices. It explains the physical properties of those materials as well as their growth methods. Their applications in high electron mobility transistors, vertical power devices, LEDs, laser diodes, and vertical-cavity surface-emitting lasers are discussed in detail. The book further examines reliability issues in these materials and puts forward perspectives of integrating them with 2D materials for novel high-frequency and high-power devices. In summary, it covers nitride semiconductor technology from materials to devices and provides the basis for further research. Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction to Gallium Nitride Properties and Applications 1Fabrizio Roccaforte and Mike Leszczynski 1.1 Historical Background 1 1.2 Basic Properties of Nitrides 4 1.2.1 Microstructure and Related Issues 7 1.2.2 Optical Properties 13 1.2.3 Electrical Properties 16 1.2.4 Two-Dimensional Electron Gas (2DEG) in AlGaN/GaN Heterostructures 19 1.3 Applications of GaN-Based Materials 23 1.3.1 Optoelectronic Devices 24 1.3.2 Power- and High-Frequency Electronic Devices 26 1.4 Summary 30 Acknowledgments 31 References 31 2 GaN-Based Materials: Substrates, Metalorganic Vapor-Phase Epitaxy, and Quantum Well Properties 41Ferdinand Scholz, Michal Bockowski, and Ewa Grzanka 2.1 Introduction 41 2.2 Bulk GaN Growth 42 2.2.1 Hydride Vapor-Phase Epitaxy (HVPE) 43 2.2.2 Sodium Flux Growth Method 45 2.2.3 Ammonothermal Growth 46 2.3 MOVPE Growth 51 2.3.1 Basics About Nitride MOVPE 54 2.3.2 Epitaxy on Foreign Substrates 58 2.3.2.1 Sapphire as a Foreign Substrate 58 2.3.2.2 GaN on SiC and Si 60 2.3.3 Defect Reduction by ELOG, FACELO, etc. 62 2.3.4 In Situ ELOG by SiN Deposition 64 2.3.5 Doping of Nitrides 64 2.3.6 Growth of Other Binary and Ternary Nitrides 67 2.4 InGaN QWs: Growth and Decomposition 72 2.4.1 Growth of InGaN QWs on Polar, Nonpolar, and Semipolar GaN Substrates 72 2.4.2 Origins of In Fluctuations 75 2.4.3 Homogenization of InGaN QWs 78 2.4.4 Decomposition of the QWs 79 2.5 Summary 82 Acknowledgments 82 References 83 3 GaN-Based HEMTs for Millimeter-wave Applications 99Kathia Harrouche and Farid Medjdoub 3.1 Introduction 99 3.2 Targeted Applications for GaN Millimeter-wave Devices 99 3.2.1 High-Power Amplification 100 3.2.2 Broadband Amplifiers 102 3.2.3 5G 103 3.2.3.1 GaN for 5G 104 3.2.3.2 GaN Base Station PAs 106 3.2.3.3 Moving Forward to 6G 108 3.3 GaN-based Material Designs for Millimeter-wave Applications 108 3.3.1 Intrinsic Characteristics and Comparison with Other Materials for RF Devices 108 3.3.2 Specific Material Systems for RF Devices 114 3.4 Device Design and Fabrication of Millimeter-wave GaN Devices 116 3.4.1 Description of Key Processing Steps for Various GaN Device Designs 116 3.4.1.1 Device Scaling for Millimeter Wave 116 3.4.1.2 T-shaped Gate Design 116 3.4.1.3 Advanced Ohmic Contact Technology 117 3.4.1.4 N-polar GaN HEMTs 118 3.4.1.5 AlN-Based Device Performances 119 3.4.1.6 InAlGaN-Based Device Performances 121 3.4.2 State-of-the-art Millimeter-wave GaN Transistors 122 3.5 Overview of MMIC Power Amplifiers 123 3.5.1 MMIC Technology Using III-N Devices 123 3.5.1.1 III–V Material-Based MMIC Technology 123 3.5.1.2 Power Amplifiers 124 3.5.1.3 Low-Noise Amplifier 125 3.5.2 MMIC Examples from Ka-band to D-band Frequencies 125 3.6 Summary 126 References 127 4 Technologies for Normally-off GaN HEMTs 137Giuseppe Greco, Patrick Fiorenza, Ferdinando Iucolano, and Fabrizio Roccaforte 4.1 Introduction 137 4.1.1 Threshold Voltage in AlGaN/GaN HEMTs 138 4.2 GaN HEMT “Cascode” 140 4.3 “True” Normally-off HEMT Technologies 142 4.3.1 Recessed-gate HEMT 142 4.3.2 Fluorinated HEMT 145 4.3.3 Recessed-gate Hybrid MISHEMT 149 4.3.4 p-GaN Gate HEMT 155 4.4 Other Approaches 163 4.5 Summary 164 Acknowledgments 165 References 165 5 Vertical GaN Power Devices 177Srabanti Chowdhury and Dong Ji 5.1 Introduction 177 5.2 Vertical GaN Devices for Power Conversion 177 5.3 Vertical GaN Transistors 178 5.3.1 Current Aperture Vertical Electron Transistor (CAVET) 178 5.3.2 Vertical MOSFETs 182 5.4 High-Voltage Diodes in GaN 185 5.5 Avalanche Electroluminescence in GaN P–N Diodes 186 5.6 Impact Ionization Coefficients in GaN 188 5.6.1 Impact of Impact Ionization Studies on Predictive Modeling 193 5.7 Summary 193 Acknowledgments 193 References 194 6 Reliability Issues in GaN Electronic Devices 199Milan Ťapajna and Christian Koller 6.1 Introduction 199 6.1.1 Reliability Testing and Failure Analysis of GaN HEMTs 200 6.2 Reliability of GaN HEMTs for RF Applications 204 6.2.1 AlGaN/GaN HEMTs 204 6.2.1.1 Trapping Effects 204 6.2.1.2 Gate-edge Degradation 207 6.2.1.3 Hot Electron Degradation 209 6.2.2 InAlN/GaN HEMTs 211 6.2.2.1 Hot Electron Degradation 212 6.2.2.2 Role of Hot Phonons 214 6.2.3 Thermal Issues in RF GaN HEMTs 215 6.3 Reliability and Robustness of GaN Power Switching Devices 219 6.3.1 Parasitic Effects in the Carbon-Doped GaN Buffer 221 6.3.1.1 Insulation of GaN Buffer by Carbon Doping 221 6.3.1.2 Time-Dependent “Dielectric” Breakdown (TDDB) of the GaN Buffer 223 6.3.1.3 Dynamic RDS,ON Due to Buffer Trapping 225 6.3.2 Gate Degradation in p-GaN Switching HEMTs 230 6.3.3 Vth Instabilities in GaN MISHEMTs 233 6.3.3.1 Studies of PBTI in MISHEMTs 237 6.4 Summary 241 Acknowledgments 241 References 241 7 Light-Emitting Diodes 253Amit Yadav, Hideki Hirayama, and Edik U. Rafailov 7.1 Introduction 253 7.2 State-of-the-Art GaN LEDs 254 7.2.1 Blue LEDs 258 7.2.2 Green LEDs 262 7.3 GaN White LEDs: Approaches and Properties 264 7.3.1 Monolithic LEDs 267 7.3.2 Phosphor-Covered LEDs 271 7.4 AlGaN Deep UV LEDs 275 7.4.1 Growth of High-Quality AlN and Increasing in Internal Quantum Efficiency (IQE) 278 7.4.2 AlGaN-based UVC LEDs 281 7.4.3 Increasing the Light Extraction Efficiency (LEE) 282 7.5 Summary 287 Acknowledgments 288 References 288 8 Laser Diodes Grown by Molecular Beam Epitaxy 301Greg Muziol, Henryk Turski, Marcin Siekacz, Marta Sawicka, and Czeslaw Skierbiszewski 8.1 Introduction 301 8.2 III-N Growth Fundamentals by Plasma-Assisted MBE 303 8.2.1 Role of N-Flux for Efficient InGaN QWs 304 8.3 Wide InGaN QWs – Beyond Quantum-Confined Stark Effect 305 8.4 Long-Living Laser Diodes on Bulk Ammono-GaN 313 8.5 Laser Diodes with Tunnel Junctions 316 8.5.1 Stacks of Vertically Interconnected Laser Diodes 319 8.5.2 Distributed Feedback Laser Diodes 321 8.6 Summary 324 Acknowledgments 324 References 325 9 Edge Emitting Laser Diodes and Superluminescent Diodes 333Szymon Stanczyk, Anna Kafar, Dario Schiavon, Stephen Najda, Thomas Slight, and Piotr Perlin 9.1 Laser Diode: History and Development 333 9.1.1 Optoelectronics Background 333 9.1.2 Gallium Nitride Technology Breakthroughs 335 9.1.3 Development of Nitride Laser Diodes 337 9.2 Distributed Feedback Laser Diodes 342 9.3 Superluminescent Diodes 348 9.3.1 History of Superluminescent Diode Development 348 9.3.2 Basic SLD Properties 351 9.3.3 Challenges for SLD Optimization 353 9.4 Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers 354 9.5 Summary 357 References 358 10 Green and Blue Vertical-Cavity Surface-Emitting Lasers 367Yang Mei, Rong-Bin Xu, Huan Xu, and Bao-Ping Zhang 10.1 Introduction 367 10.1.1 Properties and Application of GaN VCSELs 367 10.1.2 Brief History and Current Status of GaN VCSELs 368 10.1.3 GaN VCSELs with Different DBRs 369 10.1.3.1 GaN VCSELs with Hybrid DBR Structure 370 10.1.3.2 GaN VCSELs with Double Dielectric DBR Structure 371 10.2 Efficiency of Heat Dissipation of Different Device Structures 372 10.2.1 Simulation of Heat Profile of the Device 372 10.2.2 Dependence of Rth on Cavity Length 373 10.3 Green VCSELs Based on InGaN QDs 375 10.3.1 Advantages of QDs Compared with QWs 375 10.3.2 Growth and Optical Properties of InGaN QDs 377 10.3.3 Fabrication Process of VCSELs 379 10.3.4 Properties of QD Green VCSELs 379 10.4 Green VCSELs Based on Cavity-Enhanced Emission of Localized States in Blue Emitting InGaN QWs 380 10.4.1 Cavity Effect 380 10.4.2 Properties of Cavity-Enhanced Green VCSELs 381 10.5 Dual-Wavelength Lasing Based on QD-in-QW Active Structure 384 10.5.1 Characteristics of QD-in-QW Structure 384 10.5.2 Lasing Characteristics of VCSELs 386 10.6 Blue VCSELs with Different Lateral Confinements 386 10.6.1 Design of Index-Guided Structure 386 10.6.2 Emission Properties of VCSELs with Lateral Confinement 388 10.7 Summary 389 References 390 11 Integration of 2DMaterials with Nitrides for Novel Electronic and Optoelectronic Applications 397Filippo Giannazzo, Emanuela Schilirò, Raffaella Lo Nigro, Pawel Prystawko, and Yvon Cordier 11.1 Introduction 397 11.2 Fabrication of 2D Material Heterostructures with Nitride Semiconductors 400 11.2.1 Transfer of 2D Materials Grown on a Foreign Substrate 400 11.2.2 Direct Growth of 2D Materials on Group III-Nitrides 403 11.2.3 2D Materials as Templates for the Growth of Nitride Semiconductor Films 407 11.3 Electronic Devices Based on 2D Materials/GaN Heterojunctions 413 11.3.1 Band-to-band Tunneling Diodes Based on MoS2/GaN Heterojunctions 413 11.3.2 Hot Electron Transistors with Graphene Base and Al(Ga)N/GaN Emitter 414 11.4 Optoelectronic Devices Based on 2D Material Junctions with GaN 421 11.4.1 GaN LEDs with Graphene-Transparent Conductive Electrodes 421 11.4.2 MoS2/GaN Deep UV Photodetectors 427 11.5 Applications of Graphene for Thermal Management in GaN HEMTs 428 11.6 Summary 431 Acknowledgments 431 References 432 Index 439

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnparalleled coverage of the most vibrant research field in photovoltaics! Hybrid perovskites, revolutionary game-changing semiconductor materials, have every favorable optoelectronic characteristic necessary for realizing high efficiency solar cells. The remarkable features of hybrid perovskite photovoltaics, such as superior material properties, easy material fabrication by solution-based processing, large-area device fabrication by an inkjet technology, and simple solar cell structures, have brought enormous attentions, leading to a rapid development of the solar cell technology at a pace never before seen in solar cell history. Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells: Characteristics and Operation covers extensive topics of hybrid perovskite solar cells, providing easy-to-read descriptions for the fundamental characteristics of unique hybrid perovskite materials (Part I) as well as the principles and applications of hybrid perovskite solar cells (Part II). Both basic and advanced concepts of hybrid perovskite devices are treated thoroughly in this book; in particular, explanatory descriptions for general physical and chemical aspects of hybrid perovskite photovoltaics are included to provide fundamental understanding. This comprehensive book is highly suitable for graduate school students and researchers who are not familiar with hybrid perovskite materials and devices, allowing the accumulation of the accurate knowledge from the basic to the advanced levels.Table of ContentsPreface xv About the Editor xix 1 Introduction 1 Hiroyuki Fujiwara 1.1 Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 1 1.2 Unique Natures of Hybrid Perovskites 4 1.2.1 Notable Characteristics of Hybrid Perovskites 5 1.2.2 Fundamental Properties of MAPbI3 8 1.2.3 Why Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells Show High Efficiency? 11 1.3 Advantages of Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 12 1.3.1 Band Gap Tunability 12 1.3.2 High Voc 13 1.3.3 Low Temperature Coefficient 16 1.4 Challenges for Hybrid Perovskites 16 1.4.1 Requirement of Improved Stability 17 1.4.2 Large-Area Solar Cells 19 1.4.3 Toxicity of Pb and Sn Compounds 20 1.5 Overview of this Book 22 Acknowledgment 23 References 23 2 Overview of Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 29 Tsutomu Miyasaka and Ajay K. Jena 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Historical Backgrounds of Halide Perovskite Photovoltaics 32 2.3 Semiconductor Properties of Organo Lead Halide Perovskites 34 2.4 Working Principle of Perovskite Photovoltaics 37 2.5 Compositional Design of the Halide Perovskite Absorbers 40 2.6 Strategy for Stabilizing Perovskite Solar Cells 41 2.7 All Inorganic and Lead-Free Perovskites 48 2.8 Development of High-Efficiency Tandem Solar Cells 52 2.9 Conclusion and Perspectives 54 References 55 Part I Characteristics of Hybrid Perovskites 65 3 Crystal Structures 67 Mitsutoshi Nishiwaki, Tatsuya Narikuri, and Hiroyuki Fujiwara 3.1 What Is Hybrid Perovskite? 67 3.2 Structures of Hybrid Perovskite Crystals 68 3.2.1 Crystal Structure of MAPbI3 68 3.2.2 Lattice Parameters of Hybrid Perovskites 71 3.2.3 Secondary Phase Materials 75 3.3 Tolerance Factor 77 3.3.1 Tolerance Factor of Hybrid Perovskites 79 3.3.2 Tolerance Factor of Mixed-Cation Perovskites 82 3.4 Phase Change by Temperature 84 3.5 Refined Structures of Hybrid Perovskites 86 3.5.1 Orientation of Center Cations 86 3.5.2 Relaxation of Center Cations 88 Acknowledgment 89 References 89 4 Optical Properties 91 Hiroyuki Fujiwara, Yukinori Nishigaki, Akio Matsushita, and Taisuke Matsui 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Light Absorption in MAPbI3 93 4.2.1 Visible/UV Region 96 4.2.2 IR Region 98 4.2.3 THz Region 99 4.3 Band Gap of Hybrid Perovskites 101 4.3.1 Band Gap Analysis of MAPbI3 101 4.3.2 Band Gap of Basic Perovskites 103 4.3.3 Band Gap Variation in Perovskite Alloys 105 4.4 True Absorption Coefficient of MAPbI3 106 4.4.1 Principles of Optical Measurements 107 4.4.2 Interpretation of α Variation 108 4.5 Universal Rules for Hybrid Perovskite Optical Properties 111 4.5.1 Variation with Center Cation 111 4.5.2 Variation with Halide Anion 112 4.6 Subgap Absorption Characteristics 114 4.7 Temperature Effect on Absorption Properties 116 4.8 Excitonic Properties of Hybrid Perovskites 117 References 119 5 Physical Properties Determined by Density Functional Theory 123 Hiroyuki Fujiwara, Mitsutoshi Nishiwaki, and Yukinori Nishigaki 5.1 Introduction 123 5.2 What Is DFT? 124 5.2.1 Basic Principles 124 5.2.2 Assumptions and Limitations 126 5.3 Crystal Structures Determined by DFT 128 5.3.1 Hybrid Perovskite Structures 128 5.3.2 Organic-Center Cations 131 5.4 Band Structures 132 5.4.1 Band Structures of Hybrid Perovskites 132 5.4.2 Direct–Indirect Issue of Hybrid Perovskite 134 5.4.3 Density of States 139 5.4.4 Effective Mass 140 5.5 Band Gap 141 5.5.1 What Determines Band Gap? 142 5.5.2 Effect of Center Cation 143 5.5.3 Effect of Halide Anion 143 5.6 Defect Physics 144 Acknowledgment 147 References 147 6 Carrier Transport Properties 151 Hiroyuki Fujiwara and Yoshitsune Kato 6.1 Introduction 151 6.2 Carrier Properties of Hybrid Perovskites 153 6.2.1 Self-Doping in Hybrid Perovskites 153 6.2.2 Effect of Carrier Concentration on Mobility 155 6.3 Carrier Mobility of MAPbI3 155 6.3.1 Variation of Mobility with Characterization Method 156 6.3.2 Temperature Dependence 159 6.3.3 Effect of Effective Mass 160 6.3.4 What Determines Maximum Mobility of MAPbI3? 161 6.4 Diffusion Length 164 6.5 Carrier Transport in Various Hybrid Perovskites 166 References 168 7 Ferroelectric Properties 173 Tobias Leonhard, Holger Röhm, Alexander D. Schulz, and Alexander Colsmann 7.1 On the Importance of Ferroelectricity in Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 173 7.2 Ferroelectricity 174 7.2.1 Crystallographic Considerations 174 7.2.2 Ferroelectricity in Thin Films 178 7.2.3 Crystallography of MAPbI3 Thin Films 178 7.3 Probing Ferroelectricity on the Microscale 179 7.3.1 Atomic Force Microscopy 179 7.3.2 Piezoresponse Force Microscopy 180 7.3.3 Characterization of MAPbI3 Thin Films with sf-PFM 183 7.3.4 Correlative Domain Characterization 188 7.3.4.1 Transmission Electron Microscopy 188 7.3.4.2 X-ray Diffraction 189 7.3.4.3 Electron Backscatter Diffraction 189 7.3.4.4 Kelvin Probe Force Microscopy 191 7.3.5 Polarization Orientation 191 7.3.6 Ferroelastic Effects in MAPbI3 Thin Films 193 7.4 Ferroelectric Poling of MAPbI3 195 7.4.1 AC Poling of MAPbI3 196 7.4.2 Creeping Poling and Switching Events on the Microscopic Scale 197 7.4.3 Macroscopic Effects of Poling 200 7.5 Impact of Ferroelectricity on the Performance of Solar Cells 201 7.5.1 Pitfalls During Sample Measurements 201 7.5.2 Charge Carrier Dynamics in Solar Cells 203 References 203 8 Photoluminescence Properties 207 Yasuhiro Yamada and Yoshihiko Kanemitsu 8.1 Introduction 207 8.2 Overview of Luminescent Properties 208 8.3 Room-Temperature PL Spectra of a Hybrid Perovskite Thin Film 209 8.4 Time-Resolved PL of a Hybrid Perovskite 213 8.5 PL Quantum Efficiency 218 8.6 Temperature-Dependent PL 220 8.7 Material and Device Characterization by PL Spectroscopy 222 8.7.1 Degradation and Healing of Hybrid Perovskites 222 8.7.2 Charge Transfer Mechanism in Perovskite Solar Cell 223 8.8 Conclusion 224 Acknowledgment 225 References 225 9 Role of Grain Boundaries 229 Jae Sung Yun 9.1 Introduction 229 9.2 Role of Grain Boundaries in Device Performance 230 9.2.1 Potential Barrier at GBs and Charge Transport 231 9.2.2 Engineering of GB Properties 234 9.3 Ion Migration Through Grain Boundaries 241 9.3.1 Enhanced Ion Transport at Grain Boundaries 241 9.3.2 Role of GBs for Ion Migration 244 9.4 Role of Grain Boundaries in Stability 246 9.4.1 MAPbI3 Hydrated Phase at GBs 247 9.4.2 Formation of Non-perovskite Phase at GBs of FAPbI3 248 References 250 10 Roles of Center Cations 253 Biwas Subedi, Juan Zuo, Marie Solange Tumusange, Maxwell M. Junda, Kiran Ghimire, and Nikolas J. Podraza 10.1 Introduction 253 10.2 Cubic Perovskite Phase Tolerance Factor 256 10.3 Thin Film Stability 258 10.4 Optoelectronic Property Variations 263 10.5 Solar Cell Performance 268 References 271 Part II Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 275 11 Operational Principles of Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 277 Hiroyuki Fujiwara, Yoshitsune Kato, Yuji Kadoya, Yukinori Nishigaki, Tomoya Kobayashi, Akio Matsushita, and Taisuke Matsui 11.1 Introduction 277 11.2 Operation of Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 278 11.2.1 Operational Principle and Basic Structures 278 11.2.2 Band Alignment 281 11.3 Band Diagram of Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 283 11.3.1 Device Simulation 283 11.3.2 Experimental Observation 285 11.4 Refined Analyses of Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 287 11.4.1 Carrier Generation and Loss 287 11.4.2 Power Loss Mechanism 291 11.4.3 e-ARC Software 295 11.5 What Determines Voc? 295 11.5.1 Effect of Interface 297 11.5.2 Effect of Passivation 300 11.5.3 Effect of Grain Boundary 303 References 305 12 Efficiency Limits of Single and Tandem Solar Cells 309 Hiroyuki Fujiwara, Yoshitsune Kato, Masayuki Kozawa, Akira Terakawa, and Taisuke Matsui 12.1 Introduction 309 12.2 What Is the SQ Limit? 310 12.2.1 Physical Model 311 12.2.2 Blackbody Radiation 313 12.2.3 SQ Limit 315 12.3 Maximum Efficiencies of Perovskite Single Cells 319 12.3.1 Concept of Thin-Film Limit 319 12.3.2 EQE Calculation Method 321 12.3.3 Maximum Efficiencies of Single Solar Cells 323 12.3.4 Performance-Limiting Factors of Hybrid Perovskite Devices 325 12.4 Maximum Efficiency of Tandem Cells 327 12.4.1 Optical Model and Assumptions 328 12.4.2 Calculation of Tandem-Cell EQE Spectra 329 12.4.3 Maximum Efficiencies of Tandem Devices 331 12.4.4 Realistic Maximum Efficiency of Tandem Cell 334 12.5 Free Software for Efficiency Limit Calculation 335 References 336 13 Multi-cation Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 339 Jacob N. Vagott and Juan-Pablo Correa-Baena 13.1 Introduction 339 13.2 Types of A-Site Multi-cation Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 341 13.2.1 Pb-Based Multi-cation Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 341 13.2.2 Sn-Based Multi-cation Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 344 13.3 Cation Selection in Mixed-Cation Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 345 13.3.1 Organic A-Cations 345 13.3.2 Inorganic A-Cations 347 13.4 Fabrication of Mixed-Cation Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 349 13.4.1 Traditional Fabrication Approach 349 13.4.2 Emerging Fabrication Technologies 350 13.5 Charge Transport Materials 353 13.6 Surface Passivation 357 13.7 Mixed B-Cation Hybrid Organic–Inorganic Perovskite Solar Cells 361 13.8 Basic Characterization of Mixed-Cation Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 362 References 365 14 Tin Halide Perovskite Solar Cells 373 Gaurav Kapil and Shuzi Hayase 14.1 Introduction 373 14.1.1 Device Structure and Operating Principle 374 14.1.2 Crystal Structure 375 14.2 Tin Perovskite Solar Cells 376 14.2.1 Intrinsic Properties 377 14.2.2 Carrier Lifetime and Diffusion Length 378 14.3 The Status of Sn Perovskite Solar Cells 379 14.3.1 Different Type of Sn Perovskite Solar Cells 380 14.3.1.1 CsSnI3 380 14.3.1.2 MASnI3 383 14.3.1.3 FASnI3 384 14.3.1.4 FAxMA1-xSnI3 385 14.3.1.5 2D/3D FASnI3 387 14.3.1.6 Sn–Ge mixed PSCs 387 14.3.2 Strategies to Improve the Efficiency 389 14.3.2.1 Film Fabrication Methods 389 14.3.2.2 Use of Reducing Agents 389 14.3.2.3 Doping Effect of Large Organic Cations 390 14.3.2.4 Device Engineering and Lattice Relaxation 391 14.4 Sn–Pb Perovskite Solar Cells 393 14.4.1 Anomalous Bandgap of SnPb (The Bowing Effect) 396 14.4.2 Physical Properties 398 14.4.2.1 Intrinsic Carrier Concentration 398 14.4.2.2 Carrier Lifetime and Diffusion Length 399 14.5 The Status of Sn–Pb Perovskite Solar Cells 399 14.5.1 Different Types of Sn–Pb Perovskite Solar Cells 401 14.5.1.1 First Kind of Sn–Pb PSC absorber: MASnxPb1-xI3 401 14.5.1.2 Multi Cation Sn–Pb Perovskites: (FA, MA, Cs) (Sn, Pb) (I, Br, Cl)3 401 14.5.2 Strategies to Improve the Efficiency 403 14.5.2.1 Use of Additives 403 14.5.2.2 Device Engineering 404 14.6 Conclusion and Outlook 406 References 406 15 Stability of Hybrid Perovskite Solar Cells 411 Seigo Ito 15.1 Introduction: Trigger of the Degradation 411 15.2 Crystal Quality for Stable Perovskite Solar Cells 413 15.3 Water-Stable and MA-Free Perovskites 415 15.4 Defects and Grain-Surface Ion Migration, and Passivation (Including 2-D Crystal) 417 15.5 Degradation at Interface with Metal Oxides 420 15.6 Porous Carbon Electrode to Be Very Stable Multiporous-Layered- Electrode Perovskite Solar Cells (MPLE-PSC) 420 15.7 Damp Heat Tests 421 15.8 Conclusion 422 References 425 16 Hysteresis in J–V Characteristics 429 Wolfgang Tress 16.1 Introduction and Definitions: What Do We Mean by Hysteresis? 429 16.2 The JV Curve of a Solar Cell: What Does It Tell? 431 16.3 Characteristics of Hysteresis: What Does It Depend on? 437 16.4 Mechanistic and Microscopic Origin of Hysteresis: What Changes Slowly? 442 16.5 Issues with Hysteresis: How to Tune/Avoid/Suppress? 453 16.6 Conclusion and Open Questions 453 References 454 17 Perovskite-Based Tandem Solar Cells 463 Klaus Jäger and Steve Albrecht 17.1 Introduction 463 17.2 Architectures of Tandem Solar Cells 465 17.2.1 Monolithic Two-Terminal Solar Cells 466 17.2.2 Four-Terminal Tandem Solar Cells 467 17.2.3 Other Concepts 468 17.2.4 Bifacial Solar Cells 469 17.3 Efficiency Limits of Multi-Junction Solar Cells 469 17.3.1 Efficiency Limit for Four-Terminal Tandem Solar Cells 470 17.3.2 Efficiency Limit for Two-Terminal Tandem Solar Cells 472 17.3.3 Efficiency Limit for Cells with More Junctions 474 17.4 Perovskites as Tandem Solar Cell Materials 474 17.5 Experimental Results on Perovskite-Based Tandem Solar Cells 477 17.5.1 Perovskite/Silicon Tandem Solar Cells 482 17.5.2 Perovskite-Chalcogenide Tandem Solar Cells 489 17.6 Energy Yield Calculations 493 17.6.1 Illumination Model 494 17.6.2 Optical Model 494 17.6.3 Electrical Model 496 17.6.4 Temperature Model 498 17.6.5 Energy Yield Calculation 498 17.7 Conclusions and Outlook 499 Acknowledgments 500 References 500 18 All Perovskite Tandem Solar Cells 509 Zhaoning Song and Yanfa Yan 18.1 Introduction 509 18.2 Working Principles of Tandem Solar Cells 511 18.2.1 Why to Use Tandem Solar Cells 511 18.2.2 Tandem Device Architectures 513 18.2.3 PCE of Tandem Solar Cells 514 18.3 Wide-Bandgap Perovskite Solar Cells 516 18.3.1 Wide-Bandgap Mixed I-Br Perovskites 516 18.3.2 Current State of Wide-Bandgap Perovskite Solar Cells 518 18.3.3 Critical Issues of Wide-Bandgap Perovskite Cells 519 18.4 Low-Bandgap Perovskite Solar Cells 520 18.4.1 Low-Bandgap Mixed Sn-Pb Perovskites 520 18.4.2 Current State of Low-Bandgap Perovskite Solar Cells 524 18.4.3 Critical Issues of Low-Bandgap Perovskite Cells 525 18.5 All-Perovskite Tandem Solar Cells 527 18.5.1 4-T All-Perovskite Tandem Solar Cells 527 18.5.2 2-T All-Perovskite Tandem Solar Cells 528 18.5.3 Limitations and Challenges of All-Perovskite Tandem Solar Cells 533 18.6 Conclusion and Outlooks 534 Acknowledgments 535 References 535 A Optical Constants of Hybrid Perovskite Materials 541 Yukinori Nishigaki, Akio Matsushita, Alvaro Tejada, Taisuke Matsui, and Hiroyuki Fujiwara References 562 B Numerical Values of Shockley–Queisser Limit 563 Yoshitsune Kato and Hiroyuki Fujiwara Index 567

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn authoritative and robust overview of the synthesis, characterization, and application of carbon-based materials In Enhanced Carbon-Based Materials and Their Applications, a team of distinguished researchers delivers a timely and carefully referenced overview of carbon-based materials and their applications. Following a summary of carbon-based materials and their synthesis methods, the authors move on to highlight advanced topics regarding enhanced carbon-based materials and their applications. Discussions of the discovery of memristor-based memory, substrate options, and the effect of electrodes materials are accompanied by a review of the developments in carbonous materials, an explanation of the working principle of thermoelectric energy harvesting, and the applications of carbon-enhanced piezoelectric materials, sensors, optoelectronic devices, actuators, and display applications as well. The book concludes with a presentation of anticipated future prospects and challenges in this area, including those obstacles that must be addressed before the large-scale production of carbon-based products can begin. Readers will also find: A thorough introduction to carbon-based nanomaterials, including their synthesis and characterization Comprehensive explorations of functional carbon-based nanomaterials and sensor applications, as well as fabrication techniques of resistive switching carbon-based memories Practical discussions of carbonous-based optoelectronic devices, thermoelectric energy harvesters, and their applications Fulsome treatments of carbon-enhanced piezoelectric materials and their applications Perfect for a multi-disciplinary audience in the broader scientific and industrial communities, Enhanced Carbon-Based Materials and Their Applications will also earn a place in the libraries of researchers and industry professionals with an interest in the synthesis and characterization of carbon nanomaterials.Table of ContentsCHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 2: CARBON BASED NANOSTRUCTURES 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Synthesis of carbon-based nanostructures 2.3 Characterization techniques 2.4. Summary CHAPTER 3: FUNCTIONAL CARBON-BASED MATERIALS and APPLICATIONS 3.1 Introduction and background of carbon-based sensors 3.2 Carbon material functionalization, hybridization and sensing properties 3.3 Plasma surface modification of graphene 3.4 Electronic and chemical properties of functionalized graphene 3.5 Applications CHAPTER 4: RESISTIVE SWITCHING CARBON-BASED MEMORIES 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Fabrication method 4.3 Electrical characterization and applications CHAPTER 5: CARBON-BASED OPTOELECTRONIC DEVICES 5.1 Emerging carbon-based device concept 5.2 0, 1, and 2- Dimensional carbon-based materials in optoelectronic applications CHAPTER 6: THERMOELECTRIC ENERGY HARVESTERS and APPLICATIONS 6.1 Carbon enhanced materials overview 6.2 Thermoelectric energy harvester overview 6.3 Fabrication 6.4 Applications CHAPTER 7: PIEZOELECTRIC ENERGY HARVESTERS and APPLICATIONS 7.1. Introduction of piezoelectric energy harvester 7.2. Fabrication 7.3. Applications CHAPTER 8: ACTUATORS BASED on the CARBON ENHANCED MATERIALS 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Nanostructured Carbon: Effective Tools for Carbon-Based Nanoactuators 8.3 Applications (Carbon Nanotube-Based Actuators, Graphene and Graphene Oxide Actuators, Fullerene-Based Actuators) 8.4 Challenges and Prospective of Actuators CHAPTER 9: CARBON-BASED ANALOG and DIGITAL ELECTRONICS and CIRCUITS 9.1 Current development on Analog and Digital Electronics 9.2 Radio frequency circuits 9.3 Carbon nanotubes and graphene digital electronics CHAPTER 10: CONCLUSIONS and FUTURE PERSPECTIVES

Read more less

Book SynopsisMaterial Characterization using Electron Holography Exploration of a unique technique that offers exciting possibilities to analyze electromagnetic behavior of materials Material Characterization using Electron Holography addresses how the electromagnetic field can be directly visualized and precisely interpreted based on Maxwell’s equations formulated by special relativity, leading to the understanding of electromagnetic properties of advanced materials and devices. In doing so, it delivers a unique route to imaging materials in higher resolution. The focus of the book is on in situ observation of electromagnetic fields of diverse functional materials. Furthermore, an extension of electron holographic techniques, such as direct observation of accumulation and collective motions of electrons around the charged insulators, is also explained. This approach enables the reader to develop a deeper understanding of functionalities of advanced materials. Written by two highly qualified authors with extensive first-hand experience in the field, Material Characterization using Electron Holography covers topics such as: Importance of electromagnetic fields and their visualization, Maxwell’s equations formulated by special relativity, and de Broglie waves and wave functions Outlines of general relativity and Einstein’s equations, principles of electron holography, and related techniques Simulation of holograms and visualized electromagnetic fields, electric field analysis, and in situ observation of electric fields Interaction between electrons and charged specimen surfaces and interpretation of visualization of collective motions of electrons For materials scientists, analytical chemists, structural chemists, analytical research institutes, applied physicists, physicists, semiconductor physicists, and libraries looking to be on the cutting edge of methods to analyze electromagnetic behavior of materials, Material Characterization using Electron Holography offers comprehensive coverage of the subject from authoritative and forward-thinking topical experts.Table of ContentsPART I THEORY AND PRINCIPLES 1.1 Importance of electromagnetic field and its visualization 1.2 Maxwell?s equations formulated by special relativity 1.3 de Broglie waves and wave function 1.4 Outlines of general relativity and Einstein?s equations 1.5 Principles of electron holography 1.6 Related techniques 1.7 Simulation of holograms and visualized electromagnetic field PART II APPLICATION 2.1 Electric field analysis 2.2 In situ observation of electric field 2.3 Magnetic field analysis 2.4 In situ observation of magnetic field 2.5 Control and visualization of collective motions of electrons 2.6 Interaction between electrons and charged specimen surfaces 2.7 Interpretation of visualization of collective motions of electrons

Read more less

Book SynopsisBattery Technologies A state-of-the-art exploration of modern battery technology In Battery Technologies: Materials and Components, distinguished researchers Dr. Jianmin Ma delivers a comprehensive and robust overview of battery technology and new and emerging technologies related to lithium, aluminum, dual-ion, flexible, and biodegradable batteries. The book offers practical information on electrode materials, electrolytes, and the construction of battery systems. It also considers potential approaches to some of the primary challenges facing battery designers and manufacturers today. Battery Technologies: Materials and Components provides readers with: A thorough introduction to the lithium-ion battery, including cathode and anode materials, electrolytes, and binders Comprehensive explorations of lithium-oxygen batteries, including battery systems, catalysts, and anodes Practical discussions of redox flow batteries, aqueous batteries, biodegradable batteries, and flexible batteries In-depth examinations of dual-ion batteries, aluminum ion batteries, and zinc-oxygen batteries Perfect for inorganic chemists, materials scientists, and electrochemists, Battery Technologies: Materials and Components will also earn a place in the libraries of catalytic and polymer chemists seeking a one-stop resource on battery technology.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Li-Ion Battery 1 Ruiping Liu 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 History of the Lithium-Ion Battery 1 1.1.2 Basic Structure of Lithium-Ion Battery 1 1.1.3 Working Mechanisms of Lithium-Ion Battery 2 1.1.4 Characteristics of Lithium-Ion Batteries 3 1.2 Cathode Materials for Lithium-Ion Batteries 4 1.2.1 Layer-Structured Cathode Materials 4 1.2.2 Spinel-Structured Cathode Materials 7 1.2.3 Olivine-Structured Cathode Materials 9 1.3 Anode Materials for LIBs 9 1.3.1 Intercalation Anode Materials 11 1.3.2 Alloy Anode Materials 13 1.3.3 Conversion Anode Materials 14 1.3.4 Lithium Metal Anode 17 1.4 Electrolyte 19 1.4.1 Liquid Electrolyte 19 1.4.1.1 Lithium Salts 19 1.4.1.2 Organic Solvent 20 1.4.1.3 Functional Additives 22 1.4.2 Solid Electrolyte 23 1.4.2.1 Polymer Electrolyte 25 1.4.2.2 li 3 N and its Derivatives 25 1.4.2.3 Perovskite Solid Electrolyte 26 1.4.2.4 Lisicon 27 1.4.2.5 Nasicon 27 1.4.2.6 Garnet 28 1.4.2.7 Glassy Inorganic Solid Electrolyte 29 1.5 Separators 31 1.5.1 Polyolefin Separator 34 1.5.2 Polymers with High Melting Points for Separators 36 1.5.3 Inorganic Composite Separators 36 1.6 Conclusions and Perspective 38 Acknowledgments 39 References 39 2 Li–O 2 Battery 47 Zhijia Zhang, Jun Wang, Shaofei Zhang, Shihao Sun, and Xia Ma 2.1 Li–O 2 Battery 47 2.1.1 Introduction 47 2.1.2 Cathode Materials 49 2.1.2.1 Carbon-Based Materials 49 2.1.2.2 Noble Metal-Based Materials 54 2.1.2.3 Non-noble Metal-Based Materials 57 2.1.3 Anode Materials 64 2.1.4 Electrolyte 67 2.1.4.1 Organic Electrolyte 67 2.1.4.2 Quasi-Solid-State Electrolyte 67 2.1.4.3 Solid-State Electrolyte 72 2.1.5 Separator 73 2.1.6 From Li–O 2 Batteries to Li–Air Batteries 76 2.1.7 Summary and Perspective 76 Acknowledgments 78 References 78 3 Li–Sulfur Battery 87 Xiaoqun Qi, Fengyi Yang, and Long Qie 3.1 Introduction 87 3.2 Fundamentals 88 3.3 Cathodes 89 3.3.1 S Cathodes 89 3.3.1.1 Physical Confinement 90 3.3.1.2 Physical Blocking 90 3.3.1.3 Polymeric Organosulfur 92 3.3.1.4 Chemical Adsorption and Catalysis 93 3.3.2 Li2S Cathodes 97 3.4 Electrolytes 98 3.4.1 Ether Electrolyte 98 3.4.2 Carbonate-Based 99 3.4.3 Nitrile-Based 100 3.4.4 Sulfones/Sulfoxides-Based 101 3.4.5 Ionic Liquids 105 3.4.6 Polymer/Solid-State Electrolytes 105 3.4.7 Additives 108 3.5 Anodes 109 3.5.1 Li Anodes 109 3.5.2 Carbon Anodes 112 3.5.3 Silicon Anodes 113 3.6 Challenges and Perspectives 113 References 116 4 Na-Ion Battery 125 Xiaochuan Duan, Lei Wang, and Jianmin Ma 4.1 Introduction 125 4.1.1 History of Sodium-Ion Batteries 125 4.1.2 Composition and Working Mechanism of SIBs 126 4.2 Cathode Materials for SIBs 127 4.2.1 Layered Transition Metal Oxide 128 4.2.2 Polyanionic Compounds 130 4.2.3 Hexacyanoferrates 132 4.2.4 Organic Compounds 133 4.3 Anode Materials for SIBs 133 4.3.1 Insertion Anode Materials 134 4.3.1.1 Carbon Materials 134 4.3.1.2 Titanium-Based Oxide 137 4.3.2 Alloyed Anode Materials 138 4.3.3 Conversion-Type Anode Materials 140 4.4 Electrolytes for SIBs 142 4.4.1 Aqueous Electrolytes 144 4.4.2 Organic Electrolytes 144 4.4.3 Solid-State Electrolytes 145 4.4.3.1 Solid Polymer Electrolytes 145 4.4.3.2 Inorganic Solid Electrolytes 146 4.5 Separators for SIBs 147 4.5.1 Glass Fiber Separator 147 4.5.2 Modified Polyolefin Separator 147 4.5.3 Other Separator 148 References 149 5 Na–O 2 Battery 153 Haiying Lu, Xianghong Chen, Yu Lei, Feng Xiao, Weiyin Gao, Jiakui Zhang, Sai Zhao, Min Yan, Chenxin Ran, and Jiantie Xu 5.1 Introduction 153 5.2 Fundamental Principles 154 5.3 Cathode Materials 155 5.3.1 Carbon Materials 156 5.3.2 Metals and Their Oxides 164 5.3.2.1 Noble Metals and Their Oxides 164 5.3.2.2 Non-noble Metals and Their Oxides 165 5.3.2.3 Dual Functional Composites 168 5.4 Anode Materials 169 5.4.1 Modification of Na Metal Anode 170 5.4.2 Carbon Materials Modified Na Anode 174 5.4.3 Metal Alloys/Composites/Hybrids 177 5.5 Electrolytes 178 5.5.1 Carbonate-Based Electrolyte 179 5.5.2 Ether-Based Electrolyte 179 5.5.3 DMSO- and ACN-Based Electrolytes 183 5.5.4 Ionic Liquid-Based Electrolyte 185 5.6 Mechanism Studies 189 5.7 Conclusion and Perspectives 192 Acknowledgments 194 References 195 6 Zn-Ion Battery 201 Gaoxue Jiang, Yurong Ren, Xiaobing Huang, and Jianmin Ma 6.1 Introduction 201 6.2 Fundamentals 202 6.3 Cathode Materials 204 6.3.1 Manganese-Based Materials 204 6.3.2 Vanadium-Based Materials 208 6.3.3 Prussian Blue Analogous 210 6.3.4 Other Types of Cathode Materials 212 6.4 Zn Anode 212 6.4.1 Zinc Alloy Anode 214 6.4.2 Surface Modification of Zn Anode 215 6.4.3 Structural Optimization of the Zn Anode 216 6.5 Aqueous Electrolytes 217 6.5.1 Types of Zinc Salts 217 6.5.2 Concentration of Zinc Salt 218 6.5.3 Electrolyte Additives 219 6.6 Challenges and Perspectives 222 References 223 7 Zn–Air Battery 229 J. Alberto Blázquez, Aroa R. Mainar, and Elena Iruin 7.1 Introduction 229 7.1.1 Metal–Air Batteries 230 7.1.2 History of Zinc-Based Technologies 232 7.1.3 Secondary Zinc–Air Batteries 233 7.1.3.1 Rechargeability 233 7.1.3.2 Industrial Approximations 234 7.1.3.3 Limitations 234 7.2 Electrolyte System 237 7.2.1 Mechanisms for Zinc Dissolution 237 7.2.2 Strategies for Developing An Optimal Electrolyte System for Secondary Zinc–Air Batteries 239 7.2.2.1 Additives 239 7.2.2.2 Alternatives to Alkaline Aqueous Electrolyte 240 7.3 Bifunctional Air Electrode 242 7.3.1 Mechanism for Bifunctional Air Electrode 242 7.3.2 Materials for Bifunctional Air Electrode 243 7.3.2.1 Catalysts 243 7.3.2.2 Binder 244 7.3.2.3 Conductive Agents 246 7.3.2.4 Current Collector 246 7.3.3 Electrode Structure 247 7.4 Zinc Anode 247 7.4.1 Zinc Electrode Configuration 247 7.4.2 Materials for Zinc Anode 249 7.4.2.1 Active Material 249 7.4.2.2 Additives 249 7.4.2.3 Gelling Agents and Binders 250 7.4.2.4 Current Collector 251 7.4.3 Zinc Anode Processing 251 7.5 Membranes 252 7.6 Summary and Perspectives 253 Acronyms and Abbreviations 254 References 255 8 Al-Ion Battery 269 David Muñoz-Torrero, Rebeca Marcilla, and Edgar Ventosa 8.1 Introduction 269 8.2 Historical Development of Aluminum Batteries 269 8.2.1 Primary Aluminum Batteries: Aqueous Systems 270 8.2.2 Rechargeable Aluminum Batteries: Non-aqueous Systems 270 8.3 Electrolytes for Al-Based Batteries 272 8.3.1 Al Electrodeposition in CILs and Their Use in Rechargeable Al-Based Batteries 273 8.3.2 Al Electrodeposition Using Alternative Electrolytes and Their Use in Rechargeable Al-Based Batteries 274 8.4 Rechargeable Aluminum Batteries Classification 276 8.4.1 Metal Oxide/Sulfide-Based Aluminum Batteries 276 8.4.2 Polymer-Based Aluminum Batteries 279 8.4.3 Graphite-Based Aluminum Batteries 281 8.5 Rechargeable Aluminum Batteries Based on Graphitic Cathodes 283 8.5.1 Carbon Paper 283 8.5.2 Pyrolytic Graphite 284 8.5.3 Graphitic Foam 286 8.5.4 Graphene-Based Cathode 287 8.5.5 Graphite Flakes-Based Cathodes 290 8.6 Conclusions 291 References 293 9 Al-Air Batteries 299 Pengyu Meng, Jianmin Ren, Min Jiang, and Chaopeng Fu 9.1 Introduction 299 9.2 Aluminum Anodes 300 9.2.1 Al Alloying Elements 300 9.2.2 Research Progress of Al Anodes 301 9.2.2.1 Aluminum Microalloying 301 9.2.2.2 Heat Treatment of Al Anodes 302 9.2.2.3 Processing of Al Anodes 302 9.2.2.4 Surface coating on Al anodes 302 9.3 Air Cathodes 302 9.3.1 Structure of Air Cathodes 303 9.3.2 Integrated Cathode 304 9.3.3 Oxygen Reduction Reaction 304 9.3.4 Electrocatalysts 305 9.3.4.1 Precious Metals and Alloys 305 9.3.4.2 Transition Metal Oxides 306 9.3.4.3 Carbon-Based Catalysts 307 9.3.4.4 Single-Atom Catalysts 308 9.4 Electrolytes 309 9.4.1 Aqueous Electrolytes 309 9.4.2 Corrosion Inhibitors 309 9.4.3 Polymer Electrolytes 310 9.5 Al–Air Battery Structure Design 310 9.6 Recycle of Al–Air Batteries 312 9.7 Rechargeable Al–Air Batteries 312 9.8 Summary and Outlook 315 References 315 10 Dual-Ion Battery 317 Haitao Wang, Luojiang Zhang, and Yongbing Tang 10.1 Cation–Anion Dual-Ion Battery 317 10.1.1 Introduction 317 10.1.2 Cathode Materials 320 10.1.2.1 Graphitic Materials 320 10.1.2.2 Organic Materials 324 10.1.2.3 Other Materials 326 10.1.3 Anode Materials 327 10.1.3.1 Metallic Materials 328 10.1.3.2 Alloying-Type Materials 330 10.1.3.3 Intercalation-Type Materials 335 10.1.3.4 Conversion-Type Materials 336 10.1.4 Electrolyte 337 10.1.4.1 Organic Electrolyte 338 10.1.4.2 Ionic Liquid Electrolyte 339 10.1.4.3 Aqueous Electrolyte 341 10.2 Multi-Ion Battery 342 10.2.1 Triple-Ion Battery 343 10.2.1.1 Dual Cation–Anion Battery 343 10.2.1.2 Dual Anion–Cation Battery 346 10.2.2 Quadruple-Ion Battery 348 10.3 Summary and Perspective 350 Acknowledgments 351 References 351 Index 359

Read more less

Book SynopsisSodium-Ion Batteries An essential resource with coverage of up-to-date research on sodium-ion battery technology Lithium-ion batteries form the heart of many of the stored energy devices used by people all across the world. However, global lithium reserves are dwindling, and a new technology is needed to ensure a shortfall in supply does not result in disruptions to our ability to manufacture reliable, efficient batteries. In Sodium-Ion Batteries: Energy Storage Materials and Technologies, eminent researcher and materials scientist Yan Yu delivers a comprehensive overview of the state-of-the-art in sodium-ion batteries (SIBs), including their design principles, cathode and anode materials, electrolytes, and binders. The author discusses high-performance rechargeable sodium-ion battery technology in the contexts of energy, power density, and electrochemical stability for commercialization. Exploring a wide range of literature on the recent progress made by researchers on sodium-ion battery technology, the book provides valuable perspectives on designing better materials for SIBs to unlock their practical capabilities. A thorough introduction to sodium-ion batteries, including their key materials and likely future developments Comprehensive explorations of design principles of electrode materials and electrolytes for sodium-ion batteries Practical discussions of cathode materials for sodium-ion batteries, including transition metal oxides, polyanionic compounds, Prussian blue analogues and organic compounds In-depth examinations of anode materials for sodium-ion batteries, including carbon-based materials, metal chalcogenides, metal alloys, phosphorus and Na metal anodes Perfect for materials scientists, inorganic chemists, electrochemists, and physical chemists, Sodium-Ion Batteries: Energy Storage Materials and Technologies will also earn a place in the libraries of catalytic and polymer chemists.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction to Sodium-Ion Batteries 1 1.1 Brief Outline 1 1.2 Key Materials 4 1.3 Toward Future Development 13 References 14 2 Design Principles for Sodium-Ion Batteries 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Basic Design Principles 18 2.2.1 Energy Density 18 2.2.2 Power Density 20 2.2.3 Cycling Life 20 2.2.4 Safety 21 2.2.5 Cost 21 2.3 Design Principles for Electrode Materials 22 2.3.1 Transport Properties 22 2.3.2 Size Effects 26 2.3.3 Morphology and Structure 28 2.4 Design Principles for Electrolytes 33 2.4.1 Transport Properties 33 2.4.2 Electrochemical Stability Window 35 2.4.3 Thermal Stability 36 2.4.4 Interfacial Compatibility 37 2.4.5 Safety Issues 37 2.5 Conclusions 38 References 38 3 Transition Metal Oxide Cathodes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Sodium-free Transition Metal Oxides 43 3.2.1 Vanadium Oxides 43 3.2.2 Manganese Dioxides 47 3.3 Sodium-inserted Layered Metal Oxides 48 3.3.1 NaFeO2 51 3.3.2 NaxCoO2 54 3.3.3 NaxMnO2 55 3.3.4 NaxNiO2 61 3.3.5 NaxVO2 65 3.3.6 NaxCrO2 66 3.3.7 Mixed Cation Oxides 69 3.3.8 Other Emerging Metal Oxides 70 3.4 Concluding Remarks 72 References 73 4 Polyanion-Type Cathodes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 79 4.1 Introduction 79 4.2 Phosphates 80 4.2.1 NaMPO4 (M = Fe and Mn) 80 4.2.2 NASICON-Type Phosphates 83 4.2.2.1 NASIClON-type Na3V2(PO4)3 83 4.2.2.2 NASICON-type Na3MnTi(PO4)3 89 4.3 Pyrophosphates 90 4.3.1 NaMP2O7 (M = Fe, V, and Ti) 91 4.3.2 Na2MP2O7 (M = Co, Fe, Mn, Cu, and Zn) 93 4.3.3 Na4M3(PO4)2P2O7 (M = Fe, Co, Mn, Ni, and Mg) 98 4.3.4 Other Pyrophosphates 102 4.4 Fluorinated Phosphate Cathodes 105 4.4.1 NaVPO4F 105 4.4.2 Na2MPO4F (M = Fe, Mn, and Ni) 107 4.4.3 Na3(VO1−xPO4)2F1+2x (0≤ x ≤1) 110 4.5 Sulfates 116 4.5.1 NaxFey(SO4)z 116 4.5.2 Fluorosulfates 119 4.6 Silicates 119 4.7 Other Polyanion-Type Compounds 121 4.8 Concluding Remarks 125 References 126 5 Prussian Blue Analogue Cathodes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Crystal Structure 138 5.3 Electrochemistry Mechanisms 142 5.4 Preparation Approaches 144 5.4.1 Coprecipitation 145 5.4.2 Self-decomposition of Precursors 147 5.5 Optimizing Electrochemical Performance 148 5.5.1 Effect of Lattice Architecture on Electrochemistry 149 5.5.1.1 Substitution of Cation 149 5.5.1.2 Inserting Cation 150 5.5.1.3 Vacancy 151 5.5.1.4 Water Molecules 151 5.5.2 Effect of Morphological Optimizations on Electrochemistry 152 5.5.3 NaxMFe-PBAs with Two Na+ Insertion Sites 154 5.5.4 NaxMFe-PBAs with One Na+ Insertion Sites 155 5.6 Concluding Remarks 156 References 157 6 Organic Cathodes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 161 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 C=O Reaction 163 6.2.1 Quinones 164 6.2.2 Carboxylates 173 6.2.3 Anhydrides 175 6.2.4 Amides 177 6.3 Doping Reaction 181 6.3.1 Conductive Polymers 182 6.3.2 Organic Radical Compounds 188 6.3.3 Microporous Polymers 192 6.4 C=N Reaction 194 6.4.1 Schiff Base Organic Compounds 194 6.4.2 Pteridine Derivatives 196 6.5 Concluding Remarks 197 References 198 7 Intercalation-Type Anode Materials for Sodium-Ion Batteries 203 7.1 Introduction 203 7.2 Carbon-Based Anode Materials 203 7.2.1 Graphite Anode 204 7.2.2 Hard Carbon Anode 205 7.2.3 Soft Carbon Anode 210 7.3 Titanium-Based Anode Materials 211 7.3.1 TiO2 212 7.3.1.1 Amorphous TiO2 212 7.3.1.2 Anatase TiO2 213 7.3.1.3 TiO2-B 214 7.3.1.4 Rutile TiO2 216 7.3.2 Li4Ti5O12 218 7.3.3 Na2Ti3O7 221 7.3.3.1 Surface Modifications 224 7.3.3.2 Micro-Nano Structure Design 224 7.3.3.3 Self-Supported Electrode Design 225 7.3.3.4 Anion Doping 228 7.3.3.5 Cation Doping 230 7.3.4 NaTi2(PO4)3 231 7.3.4.1 Structure and Properties of NaTi2(PO4)3 231 7.3.4.2 Modification Strategies of NaTi2(PO4)3 232 7.3.5 TiNb2O7 237 7.3.5.1 Structure and Properties of TiNb2O7 237 7.3.5.2 Modification Strategies of TiNb2O7 237 7.4 Concluding Remarks 239 References 239 8 Phosphorus/Phosphide Anodes for Sodium–Ion Batteries on Alloy and Conversion Reactions 245 8.1 Introduction 245 8.2 Phosphorus Anodes 246 8.2.1 Phosphorus Allotropes 246 8.2.2 Na-Storage Mechanism for Phosphorus-Based Materials 249 8.2.2.1 Na-Storage Mechanism for Red Phosphorus 249 8.2.2.2 Na-Storage Mechanism for Black Phosphorus 250 8.2.3 Phosphorus-Based Materials for Na–Ion Batteries 253 8.2.3.1 Red Phosphorus for Na–Ion Batteries 253 8.2.3.2 Black Phosphorus and Phosphorene for Na-Ion Batteries 258 8.3 Metal Phosphide Anodes 261 8.3.1 Na-Storage Mechanism for Metal Phosphides 261 8.3.2 Metal Phosphides for Na-Ion Batteries 262 8.3.2.1 Tin Phosphide Materials 262 8.3.2.2 Cobalt Phosphide Materials 265 8.3.2.3 Iron Phosphide Materials 266 8.3.2.4 Nickel Phosphide Materials 267 8.3.2.5 Copper Phosphide Materials 268 8.4 Concluding Remarks 269 References 270 9 Metal Oxides/Chalcogenides/Alloys for Sodium-Ion Batteries on Alloy and Conversion Reactions 273 9.1 Introduction 273 9.2 Metal Oxides 273 9.2.1 Conversion-type Oxides 273 9.2.2 Conversion-alloy-type Oxides 277 9.3 Metal Chalcogenides 278 9.3.1 Metal Sulfides 278 9.3.1.1 SnS/SnS2 279 9.3.1.2 Sb2S3/Bi2S3 281 9.3.1.3 MoS2/WS2 282 9.3.1.4 FeSx/CoSx/NiSx 283 9.3.1.5 Other Monometal Sulfides Including CuSx/VSx/TiS2 286 9.3.1.6 Bimetallic Sulfides 288 9.3.2 Metal Selenides 290 9.3.2.1 SnSe/SnSe2 291 9.3.2.2 Sb2Se3/Bi2Se3 291 9.3.2.3 MoSe2/WSe2 292 9.3.2.4 FeSex/CoSe2/NiSe2 293 9.3.2.5 Other Monometal Selenides 295 9.3.2.6 Bimetallic Selenides 296 9.3.3 Metal Tellurides 298 9.4 Metal Alloys 299 9.4.1 Tin (Sn) 299 9.4.2 Antimony (Sb) 302 9.4.3 Bismuth (Bi) 304 9.4.4 Intermetallic Compounds 307 References 309 10 Effective Strategies to Restrain Dendrite Growth of Na Metal Anodes 315 10.1 Introduction 315 10.2 Liquid Electrolyte Optimization for Na Metal Anodes 316 10.2.1 Traditional Electrolyte 316 10.2.2 High-concentration Electrolyte 319 10.2.3 Ionic Liquids 322 10.3 Construction of Novel Current Collectors for Na Metal Anodes 323 10.3.1 Metallic Current Collectors 323 10.3.2 Carbon-Based Current Collectors 324 10.3.3 3D Scaffolds/Na Metal 325 10.4 Alloy-Based Na Metal Anodes 327 10.4.1 Alkali-metal Alloys 327 10.4.2 Other Metals/Na Alloys 332 10.5 Conclusions 335 References 335 11 Organic Liquid Electrolytes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 339 11.1 Introduction 339 11.2 Electrolyte Properties 339 11.3 Sodium Salts 340 11.4 Solvents 346 11.4.1 Carbonate Ester-Based Electrolytes 346 11.4.2 Carboxylate Ester-Based Electrolytes 347 11.4.3 Ether-Based Electrolytes 352 11.5 Functional Additives 358 11.5.1 Basic Characteristics of Additives 358 11.5.2 Additives for Na-Ion Batteries 359 11.5.2.1 SEI-Forming Additives for Anodes 360 11.5.2.2 CEI-Forming Additives for Cathodes 363 11.5.3 Additives for Na Metal 365 11.5.4 Safety Inspired Additives 369 11.6 Novel Concentration Electrolyte Systems 372 11.6.1 High-Concentration Electrolytes 372 11.6.2 Local High-Concentration Electrolytes 373 11.6.3 Low-Concentration Electrolytes 376 11.7 Concluding Remarks 377 References 378 12 Ionic Liquid Electrolytes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 383 12.1 Introduction 383 12.2 The Cationic Species in Ionic Liquids 384 12.3 The Anionic Species in Ionic Liquids 385 12.4 Electrolyte Properties 388 12.4.1 Physicochemical Properties 388 12.4.2 Electrochemical Properties 389 12.4.3 Thermal Properties 391 12.5 Stability of Ionic Liquids 392 12.5.1 Thermal and Electrochemical Stability 392 12.5.2 Electrochemical Properties 393 12.5.3 Electrolyte/Electrode Interfaces 396 12.6 Concluding Remarks 398 References 399 13 Solid-State and Gel Electrolytes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 401 13.1 Introduction 401 13.2 Electrolyte Characteristics 401 13.2.1 Energy Density 401 13.2.2 Ionic Conductivity 403 13.2.3 Chemical Stability 404 13.2.4 Mechanical Stability 406 13.2.5 Thermal Stability 406 13.3 Polymer Electrolytes 406 13.3.1 Solid Polymer Electrolytes (SPEs) 406 13.3.1.1 PEO-Based Electrolyte 407 13.3.1.2 PVA-Based Electrolyte 411 13.3.1.3 PAN-Based Electrolyte 414 13.3.1.4 PVP-Based Electrolyte 414 13.3.1.5 PVDF-Based Electrolyte 414 13.3.2 Na Polymer Single-Ion Conductors 415 13.3.3 Adding Ceramic Additives to Polymer Electrolytes 417 13.3.4 Gel Polymer Electrolytes (GPEs) 420 13.3.4.1 PMMA-Based GPE 420 13.3.4.2 PVDF-Based GPE 421 13.3.4.3 Nafion-Based GPE 424 13.3.5 Adding Ceramic Filler to GPEs 424 13.3.6 Cross-linked GPEs 425 13.3.7 Ionic Liquid-Based GPEs 425 13.4 Inorganic Solid-State Electrolytes 427 13.4.1 Oxide-Based Solid-State Electrolytes 427 13.4.1.1 Beta-Alumina 427 13.4.1.2 NASICON 429 13.4.2 Sulfide-Based Solid-State Electrolytes 433 13.4.2.1 Na3PS4 433 13.4.2.2 Na3SbS4 439 13.4.2.3 Na10SnP2S12 440 13.4.3 Complex Hydrides 441 13.5 Concluding Remarks 443 References 444 14 Binders for Sodium-Ion Batteries 449 14.1 Introduction 449 14.2 Main Functions and Performance Requirements of Binders 450 14.3 Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) 453 14.3.1 Chemical Properties of PVDF 453 14.3.2 Application of PVDF in Na-Ion Batteries 454 14.4 Polyacrylic Acid (PAA) 455 14.5 Carboxymethyl Cellulose (CMC) 458 14.6 Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) 461 14.7 Other Binders 462 14.7.1 Sodium Alginate (SA) 462 14.7.2 Xanthan Gum (XG) 463 14.7.3 Guar Gum (GG) 463 14.7.4 Polyimide (PI) 463 14.8 Concluding Remarks 464 References 464 15 Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 467 15.1 Introduction 467 15.2 Aqueous Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 468 15.3 Nonaqueous Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 482 15.3.1 Carbon-Anode-based Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 483 15.3.2 Non-Carbon-Anode-based Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 486 15.4 Solid-state Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 493 15.4.1 Quasi-Solid-State Sodium-Ion Full Batteries 493 15.4.2 All-Solid-state Sodium-Ion Full Batteries (ASSSIFBs) 498 15.4.2.1 Polymer-Electrolyte-based ASSSIFBs 498 15.4.2.2 Ceramic-Electrolyte-based ASSSIFBs 498 15.4.2.3 Composite-Electrolyte-based ASSSIFBs 503 15.4.2.4 New Types of ASSSIFBs 504 References 506 16 Perspectives for Sodium-Ion Batteries 509 Index 519

Read more less

Book SynopsisSilicon The expert reference on sustainable and energy-efficient production of photovoltaic-grade silicon materials Electrochemical methods, in particular molten-salt approaches, are a cost-effective, energy-efficient, and highly sustainable approach for producing solar-grade silicon. Surface micro- and nanostructuring methods for effective light harvesting, silicon electrorefining in molten salts, electrodeposition of photoresponsive films, and other related processes are likely to replace conventional carbothermic production methods. Silicon: Electrochemistry, Production, Purification and Applications presents an up-to-date summary of recent experimental and technological developments in the field, highlighting sustainable and energy-efficient processes for high-grade silicon production for a variety of photovoltaic and energy applications. Presented in a logical and concise format, this authoritative volume details the fundamental properties and technical processes of metal-grade silicon production and describes the various electrochemical methods for high-grade silicon production. Topics include silicon surface modification, chemical-physical structuring, porous and black silicon, electrochemical Si surface structuring and anodizing in molten salts, and more. Reviews the sustainable and energy-efficient production and purification of photovoltaic-grade silicon materials Summarizes recent progress in sustainable processes for high-grade silicon production Describes electrochemical methods for silicon production such as electrolysis, electrodeposition, and electrorefining Concludes with a discussion of future challenges and opportunities Written by a leading researcher in the field, Silicon: Electrochemistry, Production, Purification and Applications is a valuable resource for chemists and material scientists in academia and industry, particularly those working in sustainable energy development, photovoltaics, light harvesting efficiency, solar-to-chemical conversion, and production of solar-grade silicon, batteries, photoelectrodes, or silicon-based semiconductors.Table of Contents1. Introduction 2. Historical overview of silicon production 3. Physical and chemical properties of silicon 3. Production of metal grade silicon 4. Refining of silicon: from metal to electronic grade 5. Basics of semiconductor electrochemistry, photo-effects 6. Silicon equilibrium and electrolysis in aqueous electrolytes: - Thermodynamic stability, native oxide - Surface termination effects - Photoelectrochemical effects - Anodic polarization, surface passivation - Cathodic polarization 7. Porous silicon: formation, mechanisms and morphology - Etching in fluoride solutions - Etching in alkaline solutions 8. Electro-deoxidation of solid compounds in molten salts 9. Silicon electrochemistry in molten salts - toward low-carbon economy 10. Voltammetry and basic reactions of silicon as an electrode in molten CaCl2 11. Electrochemical production of Si in molten CaCl2 from SiO2 12. Electrodeposition of thin Si films - Electrodeposition in molten fluoride electrolytes - Si films from molten CaCl2: photoactive layers and p-n junction 13. Electrodeposition of Si from ionic liquids and organic solvents 14. Purity concerns and solutions 15. Silicon electrorefining in molten salts 16. Silicon surface structuring - Chemical-physical structuring - Electrochemical Si surface structuring in molten salts -- Anodizing in molten salt -- Microcolumnar and amorphous structures -- Electro-Deoxidation of SiO2 layers 17. Black silicon 18. Synthesis of nanowires and implications for Li-batteries production 19. Silicon compositions - perspectives for semiconductor production - Silicon carbide - Silicides 20. Concluding remarks, future opportunities and challenges 21. References

Read more less

Explores the sustainable production of carbon materials and their applications Of increasing interest to practitioners and researchers in a variety of areas, biomass-derived carbon materials can be easily produced and possess the large surface areas and porosities that enable many applications in materials science, biochemistry, chemistry, and energy research. In Biomass-Derived Carbon Materials: Production and Applications, a team of accomplished researchers delivers a thorough and up-to-date exploration of the preparation and activation processes of biomass-derived carbon materials, the fabrication of composites, and assorted and multidisciplinary applications of the technology. The book also covers future opportunities for research and application. Introductory chapters provide information about the production, functionalization, and characterization of biomass-derived carbon materials, while the latter parts of this edited volume discuss the applications of biomass-derived carbon materials such as catalysis, sensors, microbicidal activity, toxic chemicals removal, drug delivery, and energy conversion and storage applications. The book also includes: A thorough introduction to the production of biomass-derived carbon materials, as well as their characterization Comprehensive explorations of biomass-derived carbon-based materials for microbicidal applications and carbon-based nanomaterials prepared from biomass for catalysis Practical discussions of biomass-derived carbon quantum dots for fluorescence sensors and mesoporous carbon nanomaterials for drug delivery and imaging applications In-depth examinations of biomass-derived carbon as electrode materials for batteries and porous carbon synthesized from biomass for fuel cells Ideal for materials scientists as well as industrial chemists and biochemists, Biomass-Derived Carbon Materials: Production and Applications also belongs in the libraries of electrochemists and sensor developers.

Read more less

Book SynopsisSpectroscopy and Characterization of Nanomaterials and Novel Materials Comprehensive overview of nanomaterial characterization methods and applications from leading researchers in the field In Spectroscopy and Characterization of Nanomaterials and Novel Materials: Experiments, Modeling, Simulations, and Applications, the editor Prabhakar Misra and a team of renowned contributors deliver a practical and up-to-date exploration of the characterization and applications of nanomaterials and other novel materials, including quantum materials and metal clusters. The contributions cover spectroscopic characterization methods for obtaining accurate information on optical, electronic, magnetic, and transport properties of nanomaterials. The book reviews nanomaterial characterization methods with proven relevance to academic and industry research and development teams, and modern methods for the computation of nanomaterials’ structure and properties - including machine-learning approaches - are also explored. Readers will also find descriptions of nanomaterial applications in energy research, optoelectronics, and space science, as well as: A thorough introduction to spectroscopy and characterization of graphitic nanomaterials and metal oxides Comprehensive explorations of simulations of gas separation by adsorption and recent advances in Weyl semimetals and axion insulators Practical discussions of the chemical functionalization of carbon nanotubes and applications to sensors In-depth examinations of micro-Raman imaging of planetary analogs Perfect for physicists, materials scientists, analytical chemists, organic and polymer chemists, and electrical engineers, Spectroscopy and Characterization of Nanomaterials and Novel Materials: Experiments, Modeling, Simulations, and Applications will also earn a place in the libraries of sensor developers and computational physicists and modelers.Table of ContentsPreface xix About the Editor xxvii Part I Spectroscopy and Characterization 1 1 Spectroscopic Characterization of Graphitic Nanomaterials and Metal Oxides for Gas Sensing 3 Olasunbo Farinre, Hawazin Alghamdi, and Prabhakar Misra 1.1 Introduction and Overview 3 1.1.1 Graphitic Nanomaterials 3 1.1.1.1 Synthesis of Graphitic Nanomaterials 5 1.1.2 Metal Oxides 8 1.2 Spectroscopic Characterization of Graphitic Nanomaterials and Metal Oxides 9 1.2.1 Graphitic Nanomaterials 9 1.2.1.1 Characterization of Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 10 1.2.1.2 Characterization of Graphene and Graphene Nanoplatelets (GnPs) 11 1.2.2 Characterization of Tin Dioxide (SnO2) 12 1.3 Graphitic Nanomaterials and Metal Oxide-Based Gas Sensors 19 1.3.1 Fabrication of Graphitic Nanomaterials-Based Gas Sensors 19 1.3.1.1 Carbon Nanotube (CNT)-Based Gas Sensors 19 1.3.1.2 Graphene and Graphene Nanoplatelet (GnP)-Based Gas Sensors 20 1.3.2 Fabrication of Metal Oxide-Based Gas Sensors 21 1.3.2.1 Tin Dioxide (SnO2)-Based Gas Sensors 23 1.4 Conclusions and Future Work 24 Acknowledgments 26 References 26 2 Low-dimensional Carbon Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications Related to Heat Transfer, Energy Harvesting, and Energy Storage 33 Mahesh Vaka, Tejaswini Rama Bangalore Ramakrishna, Khalid Mohammad, and Rashmi Walvekar 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Synthesis and Properties of Low-dimensional Carbon Nanomaterials 35 2.2.1 Zero-dimensional Carbon Nanomaterials (0-DCNs) 35 2.2.1.1 Fullerene 35 2.2.1.2 Carbon-encapsulated Metal Nanoparticles 35 2.2.1.3 Nanodiamond 37 2.2.2 Onion-like Carbons 38 2.2.3 One-dimensional Carbon Nanomaterials 39 2.2.3.1 Carbon Nanotube 39 2.2.3.2 Carbon Fibers 39 2.2.4 Two-dimensional Carbon Nanomaterials 40 2.3 Applications 42 2.3.1 Hydrogen Storage 42 2.3.2 Solar Cells 43 2.3.3 Thermal Energy Storage 44 2.3.4 Energy Conversion 45 2.4 Conclusions 46 References 46 3 Mesoscale Spin Glass Dynamics 55 Samaresh Guchhait 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 What Is a Spin Glass? 56 3.2.1 Spin Glass and Its Correlation Length 57 3.2.2 Mesoscale Spin Glass Dynamics 60 3.3 Summary 64 Acknowledgments 64 References 64 4 Raman Spectroscopy Characterization of Mechanical and Structural Properties of Epitaxial Graphene 67 Amira Ben Gouider Trabelsi, Feodor V. Kusmartsev, Anna Kusmartseva, and Fatemah Homoud Alkallas 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Epitaxial Graphene Mechanical Properties Investigation 68 4.2.1 Optical Location of Epitaxial Graphene Layers 68 4.2.2 Raman Location of Mechanical Properties Changes 71 4.2.2.1 Graphene 2D Mode 71 4.2.2.2 G Mode Investigation 74 4.2.2.3 Strain Percentage 76 4.3 Raman Polarization Study 77 4.3.1 Size Domain of Graphene Layer 77 4.3.2 Polarization Study 78 4.4 Conclusions 80 Acknowledgments 80 References 80 5 Raman Spectroscopy Studies of III–V Type II Superlattices 83 Henan Liu and Yong Zhang 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 Raman Study on InAs/GaSb SL 84 5.2.1 Analysis on (001) Scattering Geometry 85 5.2.2 Analysis on (110) Scattering Geometry 86 5.3 Raman Study on InAs/InAs1−xSbx SL 90 5.3.1 Raman Results for the Constituent Bulks and InAs1−xSbx Alloys 90 5.3.2 Analysis on (001) Scattering Geometry for the SLs 93 5.3.3 Analysis on (110) Scattering for the SLs 95 5.4 A Comparison Among the InAs/InAs1−xSbx, InAs/GaSb, and GaAs/AlAs SLs 97 5.5 Conclusion 98 References 98 6 Dissecting the Molecular Properties of Nanoscale Materials Using Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 101 Nipanshu Agarwal and Krishna Mohan Poluri 6.1 Introduction to Nanomaterials 101 6.2 Techniques Used for Characterization of Nanomaterials 104 6.3 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) Spectroscopy 105 6.3.1 Principle of NMR Spectroscopy 106 6.3.2 Various NMR Techniques Used in Nanomaterial Characterization 106 6.3.2.1 One-dimensional NMR Spectroscopy 108 6.3.2.2 Relaxometry (T1 and T2) 108 6.3.2.3 Two-dimensional NMR Spectroscopy 110 6.3.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Using NMR Spectroscopy 114 6.4 Applications of NMR in Nanotechnology 115 6.4.1 NMR for Characterization of Nanomaterials 115 6.4.1.1 Characterization of Gold Nanomaterials by NMR 115 6.4.1.2 Characterization of Organic Nanomaterials by NMR 119 6.4.1.3 Characterization of Quantum Dots and Nanodiamonds by NMR 120 6.4.2 Elucidating the Molecular Characteristics/Interactions of Nanomaterials Using NMR 120 6.4.2.1 Characterizing Nanodisks Using Paramagnetic NMR 120 6.4.2.2 Characterizing Nanomaterials Using Low Field NMR (LF-NMR) 123 6.4.2.3 Analyzing Nanomaterial Interactions Using 2D NMR Techniques 123 6.4.3 Characterization of Magnetic Contrast Agents (MR-CAs) 128 6.5 Conclusions 132 Acknowledgments 132 References 132 7 Charge Dynamical Properties of Photoresponsive and Novel Semiconductors Using Time-Resolved Millimeter-Wave Apparatus 149 Biswadev Roy, Branislav Vlahovic, M.H. Wu, and C.R. Jones 7.1 Introduction 149 7.1.1 Why Charge Dynamics for Novel Materials in the Millimeter-Wave Regime? 150 7.1.2 Underlying Theory of Operation and Time-Resolved Data: Treatment of Internal Fields in Samples 154 7.1.3 Apparatus Design and Instrumentation 156 7.1.4 Sensitivity Analysis and Dynamic Range 158 7.1.5 Calibration Factor 159 7.2 Studies on RF Responses of Materials 162 7.2.1 Transmission and Reflection Response for GaAs 162 7.2.2 Silicon Response by Resistivity 162 7.2.2.1 Charge Carrier Concentration 165 7.2.2.2 Millimeter-Wave Probe and Laser Data 166 7.2.2.3 TR-mmWC Charge Dynamical Parameter Correlation Table and Sample-Resistivity 168 7.2.2.4 Photoconductance (ΔG) Using Calculated Sensitivity 171 7.3 CdSxSe1−x Nanowires 174 7.3.1 Transmission and Reflection Response Spectra for CdX Nanowire 174 7.3.2 Millimeter-Wave Signal Coherence and Decay Response of CdSxSe1−x Nanowire 176 7.4 Conclusions 182 7.5 Data: CdSxSe1−x TR-mmWC Responses for Various Pump Fluences 182 Acknowledgments 183 References 183 8 Metal Nanoclusters 187 Sayani Mukherjee and Sukhendu Mandal 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 Gold Nanoclusters 189 8.2.1 Phosphine-protected Au-NCs 190 8.2.2 Thiol-protected Nanoclusters 193 8.2.2.1 Brust–Schiffrin Synthesis 193 8.2.2.2 Modified Brust–Schiffrin Synthesis 194 8.2.2.3 Size-focusing Method 197 8.2.2.4 Ligand Exchange-induced Structural Transformation 200 8.2.3 Other Ligands as Protecting Agents 202 8.3 Mixed Metals Alloy Nanoclusters 202 8.4 Conclusion 203 8.5 Future Direction 203 Acknowledgment 204 References 204 Part II Modeling and Simulation 211 9 Simulations of Gas Separation by Adsorption 213 Hawazin Alghamdi, Hind Aljaddani, Sidi Maiga, and Silvina Gatica 9.1 Introduction 213 9.2 Simulation Methods 216 9.2.1 Molecular Dynamics Simulations 216 9.2.2 Monte Carlo Simulations 217 9.2.3 Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory (IAST) 218 9.3 Models 220 9.3.1 Molecular Models 220 9.3.2 Substrate Models 221 9.3.3 Validation of the Methods and Force Fields 222 9.4 Examples 223 9.4.1 GCMC Simulation of CO2/CH4 Binary Mixtures on Nanoporous Carbons 223 9.4.2 MD Simulations of CO2/CH4 Binary Mixtures on Graphene Nanoribbons/Graphite 224 9.4.3 MD Simulations of H2O/N2 Binary Mixtures on Graphene 228 9.4.4 Calculation of the Selectivity of CO2 and CH4 on Graphene Using the IAST 231 9.5 Conclusion 236 References 236 10 Recent Advances in Weyl Semimetal (MnBi2Se4) and Axion Insulator (MnBi2Te4) 239 Sugata Chowdhury, Kevin F. Garrity, and Francesca Tavazza 10.1 Introduction 239 10.2 Discussion 241 10.2.1 MBS 242 10.2.2 MBT 243 10.3 Outlook 252 References 253 Part III Applications 261 11 Chemical Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes and Applications to Sensors 263 Khurshed Ahmad Shah and Muhammad Shunaid Parvaiz 11.1 Introduction 263 11.2 Properties of Carbon Nanotubes 267 11.2.1 Electrical Properties 267 11.2.2 Mechanical Properties 269 11.2.3 Optical Properties 269 11.2.4 Physical Properties 271 11.3 Properties of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes 272 11.3.1 Mechanical Properties 272 11.3.2 Electrical Properties 272 11.4 Types of Chemical Functionalization 273 11.4.1 Thermally Activated Chemical Functionalization 273 11.4.2 Electrochemical Functionalization 273 11.4.3 Photochemical Functionalization 274 11.5 Chemical Functionalization Techniques 274 11.5.1 Chemical Techniques 274 11.5.2 Electrons/Ions Irradiation Techniques 275 11.5.3 Specialized Techniques 275 11.6 Sensing Applications of Carbon Nanotubes 276 11.6.1 Gas Sensors 276 11.6.2 Biosensors 277 11.6.3 Chemical Sensors 277 11.6.4 Electrochemical Sensors 278 11.6.5 Temperature Sensors 278 11.6.6 Pressure Sensors 278 11.7 Advantages and Disadvantages of Carbon Nanotube Sensors 278 11.8 Summary 279 References 280 12 Graphene for Breakthroughs in Designing Next-Generation Energy Storage Systems 287 Abhilash Ayyapan Nair, Manoj Muraleedharan Pillai, and Sankaran Jayalekshmi 12.1 Introduction 287 12.2 Li–Ion Cells 289 12.2.1 Basic Working Mechanism 289 12.2.2 Role of Graphene: Graphene Foam-Based Electrodes for Li–Ion Cells 291 12.3 Li–S Cells 294 12.3.1 Advantages of Li–S Cells 295 12.3.2 Working of Li–S Cells 295 12.3.3 Challenges of Li–S Cells 296 12.3.4 Graphene-Based Sulfur Cathodes for Li–S Cells 297 12.3.5 Graphene Oxide-Based Sulfur Cathodes for Li–S Cells 298 12.4 Supercapacitors 299 12.4.1 Basic Working Principle 299 12.4.2 Graphene-Based Supercapacitor Electrodes 300 12.4.3 Graphene/Polymer Composites as Electrodes 303 12.4.4 Graphene/Metal Oxide Composite Electrodes 305 12.5 Li–Ion Capacitors 306 12.5.1 Working Principle 306 12.5.2 Graphene/Graphene Composites as Cathode Materials 307 12.5.3 Graphene/Graphene Composites as Anode Materials 309 12.6 Looking Forward 310 References 311 13 Progress in Nanostructured Perovskite Photovoltaics 317 Sreekanth Jayachandra Varma and Ramakrishnan Jayakrishnan 13.1 Introduction 317 13.2 Nanostructured Perovskites as Efficient Photovoltaic Materials 318 13.3 Perovskite Quantum Dots 321 13.4 Perovskite Nanowires and Nanopillars 324 13.4.1 2D Perovskite Nanostructures 326 13.4.2 2D/3D Perovskite Heterostructures 330 13.5 Summary 336 References 336 14 Applications of Nanomaterials in Nanomedicine 345 Ayanna N. Woodberry and Francis E. Mensah 14.1 Introduction 345 14.2 Nanomaterials, Definition, and Historical Perspectives 345 14.2.1 What Are Nanomaterials? 345 14.2.2 Origin and Historical Perspectives 346 14.2.3 Synthesis of Nanomaterials 349 14.2.3.1 Inorganic Nanoparticles 349 14.3 Nanomaterials and Their Use in Nanomedicine 351 14.3.1 What Is Nanomedicine? 351 14.3.2 The Myth of Small Molecules 351 14.3.3 Nanomedicine Drug Delivery Has Implications that Go Beyond Medicine 351 14.3.4 Improvement in Function 351 14.3.5 Nanomaterials Use in Nanomedicine for Therapy 351 14.3.5.1 Progress in Polymer Therapeutics as Nanomedicine 351 14.3.5.2 Recent Progress in Polymer: Therapeutics as Nanomedicines 352 14.3.5.3 Use of Linkers 354 14.3.5.4 Targeting Moiety 354 14.3.6 Polymeric Drugs 355 14.3.7 Polymeric-Drug Conjugates 355 14.3.8 Polymer–Protein Conjugates 356 14.4 The Use of Nanomaterials in Global Health for the Treatment of Viral Infections Such As the DNA and the RNA Viruses, Retroviruses, Ebola, and COVID-19 356 14.4.1 Nanomaterials in Radiation Therapy 358 14.5 Conclusion 359 References 359 15 Application of Carbon Nanomaterials on the Performance of Li-Ion Batteries 361 Quinton L. Williams, Adewale A. Adepoju, Sharah Zaab, Mohamed Doumbia, Yahya Alqahtani, and Victoria Adebayo 15.1 Introduction 361 15.2 Battery Background 362 15.2.1 Genesis of the Rechargeable Battery 362 15.2.2 Battery Cell Classifications 363 15.2.2.1 Primary Batteries – Non-rechargeable Batteries 363 15.2.2.2 Secondary Batteries – Rechargeable Batteries 363 15.2.3 Comparison of Rechargeable Batteries 363 15.2.4 Internal Battery Cell Components 364 15.2.4.1 Cathode 365 15.2.4.2 Anode 366 15.2.4.3 Electrolyte 366 15.2.5 Crystal Structure of Active Materials 366 15.2.5.1 Layered LiCoO2 367 15.2.5.2 Spinel LiM2O4 367 15.2.5.3 Olivine LiFePO4 368 15.2.5.4 NCM 369 15.2.6 Principle of Operation of Li-Ion Batteries 370 15.2.7 Battery Terminology 371 15.2.7.1 Battery Safety 373 15.2.8 A Glimpse into the Future of Battery Technology 374 15.3 High C-Rate Performance of LiFePO4/Carbon Nanofibers Composite Cathode for Li-Ion Batteries 375 15.3.1 Introduction 375 15.3.2 Experimental 375 15.3.2.1 Preparation of Composite Cathode 375 15.3.2.2 Characterization 376 15.3.3 Results and Discussion 376 15.3.4 Summary 379 15.4 Graphene Nanoplatelet Additives for High C-Rate LiFePO4 Battery Cathodes 380 15.4.1 Introduction 380 15.4.2 Experimental 381 15.4.2.1 Composite Cathode Preparation and Battery Assembly 381 15.4.2.2 Characterizations and Electrochemical Measurements 382 15.4.3 Results and Discussion 382 15.4.4 Summary 386 15.5 LiFePO4 Battery Cathodes with PANI/CNF Additive 386 15.5.1 Introduction 386 15.5.2 Experimental 386 15.5.2.1 Preparation of the PANI/CNF Conducting Agent and Coin Cell 387 15.5.3 Results and Discussion 387 15.5.4 Conclusion 392 15.6 Reduced Graphene Oxide – LiFePO4 Composite Cathode for Li-Ion Batteries 393 15.6.1 Introduction 393 15.6.2 Experimental 394 15.6.3 Results and Discussion 394 15.6.4 Summary 398 15.7 Rate Performance of Carbon Nanofiber Anode for Lithium-Ion Batteries 398 15.7.1 Introduction 398 15.7.2 Experimental 398 15.7.3 Results and Discussion 399 15.7.4 Summary 401 15.8 NCM Batteries with the Addition of Carbon Nanofibers in the Cathode 402 15.8.1 Introduction 402 15.8.2 Experimental 403 15.8.3 Results and Discussion 403 15.8.4 Summary 405 15.9 Conclusion 407 Acknowledgments 407 References 408 Part IV Space Science 415 16 Micro-Raman Imaging of Planetary Analogs: Nanoscale Characterization of Past and Current Processes 417 Dina M. Bower, Ryan Jabukek, Marc D. Fries, and Andrew Steele 16.1 Introduction 417 16.2 Relationships Between Minerals 421 16.2.1 Minerals in the Solar System 421 16.2.2 Minerals as Indicators of Life and Habitability 425 16.3 Planetary Analogs 427 16.3.1 Modern Terrestrial Analogs 427 16.3.2 Ancient Terrestrial Analogs 429 16.4 Meteorites and Lunar Rocks 431 16.5 Carbon 434 16.5.1 Definition and Description of Macromolecular Carbon 434 16.5.2 Macromolecular Carbon on the Earth and in Astromaterials 435 16.5.3 Macromolecular Carbon in Petrographic Context 437 16.6 Conclusion 439 References 439 17 Machine Learning and Nanomaterials for Space Applications 453 Eric Lyness, Victoria Da Poian, and James Mackinnon 17.1 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 453 17.1.1 What Do We Mean by Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning? 454 17.1.2 The Field of Data Analysis and Data Science 455 17.1.2.1 Data Analysis 455 17.1.2.2 Data Science 455 17.1.3 Applications in Nanoscience 456 17.2 Machine Learning Methods and Tools 457 17.2.1 Types of ML 457 17.2.1.1 Supervised 457 17.2.1.2 Unsupervised 459 17.2.1.3 Semi-supervised 460 17.2.1.4 Reinforcement Learning 460 17.2.2 The Basic Techniques and the Underlying Algorithms 460 17.2.2.1 Regression (Linear, Logistic) 460 17.2.2.2 Decision Tree 461 17.2.2.3 Neural Networks 461 17.2.2.4 Expert Systems 463 17.2.2.5 Dimensionality Reduction 463 17.2.3 Available Tools: Discussion of the Software Available, Both Free and Commercial, and How They Can Be Used by Nonexperts 464 17.3 Limitations of AI 464 17.3.1 Data Availability 464 17.3.1.1 Splitting Your Dataset 464 17.3.2 Warnings in Implementation (Overfitting, Cross-validation) 465 17.3.3 Computational Power 465 17.4 Case Study: Autonomous Machine Learning Applied to Space Applications 466 17.4.1 Few Existing AI Applications for Planetary Missions 466 17.4.2 MOMA Use-Case Project (Leaning Toward Science Autonomy) 467 17.5 Challenges and Approaches to Miniaturized Autonomy 468 17.5.1 Computing Requirements of AI/Machine Learning 468 17.5.2 Why Is Space Hard? 469 17.5.3 Software Approaches for Embedded Hardware 471 17.6 Summary: How to Approach AI 473 References 474 Index 477

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a timely overview of basic principles and significant advances of semiconductor-based photocatalysts for solar energy conversion Semiconductor Solar Photocatalysts: Fundamentals and Applications presents a systematic, in-depth summary of both fundamental and cutting-edge research in novel photocatalytic systems. Focusing on photocatalysts with vast potential for efficient utilization of solar energy, this up-to-date volume covers heterojunction systems, graphene-based photocatalysts, organic semiconductor photocatalysts, metal sulfide semiconductor photocatalysts, and graphitic carbon nitride-based photocatalysts. Organized into six chapters, the text opens with a detailed introduction to the history, design principles, modification strategies, and performance evaluation methods of solar energy photocatalysis. The remaining chapters provide detailed discussion of various novel photocatalytic systems such as direct Z-scheme and S-scheme photocatalysts, organic polymers, and covalent organic frameworks. This authoritative resource: Explains the essential concepts of solar energy photocatalysis and heterojunction systems for photocatalysis Reviews interesting structures and new applications of semiconductor photocatalysts Features contributions from an international panel of leading researchers in the field Includes extensive references and numerous tables, figures, and color illustrations Semiconductor Solar Photocatalysts: Fundamentals and Applications is valuable resource for all catalytic chemists, materials scientists, inorganic and physical chemists, chemical engineers, and physicists working in the semiconductor industry. Table of ContentsChapter 1: The fundamentals of solar energy photocatalysis 1.1 Background 1.2 History of solar energy photocatalysis 1.3 Fundamental principles of solar energy photocatalysis 1.3.1 Basic mechanisms for solar energy photocatalysis 1.3.2 Thermodynamic requirements for solar energy photocatalysis 1.3.3 Dynamics requirements for solar energy photocatalysis 1.4 Design, development and modification of semiconductor photocatalysts 1.4.1 Design principles of semiconductor photocatalysts 1.4.2 Classification of semiconductor photocatalysts 1.4.3 Modification strategies of semiconductor photocatalysts 1.4.4 Development approaches of novel semiconductor photocatalysts 1.5 Processes and evaluation of solar energy photocatalysis 1.5.1 Processes of solar energy photocatalysis 1.5.1.1 photocatalytic water splitting 1.5.1.2 photocatalytic CO2 reduction 1.5.1.3 photocatalytic degradation 1.5.2 Evaluation of solar energy photocatalysis 1.6 The scope of this book Chapter 2: Heterojunction systems for photocatalysis 2.1. Introduction 2.2. Classification of heterojunction photocatalysts 2.2.1. Type-II heterojunction photocatalysts 2.2.2. p-n junction photocatalysts 2.2.3. Surface junction photocatalysts 2.2.4. Direct Z-scheme photocatalysts 2.2.5. S-scheme photocatalysts 2.3. Evaluation of the heterojunction photocatalysts 2.3.1. Band structure 2.3.1.1. Light absorption ability 2.3.1.2. Reduction and oxidation ability 2.3.1.3. Identification of major charge carriers 2.3.2. Charge carrier separation efficiency 2.3.2.1. Electrochemical test 2.3.2.2. Optical spectroscopy 2.3.3. Charge carrier migration mechanism 2.3.3.1. Metal loading 2.3.3.2. Reactive oxygen species trapping 2.3.3.3. In situ irradiated XPS 2.4. Applications 2.4.1. Photocatalytic water splitting 2.4.2. Photocatalytic CO2 reduction 2.4.3. Photocatalytic N2 fixation 2.4.4. Photocatalytic environmental remediation 2.4.5. Photocatalytic disinfection 2.5. Summary and Future Perspective Chapter 3: Metal sulfide semiconductor photocatalysts 3.1. Introduction 3.2. General view of metal sulfide photocatalysts 3.3. Synthetic strategies of metal sulfide photocatalysts 3.3.1. Solution-based method 3.3.1.1. Hydrothermal method 3.3.1.2. Solvothermal method 3.3.2. Chemical bath deposition 3.3.3. Template method 3.3.4. Ion exchange method 3.3.5. Other synthetic methods 3.4. CdS-based photocatalysts 3.4.1. Crystal structures and morphology 3.4.1.1. Zero-dimensional structure 3.4.1.2. One-dimensional structure 3.4.1.3. Two-dimensional structure 3.4.1.4. Three-dimensional structure 3.4.2. Construction of CdS based composite photocatalysts 3.4.2.1. CdS cocatalyst heterojunctions 3.4.2.2. CdS-based type II heterojunctions 3.4.2.3. CdS-based Z-scheme heterojunctions 3.4.2.4. CdS-based S-scheme heterojunctions 3.5. In2S3-based photocatalysts 3.5.1. Crystal structure and electronic properties 3.5.2. Morphology of In2S3 photocatalyst 3.5.2.1. Zero-dimensional structure 3.5.2.2. One-dimensional structure 3.5.2.3. Two-dimensional structure 3.5.2.4. Three-dimensional structure 3.5.3. Construction of In2S3-based composite photocatalysts 3.5.3.1. In2S3-based type-II heterojunctions 3.5.3.2. In2S3-based direct Z-scheme heterojunctions 3.5.3.3. In2S3-based indirect Z-scheme heterojunctions 3.6. SnS2-based photocatalysts 3.6.1. Morphology of SnS2 photocatalysts 3.6.2. Construction of SnS2 based composite photocatalyst 3.6.2.1. Cocatalyst/SnS2 composites 3.6.2.2. SnS2 based type-II composites 3.6.2.3. SnS2 based Z-scheme composites 3.7. Cu2S-based photocatalysts 3.7.1. Morphology of Cu2S photocatalysts 3.7.1.1. Zero-dimensional structure 3.7.1.2. One-dimensional structure 3.7.1.3. Two-dimensional structure 3.7.1.4. Three-dimensional structure 3.7.2. Construction of Cu2S-based composite photocatalysts 3.7.2.1. Cu2S/metal oxide photocatalysts 3.7.2.2. Cu2S/metal sulfide photocatalysts 3.7.2.3. Cu2S/metal photocatalysts 3.8. Other metal sulfide photocatalysts 3.9. Environmental and energy applications 3.9.1. Photocatalytic H2 production 3.9.1.1. Unary metal sulfide photocatalysts 3.9.1.2. Binary metal sulfide-based nanocomposite photocatalysts 3.9.1.3. Ternary metal sulfide-based nanocomposite photocatalysts 3.9.2. Photoreduction of CO2 3.9.3. Photocatalytic removal of environmental contamination 3.9.3.1. Photocatalytic dye degradation 3.9.3.2. Photocatalytic reduction of hexavalent chromium 3.10. Conclusion and outlook Chapter 4: Graphene-based photocatalysts 4.1. Introduction 4.2. Graphene and its derivatives 4.2.1. Graphene oxide 4.2.2. Reduced graphene oxide 4.2.3. Graphene quantum dot 4.3 General preparation techniques of graphene in photocatalysis 4.3.1. Chemical exfoliation 4.3.2. Chemical vapor deposition 4.4. General advantages of graphene 4.4.1. Conductor behavior 4.4.2. Photothermal effect 4.4.3. Large specific surface area 4.4.4. Enhancing photostability 4.4.5. Improving nanoparticle dispersion 4.5. Characterization methods 4.5.1. Transmission electron microscopy 4.5.2. Atomic force microscopy 4.5.3. Raman spectroscopy 4.5.4. X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy 4.6. Recent development in graphene-based photocatalysts 4.6.1. Metal oxide 4.6.2. Metal sulfide 4.6.3. Non-metal semiconductor 4.6.4. Metal-organic-framework 4.7. Summary and concluding remarks Chapter 5: Graphitic carbon nitride-based photocatalysts 5.1. Introduction 5.2. Structure of g-C3N4 5.3. Preparation of g-C3N4-based photocatalysts 5.3.1. Pure g-C3N4 5.3.2. g-C3N4-based composite photocatalysts 5.4. Main photocatalytic applications of g-C3N4-based photocatalysts 5.4.1. Photocatalytic H2O splitting for H2 generation 5.4.2. Photocatalytic CO2 reduction for hydrocarbon fuels 5.4.3. Photocatalytic N2 fixation for ammonia 5.5. Strategies for optimizing photocatalytic performance of g-C3N4 5.5.1. Morphology design 5.5.2. Surface modification 5.5.3. Element doping 5.5.4. Cocatalyst loading 5.5.5. Heterojunction 5.5.6. Single-atom deposition 5.6. Challenges and prospects Chapter 6: Organic semiconductor photocatalysts 6.1. MOFs photocatalysts 6.1.1. Synthesis of MOFs photocatalysts 6.1.2. MOFs for photocatalytic degradation of pollutants 6.1.3. MOFs for photocatalytic organic transformation 6.1.4. MOFs for photocatalytic H2 production from water 6.1.5. MOFs for photocatalytic reduction of CO2 6.2. Organic polymers photocatalysts 6.2.1. Synthesis of organic polymers photocatalysts 6.2.2. Organic polymers for photocatalytic degradation of pollutants 6.2.3. Organic polymers for organic transformation. 6.2.4. Organic polymers for photocatalytic H2 production from water 6.2.5. Organic polymers for photocatalytic reduction of CO2 6.3. COFs photocatalysts 6.3.1. Synthesis of COFs photocatalysts 6.3.2. COFs for photocatalytic degradation of pollutants 6.3.3. COFs for photocatalytic organic transformation 6.3.4. COFs for photocatalytic H2 production from water 6.3.5. COFs for photocatalytic reduction of CO2

Read more less

Book SynopsisOptical Imaging and Sensing Understand the future of optical imaging with this cutting-edge guide Optoelectronic devices for imaging and sensing are among the backbones of modern technology. Facilitating the mutual conversion of optical and electrical signals, they have applications from telecommunications to molecular spectroscopy, and their incorporation into photon-involved technologies is only growing. The rapid development of this field makes the need for a fully up-to-date introduction all the more critical. Optical Imaging and Sensing meets this need with a comprehensive guide to the novel materials and devices employed in optical imaging and sensing. Given the current revolution in new imaging materials, an introduction that fully incorporates the latest research is an indispensable tool for scientists and engineers in a huge range of fields. The technologies surveyed here promise to transform public security, 5G and next-generation wireless communication, clinical imaging, and many more. Optical Imaging and Sensing Readers will also find: Detailed discussion of materials including semimetallic graphene, semiconducting black phosphorous, and many more Discussion of devices from infrared photodetectors to nonlinear interferometers A thorough look forward to the future of the field Optical Imaging and Sensing is a useful reference for materials scientists, spectroscopists, semiconductor physicists, and engineers working in any field or industry involving optical imaging or sensing technology.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction of Optical Imaging and Sensing: Materials, Devices, and Applications 1 Qimiao Chen, Hao Xu, and Chuan S. Tan 1.1 Optoelectronic Material Systems 1 1.1.1 Si Platform 1 1.1.2 Two-dimensional Materials and Their van der Waals Heterostructures 3 1.1.2.1 Graphene 3 1.1.2.2 Transition Metal Dichalcogenides 4 1.1.2.3 2D Heterostructures 5 1.2 Challenges and Prospect of Nano-optoelectronic Devices 5 1.2.1 III–V Compounds 6 1.2.2 Perovskites 7 1.2.3 Organic Optoelectronic Materials 7 References 8 2 2D Material-Based Photodetectors for Imaging 11 Wenshuo Xu, Zhuo Wang, and Andrew T. S. Wee 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Visible-Light Photodetectors 15 2.3 Infrared Photodetectors 21 2.4 Broadband Photodetectors 26 2.5 Plasmon-Enhanced Photodetectors 36 2.6 Large-Scale and Flexible Photodetectors 44 2.7 Summary 49 References 50 3 Surface Plasmonic Resonance-Enhanced Infrared Photodetectors 55 Boyang Xiang, Guiru Gu, and Xuejun Lu 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 Brief Review of Basic Concepts of SPR and SPR Structures 56 3.2.1 Plasma Oscillations in Metals 56 3.2.2 Complex Permittivity and the Drude Model 56 3.2.3 Surface Plasmonic Waves at the Semi-infinite Dielectric and Metal Interface 57 3.2.4 Prism-Coupled Surface Plasmonic Wave Excitation 59 3.2.5 Surface Grating-Coupled Surface Plasmonic Wave Excitation 60 3.3 Surface Plasmonic Wave-Enhanced QDIPs 61 3.3.1 Two-Dimensional Metallic Hole Array (2DSHA)-Induced Surface Plasmonic Waves 61 3.3.2 2DSHA Surface Plasmonic Structure-Enhanced QDIP 64 3.4 Localized Surface Plasmonic Wave-Enhanced QDIPs 68 3.4.1 Localized Surface Plasmonic Waves 68 3.4.2 Near-Field Distributions 68 3.4.3 Nanowire Pair 69 3.4.4 Circular Disk Array for Broadband IR Photodetector Enhancement 71 3.5 Plasmonic Perfect Absorber (PPA) 72 3.5.1 Introduction to Plasmonic Perfect Absorber 72 3.5.2 Plasmonic Perfect Absorber-Enhanced QDIP 74 3.5.3 Broadband Plasmonic Perfect Absorber 76 3.5.4 2DSHA Plasmonic Perfect Absorber 76 3.6 Chapter Summary 76 References 78 4 Optical Resistance Switch for Optical Sensing 83 Shiva Khani, Ali Farmani, and Pejman Rezaei 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Graphene Optical Switch 85 4.2.1 dc Mode of the Gate Capacitor 87 4.2.2 AC Mode of the Gate Capacitor 89 4.3 Nanomaterial Heterostructures-Based Switch 93 4.3.1 Situation 1: n 2 L ≫ n 2 H 95 4.3.2 Situation 2: n 2 H ≫ n 2 l 96 4.3.3 Situation 3: n 2 H ≃ n 2 l 96 4.4 Modulation Characteristics 104 4.5 Summary 115 References 115 5 Optical Interferometric Sensing 123 Hailong Wang and Jietai Jing 5.1 Introduction 123 5.2 Nonlinear Interferometer 124 5.2.1 Experimental Implementation of Phase Locking 125 5.2.2 Quantum Enhancement of Phase Sensitivity 131 5.2.3 Enhancement of Entanglement and Quantum Noise Cancellation 136 5.3 Other Types of Nonlinear Interferometers 143 5.3.1 Nonlinear Sagnac Interferometer 143 5.3.2 Hybrid Interferometer with a Nonlinear FWM Process and a Linear Beam-splitter 151 5.3.3 Experimental Implementation of a Phase-Sensitive Parametric Amplifier 155 5.3.4 Interference-Induced Quantum-Squeezing Enhancement 160 5.4 Nonlinear Interferometric SPR Sensing 164 5.5 Summary and Outlook 173 References 173 6 Spatial-frequency-shift Super-resolution Imaging Based on Micro/nanomaterials 175 Mingwei Tang and Qing Yang 6.1 Introduction 175 6.2 The Principle of SFS Super-resolution Imaging Based on Micro/nanomaterials 177 6.3 Super-resolution Imaging Based on Nanowires and Polymers 178 6.4 Super-resolution Imaging Based on Photonic Waveguides 184 6.4.1 Label-free Super-resolution Imaging Based on Photonic Waveguides 184 6.4.2 Labeled Super-resolution Imaging Based on Photonic Waveguides 186 6.5 Super-resolution Imaging Based on Wafers 189 6.5.1 Principle of Super-resolution Imaging Based on Wafers 189 6.5.2 Label-free Super-resolution Imaging Based on Wafers 194 6.5.3 Labeled Super-resolution Imaging Based on Wafers 195 6.6 Super-resolution Imaging Based on SPPs and Metamaterials 197 6.6.1 SPP-assisted Illumination Nanoscopy 199 6.6.1.1 Metal–Dielectric Multilayer Metasubstrate PSIM 200 6.6.1.2 Graphene-assisted PSIM 202 6.6.2 Localized Plasmon-assisted Illumination Nanoscopy 203 6.6.3 Metamaterial-assisted Illumination Nanoscopy 204 6.7 Summary and Outlook 206 References 208 7 Monolithically Integrated Multi-section Semiconductor Lasers: Toward the Future of Integrated Microwave Photonics 215 Jin Li and Tao Pu 7.1 Introduction 215 7.2 Monolithically Integrated Multi-section Semiconductor Laser (MI-MSSL) Device 219 7.2.1 Monolithically Integrated Optical Feedback Lasers (MI-OFLs) 219 7.2.1.1 Passive Feedback Lasers (PFLs) 220 7.2.1.2 Amplified/Active Feedback Lasers (AFLs) 224 7.2.2 Monolithically Integrated Mutually Injected Semiconductor Lasers (MI-MISLs) 225 7.3 Electro-optic Conversion Characteristics 229 7.3.1 Modulation Response Enhancement 229 7.3.2 Nonlinearity Reduction 237 7.3.3 Chirp Suppression 238 7.4 Photonic Microwave Generation 238 7.4.1 Tunable Single-Tone Microwave Signal Generation 240 7.4.1.1 Free-Running State 240 7.4.1.2 Mode-Beating Self-Pulsations (MB-SPs) 242 7.4.1.3 Period-One (P1) Oscillation 244 7.4.1.4 Sideband Injection Locking 245 7.4.2 Frequency-Modulated Microwave Signal Generation 248 7.4.3 High-Performance Microwave Signal Generation Optimizing Technique 250 7.5 Microwave Photonic Filter (MPF) 254 7.6 Laser Arrays 256 7.7 Conclusion 259 Funding Information 261 Disclosures 261 References 261 Index 271

Read more less

Book SynopsisPhotocatalytic Hydrogen Production for Sustainable Energy A complete discussion of photocatalytic hydrogen production, including water splitting, biomass or waste valorization, solar reactors, photoelectrochemical technologies, and more In Photocatalytic Hydrogen Production for Sustainable Energy, distinguished researcher Dr. Alberto Puga delivers a comprehensive exploration of photocatalytic hydrogen production. In the book, readers will find explanations of why and how this technology is called to have a significant impact on cleaner and sustainable production of fuels and find a valuable source of information on the mechanisms of light harvesting and the chemical transformations occurring in these processes. The book explains the technical and engineering approaches currently being used in photocatalytic hydrogen production, as well as approaches that may be used in the future for both commercial and research purposes. A fulsome approach to the subject, covering everything from fundamental aspects of photocatalytic water splitting to waste valorization and solar plant operations, the book also includes: A thorough introduction to sustainability and photocatalytic hydrogen production in the context of renewable energy Comprehensive explorations of water splitting under visible light and ultraviolet irradiation Practical discussions of photoreforming and photocatalytic organic synthesis with convenient hydrogen release Fulsome treatments of photoelectrocatalytic water splitting for hydrogen production Perfect for photochemists and catalytic chemists, Photocatalytic Hydrogen Production for Sustainable Energy will also benefit other chemists, chemical engineers, materials scientists, energy engineers and physicists seeking a one-stop resource on the subject.Table of ContentsSustainability. Photocatalytic Hydrogen Production in the Context of Renewable Energy Fundamentals and Concepts Photophysics, Charge Transfer Mechanisms, Chemistry Water Splitting under Visible Light Water Splitting under UV-vis Irradiation Solar Photocatalytic Hydrogen Production Photoreforming, Convenient Hydrogen Release Waste, Biomass Valorisation via Photocatalytic Transformation into Hydrogen Organic Transformations Involving Photocatalytic Hydrogen Release Photobiocatalytic, Photobiomimetic Hydrogen Production Photoelectrocatalytic Hydrogen Production Wireless Systems, Artificial Leafs Photoreactor Design Pilot, Real Solar Plants

Read more less

Book SynopsisSodium-Ion Capacitors Enables readers to quickly understand core issues and field development of sodium-ion capacitors Sodium-Ion Capacitors summarizes and outlines the dynamics and development of sodium-ion capacitors, covering key aspects of the technology including background, classification and configuration, key technologies, and more, allowing readers to gain an understanding of sodium-ion capacitors from the perspective of both industrial technology and electrochemistry. Sodium-Ion Capacitors includes information on: EDLC-type mechanism of SCs and battery-type mechanism of SIBs, definition and types of pseudocapacitance, and energy storage mechanism of pseudocapacitors Cathode materials for sodium-ion capacitors, covering EDLC cathode materials, carbon nanotubes, reduced graphene oxide, and hollow carbon microspheres Flexible battery-type anode and capacitive cathode SICs cell configurations, including flexible electrodes based on carbon nanofiber, graphene substrates, carbon cloth, MXenes, and metal foil Pre-sodiation technologies, covering operation with Li metal, usage of Li-based alternatives, and the sacrificial additives method Summarizing the development, directions, potential, and core issues of sodium-ion capacitors, Sodium-Ion Capacitors is an essential resource on the subject for materials scientists, solid-state chemists and electrochemists, and semiconductor physicists in both industry and academia.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1Peng Cai, Wentao Deng, Hongshuai Hou, Guoqiang Zou, and Xiaobo Ji 1.1 A Brief Development of SICs 1 1.2 Comparison Between Different Hybrid-Ion Capacitors 4 1.3 SICs Energy Storage Mechanism Introduction 16 1.4 Key Technologies of SICs 17 2 Characteristics of Sodium-Ion Capacitor Devices 27Peng Cai, Wentao Deng, Hongshuai Hou, Guoqiang Zou, and Xiaobo Ji 2.1 Basic Features 27 2.2 Working Principle 30 2.3 Equations 32 3 Fundamental Understanding of Sodium-Ion Capacitors Mechanism 45Peng Cai, Wentao Deng, Hongshuai Hou, Guoqiang Zou, and Xiaobo Ji 3.1 EDLC-Type Mechanism of SCs and Battery-Type Mechanism of SIBs 45 3.2 Pseudocapacitance Mechanism 46 4 Classification of Sodium-Ion Capacitors Cell Configurations 63Peng Cai, Wentao Deng, Guoqiang Zou, Hongshuai Hou, and Xiaobo Ji 4.1 Battery-Type Anode and EDLC Cathode SICs Cell Configurations 63 4.2 Battery-Type Anode and Pseudocapacitive Cathode SICs Cell Configurations 64 4.3 EDLC Anode and Battery-Type Cathode SICs Cell Configurations 66 4.4 Pseudocapacitive Anode and Battery-Type Cathode SICs Cell Configurations 66 4.5 Capacitive Anode and Hybrid Cathode SICs Cell Configurations 67 4.6 Summary 69 5 Cathode Materials for Sodium-Ion Capacitors 75Xiong Zhang, Wenjie Liu, Lei Wang, Chen Li, and Yanwei Ma 5.1 Introduction 75 5.2 EDLC Cathode Materials 77 5.3 Pseudocapacitive Cathode Materials 90 5.4 Battery-Type Cathode Materials 102 6 Anode Materials for Sodium-Ion Capacitors 115Kangyu Zou, Wentao Deng, Hongshuai Hou, Xiaobo Ji, and Guoqiang Zou 6.1 EDLC Anode Materials 120 6.2 Pseudocapacitive Anode Materials 123 6.3 Battery-Type Anode Materials 128 6.4 Other Novel Materials 169 7 Flexible Sodium-Ion Capacitor Devices 183Taoqiu Zhang and Huanwen Wang 7.1 Flexible SICs Devices 183 7.2 Flexible Capacitive Anode and Battery-Type Cathode SICs Cell Configurations 211 7.3 Electrolytes in Flexible SICs Devices 217 8 Pre-sodiation Technologies 225Zirui Song, Chang Liu, and Xiaobo Ji 8.1 Introduction 225 8.2 Pre-lithiation in Lithium-Ion Batteries 226 8.3 Pre-sodiation in Sodium-Ion Batteries 236 8.4 Pre-sodiation in Sodium-Ion Capacitors 238 9 Conclusions and Future Perspective 249Kangyu Zou, Wentao Deng, Hongshuai Hou, Guoqiang Zou, and Xiaobo Ji 9.1 Definitions and Mechanisms 249 9.2 Configurations 250 9.3 Electrode Materials 251 9.4 Key Technologies 251 9.5 Future Perspective 252 Index 259

Read more less

Book SynopsisUV-Visible Photocatalysis for Clean Energy Production and Pollution Remediation Comprehensive resource detailing fundamentals of photocatalysis, clean energy production, and pollution treatment, as well as recent developments in each field UV-Visible Photocatalysis for Clean Energy Production and Pollution Remediation: Materials, Reaction Mechanisms, and Applications provides current developments in photocatalytic reactions for both inorganic and organic-based materials which operate under UV-visible light or sunlight irradiation, with a focus on the fundamentals and applications in clean energy production and pollution remediation. The text curates interesting and important research surrounding photocatalysis for hydrogen production, including the fundamentals and photocatalytic remediation of our better environments, which covers the reduction of CO2 and fixation of N2 with H2O under UV-visible light or sunlight irradiation. The first chapter of the book introduces these diverse subjects by including a brief history of the developments of photocatalysis research since around the 1960s. Specific sample topics covered in this book include: Visible-light active photocatalysts in pollutant degradation and conversion with simultaneous hydrogen production Application of S-scheme heterojunction photocatalyst and the role of the defects on the photocatalytic reactions on ZnO Strategies for promoting overall water splitting with particulate photocatalysts via single-step visible-light photoexcitation Polymeric carbon nitride-based materials in aqueous suspensions for water photo-splitting and photo-reforming of biomass aqueous solutions to generate H2 Visible light-responsive TiO2 thin film photocatalysts for the separate evolution of H2 and O2 from water For chemists, scientists, physicists, and engineers across a wide range of disciplines, UV-Visible Photocatalysis for Clean Energy Production and Pollution Remediation is an essential resource for understanding current developments in photocatalytic reactions on both inorganic and organic-based materials which operate under UV-visible light or sunlight irradiation.Table of Contents1. Introduction to integrate the diverse subjects and a brief history Part I: Fundamentals of Visible Light-driven photocatalysis and Photocatalytic Splitting of Water to Produce H2: 2. Photocatalytic reaction mechanism 3. Photoctatalytic activity of TiO2 materials with iron and other metal species as phase-composition controllers 4. Modification of photocatalyst to achieve high performance 5. Conjugated polymer photocatalytic material 6. Highly efficient photocatalytic H2 production from H2O 7. Semiconducting photocatalytic materials to produce H2 from H2O under visible light irradiation 8. High efficient photocatalytic H2 production from H2O 9. Photocatalytic H2 evolution from H2O over g-C3N4 10. Efficient photocatalytic H2 production from H2O 11. Photocatalytic H2 production from H2O 12. Theoretical studies of photocatalytic H2 production from H2O 13. Photo-induced super-hydrophilicity on TiO2 surfaces; reaction mechanism and applications Part II: Photocatalytic Reduction of CO2 with H2O and Fixation of N2: 14. Photocatalytic reduction of CO2 with H2O 15. Photocatalytic reduction of CO2 with H2O 16. Mechanistic study of photocatalytic CO2 reduction 17. Photocatalytic reduction of CO2 with H2O 18. Photocatalytic reduction of CO2 with H2O 19. Photocatalytic reduction of CO2 with H2O 20. Photocatalytic reduction of CO2 with H2O 21. Photocatalytic reduction of CO2 on reduced graphene oxide/TiO2 22. Photocatalytic activity of Pt/g-C3N4 nanosheets for solar fuel production 23. Photocatalytic fixation of N2 24. Photocatalytic fixation of N2 25. Photocatalytic fixation of N2 Part III. Photocatalytic Remediation and Selective Formation of Useful Molecules: III-1 Photocatalytic degradation of organic pollutants in water 26. Photocatalytic degradation of polluted compounds 27. Photocatalytic degradation over TiO2-based photocatalysts 28. Photocatalytic degradation of aromatic compounds 29. Photocatalytic degradation of polluted compounds 30. Photocatalytic degradation 31 Photocatalytic degradation of polluted compounds 32. Photocatalytic purification of polluted water 33. Photocatalytic degradation of polluted compounds III-2. Photocatalytic degradation to produce useful molecules from alcohols and biomass wastes 34. Selective oxidation of alcohols using carbon nitride photocatalysts 35. Photocatalytic selective reaction III-3. Photocatalytic degradation in polluted compounds in air 36. Photocatalytic air purifying III-4. Photocatalytic degradation reaction and the role of surface active sites 37. Photocatalytic reaction on ZnO and the role of the defects 38. Quantum dot-photocatalyzed reactions

Read more less

Book SynopsisMagnetic Nanoparticles Learn how to make and use magnetic nanoparticles in energy research, electrical engineering, and medicine In Magnetic Nanoparticles: Synthesis, Characterization, and Applications, a team of distinguished engineers and chemists delivers an insightful overview of magnetic materials with a focus on nano-sized particles. The book reviews the foundational concepts of magnetism before moving on to the synthesis of various magnetic nanoparticles and the functionalization of nanoparticles that enables their use in specific applications. The authors also highlight characterization techniques and the characteristics of nanostructured magnetic materials, like superconducting quantum interference device (SQUID) magnetometry. Advanced applications of magnetic nanoparticles in energy research, engineering, and medicine are also discussed, and explicit derivations and explanations in non-technical language help readers from diverse backgrounds understand the concepts contained within. Readers will also find: A thorough introduction to magnetic materials, including the theory and fundamentals of magnetization In-depth explorations of the types and characteristics of soft and hard magnetic materials Comprehensive discussions of the synthesis of nanostructured magnetic materials, including the importance of various preparation methods Expansive treatments of the surface modification of magnetic nanoparticles, including the technical resources employed in the process Perfect for materials scientists, applied physicists, and measurement and control engineers, Magnetic Nanoparticles: Synthesis, Characterization, and Applications will also earn a place in the libraries of inorganic chemists.Table of Contents1 Introduction to Magnetic Materials 1.1 Theory and Fundamentals of Magnetization 1.2 Types of Magnetism 1.3 Extrinsic and Intrinsic Characteristics of Magnetic Materials 2 Types and Characteristics of Magnetic Materials 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Soft and Hard Magnetic Materials 2.3 Hysteresis Loop 2.4 Magnetic Characteristic Measurements 2.5 Magnetic Losses 3 Insights into the Synthesis of Nanostructured Magnetic Materials 3.1 Introduction 3.2 The Synthesis Process of Magnetic Nanoparticles 3.3 The Importance of the Synthesis and/or Preparation Methods 3.4 Dependency of Particle Size and Shape on the Synthesis Route 3.5 Questions Related to the Selected Synthesis Route 3.6 Dependency of Magnetic Behaviors on Particle/Grain Size 3.7 Dependency of Magnetic Behaviors on Particle/Grain Shape 3.8 Introduction to Wet-Chemical Synthesis Route 3.9 Introduction to Solid-state Routes to Synthesize Magnetic Nanoparticles 3.10 Some Methods for Extraction of Iron Oxide Nanoparticles from Industrial Wastes 4 Surface Modification of Magnetic Nanoparticles 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Employed Technical Resources for Surface Modification 4.3 Surface Modification of Magnetic Nanoparticles with Surfactant 4.4 Current Trends for Surface Modification of Nanomaterials 4.5 Summary 5 Insight into a Superconducting Quantum Interference Device (SQUID) 5.1 Introduction to SQUID 5.2 Superconducting Materials Used in SQUID 5.3 What is the Basic Principle in SQUID VSM Magnetometer? 5.4 Superconductivity 5.5 Josephson Tunneling (JT) Phenomenon 5.6 Utilizations and Applications of SQUID 5.7 Advantages and Disadvantages of SQUID Compared to other Techniques in Characterization of Magnetic Nanomaterials 6 The principle of SQUID Magnetometry and its Contribution in MNPs Evaluation 6.1 Introduction 6.2 The Correct Procedure to Perform the Zero Field Cooling (ZFC) and Field Cooling (FC) Magnetic Study 6.3 The Concept of Merging Zero Field Cooled (ZFC) and Field Cooled (FC) Curve Completely with Each Other 6.4 Types of Information Obtained from the ZFC and FC Curves 6.5 SQUID Magnetometry: Magnetic Measurements 7 Type of Interactions in Magnetic Nanoparticles 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Magnetic Dipole-Dipole Interaction between Magnetic Nanoparticles 7.3 Exchange Interaction 7.4 Dipolar Interactions 7.5 Spin-orbit Interaction 8 Insight into Susceptibility Measurements in Nanostructured Magnetic Materials 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Information Obtained from Susceptibility Measurements 8.3 Insight into interaction between magnetic nanoparticles and used models 8.4 AC Susceptibility Measurement Evaluation 9 Induced Effects in Nanostructured Magnetic Materials 9.1 Introduction 9.2 The Spin-Canted Effect 9.3 Spin-glass-like Behavior in Magnetic Nanoparticles 9.4 Reentrant Spin Glass (RSG) Behavior in Magnetic Nanoparticles 9.5 Finite Size Effects on Magnetic Properties 9.6 Surface Effect in Nanosized Particles 9.7 Memory Effect 10 Insight into Superparamagnetism in Magnetic Nanoparticles 10.1 Introduction 10.2 Superparamagnetism 10.3 SPM Description Based on Magnetization Hysteresis Loop (M-H or B-H) 10.4 SPM detection based on ZFC and FC magnetization curves 11 Mössbauer Spectroscopy 11.1 Introduction to Mössbauer Spectroscopy 11.2 Observed Effects in Mössbauer 11.3 Hyperfine Interactions 11.4 Mössbauer Spectroscopy Applied to Magnetism 12 Applications of Magnetic Nanoparticles 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Magnetic Nanoparticles Application in Engineering Fields 12.3 Magnetic Nanoparticles Application in Energy 12.4 Magnetic Nanoparticles Application in Medical Sciences 12.5 Other General Applications of Magnetic Nanoparticles

Read more less

Book SynopsisGraphene for Post-Moore Silicon Optoelectronics Provides timely coverage of an important research area that is highly relevant to advanced detection and control technology Projecting device performance beyond the scaling limits of Moore’s law requires technologies based on novel materials and device architecture. Due to its excellent electronic, thermal, and optical properties, graphene has emerged as a scalable, low-cost material with enormous integration possibilities for numerous optoelectronic applications. Graphene for Post-Moore Silicon Optoelectronics presents an up-to-date overview of the fundamentals, applications, challenges, and opportunities of integrating graphene and other 2D materials with silicon (Si) technologies. With an emphasis on graphene-silicon (Gr/Si) integrated devices in optoelectronics, this valuable resource also addresses emerging applications such as optoelectronic synaptic devices, optical modulators, and infrared image sensors. The book opens with an introduction to graphene for silicon optoelectronics, followed by chapters describing the growth, transfer, and physics of graphene/silicon junctions. Subsequent chapters each focus on a particular Gr/Si application, including high-performance photodetectors, solar energy harvesting devices, and hybrid waveguide devices. The book concludes by offering perspectives on the future challenges and prospects of Gr/Si optoelectronics, including the emergence of wafer-scale systems and neuromorphic optoelectronics. Illustrates the benefits of graphene-based electronics and hybrid device architectures that incorporate existing Si technology Covers all essential aspects of Gr/Si devices, including material synthesis, device fabrication, system integration, and related physics Summarizes current progress and future challenges of wafer-scale 2D-Si integrated optoelectronic devices Explores a wide range of Gr/Si devices, such as synaptic phototransistors, hybrid waveguide modulators, and graphene thermopile image sensors Graphene for Post-Moore Silicon Optoelectronics is essential reading for materials scientists, electronics engineers, and chemists in both academia and industry working with the next generation of Gr/Si devices.Table of ContentsCHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION OF GRAPHENE FOR SILICON OPTOELECTRONICS 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Optical Absorption 1.3 Emergence of Graphene in Silicon Optoelectronics 1.4 Photodetection in Graphene 1.4.1 Performance Metrics 1.4.2 Photovoltaic Effect 1.4.3 Photoemission in Graphene Schottky Junctions 1.4.4 Thermionic Emission in Graphene Based Interfaces 1.4.5 Hot Electron Based Photodetection 1.4.6 Infrared Modulators 1.4.7 Photovoltaic Devices 1.5 Challenges and Perspectives 1.6 References CHAPTER 2. GROWTH AND TRANSFER OF GRAPHENE 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Crystal Structure and Bonding 2.3 Growth of Graphene 2.4 Growth Dynamics and Choice of Substrate 2.4.1 Growth on Metallic Substrates 2.4.2 Direct Growth on Dielectric Substrates 2.4.3 Direct Growth on Semiconductor Substrates 2.4.4 CMOS Compatible Growth of Thin Films Over Graphene 2.5 Growth at Industrial Scale. 2.6 Growth of Macro Assembled Graphene 2.7 Inkjet Printing of Graphene 2.8 Graphene Transfer Methods 2.9 Graphene/Silicon Contact Fabrication 2.10 Graphene Transfer on Flexible Substrate 2.11 Challenges and Perspectives 2.12 References CHAPTER 3. PHYSICS OF GRAPHENE/SILICON JUNCTIONS 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Physics of Schottky Junction 3.3 Measurement of Schottky Barrier Height 3.3.1 Capacitance Voltage Measurement 3.3.2 Current Voltage Measurement 3.3.3 Photoelectric Measurement 3.3.4 Thermionic Emission Measurements. 3.4 2D Materials and Schottky Junctions 3.5 Graphene and Conventional Semiconductor Junctions. 3.6 Challenges and Perspectives 3.7 References CHAPTER 4. GRAPHENE/SILICON JUNCTION FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE PHOTODETECTORS 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Ultraviolet Photodetectors 4.3 Visible to Near Infrared Photodetectors. 4.4 Broadband Photodetectors 4.4.1 Nanostructured Materials for Photodetection 4.4.2 Applications of Nanomaterials for Graphene Silicon Integrated Photodetectors 4.5 Challenges and Perspectives 4.6 References CHAPTER 5. GRAPHENE/SILICON SOLAR ENERGY HARVESTING DEVICES 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Emergence of Graphene Silicon in Photovoltaics 5.3 Photovoltaic Mechanism in Graphene Silicon Solar Cells 5.4 Performance Parameters for Solar Cells 5.5 Theoretical Efficiency Limits of Graphene Silicon Solar Cells 5.6 Optimization of Graphene/Silicon Solar Cells 5.6.1 Doping of Graphene 5.6.2 Light Trapping in Silicon 5.6.3 Antireflection Coating 5.6.4 Interface Engineering 5.6.5 Surface Passivation 5.7 Challenges and Perspectives 5.8 References CHAPTER 6. GRAPHENE SILICON INTEGRATED WAVEGUIDE DEVICES 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Hybrid Waveguide Photodetector 6.3 Hybrid Waveguide Modulator 6.3.1 Electro Optical Modulator. 6.3.2 Thermo Optic Modulator 6.4 Challenges and Perspectives 6.5 References CHAPTER 7. GRAPHENE FOR SILICON IMAGE SENSOR 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Quantum Dot based Infrared Graphene Image Sensor 7.3 Graphene Thermopile Image Sensor 7.4 Graphene THz Image Sensor 7.5 Curved Image Sensor Array 7.6 Neural Network Image Sensors 7.7 Graphene Charge Coupled Device Image Sensor 7.8 Graphene Based Position Sensitive Detector 7.9 Challenges and Perspectives 7.10 References CHAPTER 8. SYSTEM INTEGRATION WITH GRAPHENE FOR SILICON OPTOELECTRONICS 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Graphene Silicon Flip Chips 8.3 Graphene Silicon Heterogeneous Integration 8.4 Graphene Silicon Monolithic Integration for Optoelectronics Applications 8.5 Challenges and Perspectives 8.6 References CHAPTER 9. GRAPHENE FOR SILICON OPTOELECTRONIC SYNAPTIC DEVICES 9.1. Introduction 9.2. Silicon Neurons 9.3. Synaptic devices 9.4. Silicon Optoelectronic Synaptic Devices 9.5. ORAM Synaptic Devices 9.6. Graphene for Silicon Synaptic Devices 9.7. Synaptic Phototransistor 9.8. Mechano-photonic Synaptic Transistor 9.9. Challenges and Perspectives CHAPTER 10 FUTURE TRENDS AND CHALLENGES Reference

Read more less

Book SynopsisHigh Temperature Polymer Dielectrics Overview on how to achieve polymer dielectrics at high temperatures, with emphasis on diverse applications in various electrical insulation fields High Temperature Polymer Dielectrics: Fundamentals and Applications in Power Equipment systematically describes the latest research progress surrounding high-temperature polymer dielectric (HTPD) materials and their applications in electrical insulation fields such as high-temperature energy storage capacitors, motors, packaging, printed circuit board, new energy power equipment, and aerospace electrical equipment. The comprehensive text provides a description of the market demand and theoretical research value of HTPDs in electrical equipment and enables readers to improve the performance and design of existing HTPD materials, and to develop efficient new high temperature polymer dielectric materials in general. Specific sample topics covered in High Temperature Polymer Dielectrics include: Thermal and electrical properties of high-temperature polymers, and the excellent thermal stability, mechanical properties, and long service life of polymer dielectrics Why fluorinated polymers are more thermally stable than their corresponding hydrogen-substituted polymers Static Thermomechanical Analysis (TMA), a technique for measuring the functional relationship between the deformation of the materials and the temperature and time under different actions Polyetheretherketone (PEEK), a semi-crystalline polymer material with ether bonds and ketone carbonyl groups in molecular chains Providing a complete overview of the state-of-the-art high temperature polymer dielectrics, with a focus on fundamental background and recent advances, High Temperature Polymer Dielectrics is an essential resource for materials scientists, electrical engineers, polymer chemists, physicists, and professionals working in the chemical industry as a whole.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Overview of High-Temperature Polymers 1Xue-Jie Liu, Mengyu Xiao, Wenjie Huang, Xing Yang, and Jun-Wei Zha 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Development of High-Temperature Polymers 2 1.3 Parameters of Polymers with High Temperature Resistance 3 1.4 Thermal Analysis Technology 5 1.5 High-Temperature Polymer Materials 9 1.6 Summary and Outlook 14 2 Basic Principles of Dielectrics 21Anastasios Chr. Patsidis and Georgios Chr. Psarras 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Definition of Dielectrics 21 2.3 Dipole Moment and Types of Dielectric Materials 22 2.4 Polarization and Dielectric Permittivity 23 2.5 Polarization Under Static Electric Field 24 2.6 Polarization Under Time Varying Electric Field 32 2.7 Conduction Phenomena in Dielectrics 38 2.8 Active Dielectrics 40 2.9 Polymers as Dielectric Materials 43 2.10 Thermal Properties of Dielectrics 47 2.11 Concluding Remarks 51 3 High-Temperature Energy Storage Polymer Dielectrics for Capacitors 57Zongliang Xie, He Li, Zongren Peng, and Yi Liu 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Basic Parameters of High-Temperature Capacitor Materials 60 3.3 Randomly Dispersed Polymer/Inorganic Nanofiller Composites 69 3.4 Core@Shell-Structured Nanofillers for Polymer Composites 76 3.5 Layered Polymer Composites 80 3.6 Novel Polymers and All-Organic Polymer Composites 85 3.7 Conclusion and Perspective 94 4 Review on High-Temperature Polymers for Cable Insulation: State-of-the-Art and Future Developments 103Youcef Kemari, Guillaume Belijar, Zarel Valdez-Nava, Frédéric Forget, and Sombel Diaham 4.1 Brief History of Cables Development and Insulating Materials 103 4.2 Technologies of Modern Power Cables 106 4.3 Review of the Most Relevant Electrical Characteristics of High Temperature Insulating Materials 125 4.4 Trends and Outlooks 140 5 High-Temperature Polymer-Based Dielectrics for Advanced Electronic Packaging 149Jie Liu, Peng Li, Jianwei Zhao, and Shuhui Yu 5.1 Introduction 149 5.2 High-Temperature Polymer and Polymer-Based Dielectrics 160 5.3 Summary and Perspectives 172 6 High-Temperature Polymer Dielectrics for Printed Circuit Board 181Xu Wang, Xinyu Chen, Junhui Luo, Xin Wang, Yan Chen, and Xiangyang Liu 6.1 Epoxy Resin Used for PCB 182 6.2 Phenolic Resins Used for PCB 188 6.3 Polyimide Used for PCB 197 6.4 Polymer Materials Used for PCB at High Frequency 206 7 High-Temperature Polymer Dielectrics for New Energy Power Equipment 227Meng Xiao, Zhiyuan Zhang, Yuyan Chen, Xiaodan Du, and Boxue Du 7.1 Introduction 227 7.2 High-frequency Power Transformer and Dry-type Bushing 228 7.3 Modification of Polyimide 233 7.4 High-temperature Resistant Dielectric Material for Capacitor 239 7.5 High-temperature Resistant Dielectric Material for IGBT 250 7.6 Concluding Remarks 256 8 High-Temperature Polymer Dielectrics for Aerospace Electrical Equipment 269Daomin Min, Xiaofan Song, Lingyu Yang, Yuanshuo Zhang, Shihang Wang, and Shengtao Li 8.1 Introduction 269 8.2 Challenges of Insulating Materials Under High Temperatures 272 8.3 High Temperature Resistant and Strong DC Insulating Polymer Dielectrics 280 8.4 High-temperature-Resistant Polymer Dielectrics with Strong Nonlinear Conductivity 288 8.5 High-Temperature-Resistant Polymer Dielectrics Under the Coupling of Electron Irradiation and High Voltage 295 8.6 High Temperature Resistant and High-Frequency Strong Insulating Polymer Dielectrics 300 9 Smart Polymer Dielectrics 313Xiaoyan Huang, Lu Han, Zhiwen Huang, and Qi Li 9.1 Introduction 313 9.2 Self-Adaptive Dielectrics 315 9.3 Self-Reporting Dielectrics 324 9.4 Self-Healing Dielectrics 336 9.5 Outlook 352 10 The Future Development of High-temperature Polymer Dielectrics 365Qi-Kun Feng, Yong-Xin Zhang, Xin-Jie Wang, and Zhi-Min Dang 10.1 Introduction 365 10.2 Present Development and Challenges 365 10.3 Future Perspectives and Trends 368 10.4 Summary 370 Acknowledgments 371 References 371 Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by one of the few top internationally recognized experts in the field, this book concentrates on those topics that will remain fundamental, such as low power computing, reversible programming languages, and applications in thermodynamics. It describes reversible computing from various points of view: Boolean algebra, group theory, logic circuits, low-power electronics, communication, software, quantum computing. It is this multidisciplinary approach that makes it unique. Backed by numerous examples, this is useful for all levels of the scientific and academic community, from undergraduates to established academics.Trade Review"It describes reversible computing from various points of view: Boolean algebra, group theory, logic circuits, low-power electronics, communication, software, quantum computing. It is this multidisciplinary approach that makes it unique." (Storage, 15 February 2011)Table of Contents1 Boolean algebra 2 Group theory 3 Reversible computing 4 Low-power computing 5 Analog computing 6 Computing modulo 2b 7 Quantum computing 8 Reversible programming languages APPENDICES A The number of linear reversible gates B Bounds for the q -factorial C A theorem about universal reversible gates D Optimal syntheses E A remarkable theorem from combinatorics F Micro and macro entropy

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis continuation and extension of the successful book "Localized Waves" by the same editors brings together leading researchers in non-diffractive waves to cover the most important results in their field and as such is the first to present the current state. The well-balanced presentation of theory and experiments guides readers through the background of different types of non-diffractive waves, their generation, propagation, and possible applications. The authors include a historical account of the development of the field, and cover different types of non-diffractive waves, including Airy waves and realistic, finite-energy solutions suitable for experimental realization. Apart from basic research, the concepts explained here have promising applications in a wide range of technologies, from wireless communication to acoustics and bio-medical imaging.Table of Contents1. An overview on nondiffracting wave theory and some recent developments (Erasmo Recami) 2. Localized Waves: Historical and Personal Perspectives (Richard W. Ziolkowski) 3. Optical Airy beams and bullets (Demetrios Christodoulides) 4. Applications of nondiffracting beams in trapping and microscopy (Kishan Dholakia) 5. X-type waves in ultrafast optics (Peeter Saari) 6. Limited-diffraction beams for high frame rate imaging (Jian-yu Lu) 7. Spatiotemporally localized null electromagnetic waves (Ioannis Besieris, Amr M. Shaarawi) 8. Linearly traveling and accelerating localized wave solutions to the Schrodinger equation (Ioannis Besieris, Amr M. Shaarawi, Richard W. Ziolkowski) 9. Rogue-wave-like statistics in formation of nonlinear X-waves (Gintaras Valiulis, Daniele Faccio, Audrius Dubietis) 10. Quantum X-waves with applications in nonlinear optics (Claudio Conti) 11. TE and TM localized beams (Pierre Hillion) 12. Quantum nondiffracting pulses: spatio-temporal localization of single photons (Martin Bock, Ruediger Grunwald) 13. Adaptive shaping of localized wavepackets for applications in ultrashort pulse diagnostics (Martin Bock, Susanta Kumar Das, Carsten Fischer, Michael Diehl, P. Boerner, Ruediger Grunwald) 14. Localized waves emanated by pulsed sources: the Riemann-Volterra approach (Andrei Utkin) 15. Propagation-invariant optical beams and pulses (Kimmo Saastamoinen, Ari Friberg, Jari Turunen) 16. Diffractionless nano-beams produced by multiple-waveguide metallic nanostructures (Matyas Mechler, Szergej Kukhlevsky) 17. Low-cost Radiation of Real-Time Localized Beams by X Wave-based Driving of Ultrasonic Arrays (Antonio Ramos, Luis Castellanos, Hector Calas) 18. Localized beams and localized pulses: Generation using the angular spectrum (Colin Sheppard) 19. Lossy light bullets (Miguel A. Porras) 20. Paraxial approximate and Bateman-type exact localized solutions (Aleksei Kiselev) 21. Super-resolving pupils (Anedio Ranfagni and Daniela Mugnai) 22. Experimental generation of Frozen Waves in Optics: Control of Longitudinal and Transverse Shape of Optical Nondiffracting Waves (Tarcio A. Vieira, Marcos R. Gesualdi, Michel Zamboni-Rached) 23. Airy Shaped Waves (C.Dartora, K.Z.Nobrega, Michel Zamboni-Rached) 24. Solitons and ultra-short optical waves (Nathan Kutz)

Read more less

Book SynopsisStarting from the basic principles of wetting, electrowetting and fluid dynamics all the way up to those engineering aspects relevant for the development of specific devices, this is a comprehensive introduction and overview of the theoretical and practical aspects. Written by two of the most knowledgeable experts in the field, the text covers both current as well as possible future applications, providing basic working principles of lab-on-a-chip devices and such optofluidic devices as adaptive lenses and optical switches. Furthermore, novel e-paper display technology, energy harvesting and supercapacitors as well as electrowetting in the nano-world are discussed. Finally, the book contains a series of exercises and questions for use in courses on microfluidics or electrowetting. With its all-encompassing scope, this book will equally serve the growing community of students and academic and industrial researchers as both an introduction and a standard reference.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction to Capillarity and Wetting Phenomena 1 1.1 Surface Tension and Surface Free Energy 2 1.1.1 The Microscopic Origin of Surface Energies 2 1.1.2 Macroscopic Definition of Surface Energy and Surface Tension 5 1.2 Young–Laplace Equation: The Basic Law of Capillarity 7 1.2.1 Laplace’s Equation and the Pressure Jump Across Liquid Surfaces 7 1.2.2 Applications of the Young–Laplace Equation: The Rayleigh–Plateau Instability 11 1.3 Young–Dupré Equation: The Basic Law of Wetting 13 1.3.1 To Spread or Not to Spread: From Solid Surface Tension to Liquid Spreading 13 1.3.2 Partial Wetting: The Young Equation 16 1.4 Wetting in the Presence of Gravity 19 1.4.1 Bond Number and Capillary Length 21 1.4.2 Case Studies 22 1.4.2.1 The Shape of a Liquid Puddle 22 1.4.2.2 The Pendant Drop Method: Measuring Surface Tension by Balancing Capillary and Gravity Forces 24 1.4.2.3 Capillary Rise 25 1.5 Variational Derivation of the Young–Laplace and the Young–Dupré Equation 26 1.6 Wetting at the Nanoscale 29 1.6.1 The Effective Interface Potential 30 1.6.2 Case Studies 32 1.6.2.1 The Effective Interface Potential for van der Waals Interaction 32 1.6.2.2 Equilibrium Surface Profile Near the Three-Phase Contact Line 34 1.7 Wetting of Heterogeneous Surfaces 35 1.7.1 Young–Laplace and Young–Dupré Equation for Heterogeneous Surfaces 35 1.7.2 Gibbs Criterion for Contact Line Pinning at Domain Boundaries 37 1.7.3 From Discrete Morphology Transitions to Contact Angle Hysteresis 38 1.7.4 Optimum Contact Angle on Heterogeneous Surfaces: The Laws of Wenzel and Cassie 43 1.7.5 Superhydrophobic Surfaces 45 1.7.6 Wetting of Heterogeneous Surfaces in Three Dimensions 48 1.7.7 Wetting of Complex Surfaces in Three Dimensions: Morphology Transitions, Instabilities, and Symmetry Breaking 50 1.A Mechanical Equilibrium and Stress Tensor 55 Problems 56 References 58 2 Electrostatics 61 2.1 Fundamental Laws of Electrostatics 61 2.1.1 Electric Fields and the Electrostatic Potential 61 2.1.2 Specific Examples 64 2.2 Materials in Electric Fields 66 2.2.1 Conductors 66 2.2.2 Dielectrics 68 2.2.3 Dielectric Liquids and Leaky Dielectrics 73 2.3 Electrostatic Energy 76 2.3.1 Energy of Charges, Conductors, and Electric Fields 76 2.3.2 Capacitance Coefficients and Capacitance 78 2.3.3 Thermodynamic Energy of Charged Systems: Constant Charge Versus Constant Potential 80 2.4 Electrostatic Stresses and Forces 82 2.4.1 Global Forces Acting on Rigid Bodies 82 2.4.2 Local Forces: The Maxwell Stress Tensor 83 2.4.3 Stress Boundary Condition at Interfaces 85 2.5 Two Generic Case Studies 87 2.5.1 Parallel Plate Capacitor 87 2.5.2 Charge and Energy Distribution for Two Capacitors in Series 90 Problems 92 References 93 3 Adsorption at Interfaces 95 3.1 Adsorption Equilibrium 96 3.1.1 General Principles 96 3.1.2 Langmuir Adsorption 96 3.1.3 Reduction of Surface Tension 99 3.2 Adsorption Kinetics 101 3.3 Surface-Active Solutes: From Surfactants to Polymers, Proteins, and Particles 105 3.A A StatisticalMechanics Model of Interfacial Adsorption 107 Problems 110 References 110 4 From Electric Double Layer Theory to Lippmann’s Electrocapillary Equation 113 4.1 Electrocapillarity: the Historic Origins 113 4.2 The Electric Double Layer at Solid–Electrolyte Interfaces 115 4.2.1 Poisson–Boltzmann Theory and Gouy–Chapman Model of the EDL 116 4.2.2 Total Charge and Capacitance of the Diffuse Layer 120 4.2.3 Voltage Dependence of the Free Energy: Electrowetting 122 4.3 Shortcomings of Poisson–Boltzmann Theory and the Gouy–Chapman Model 124 4.4 Teflon–Water Interfaces: a Case Study 125 4.A StatisticalMechanics Derivation of the Governing Equations 127 Problems 130 References 130 5 Principles of Modern Electrowetting 133 5.1 The Standard Model of Electrowetting (on Dielectric) 133 5.1.1 Electrowetting Phenomenology 133 5.1.2 Macroscopic EW Response 136 5.1.3 Microscopic Structure of the Contact Line Region 138 5.2 Interpretation of the StandardModel of EW 145 5.2.1 The Electromechanical Interpretation 145 5.2.2 StandardModel of EW Versus Lippmann’s Electrocapillarity 145 5.2.3 Limitations of the Standard Model: Nonlinearities and Contact Angle Saturation 149 5.3 DC Versus AC Electrowetting 151 5.3.1 General Principles 151 5.3.2 Application Example: Parallel Plate Geometry 153 Problems 156 References 157 6 Elements of Fluid Dynamics 159 6.1 Navier–Stokes Equations 159 6.1.1 General Principles: from Newton to Navier–Stokes 160 6.1.2 Boundary Conditions 163 6.1.3 Nondimensional Navier–Stokes Equation: The Reynolds Number 166 6.1.4 Example: Pressure-Driven Flow Between Two Parallel Plates 167 6.2 Lubrication Flows 170 6.2.1 General Lubrication Flows 170 6.2.2 Lubrication Flows with a Free Liquid Surface 173 6.2.3 Application I: Linear Stability Analysis of aThin Liquid Film 174 6.2.4 Application II: Entrainment of Liquid Films 176 6.3 Contact Line Dynamics 179 6.3.1 Tanner’s Law and the Spreading of Drops on Macroscopic Scales 179 6.3.2 Surface Profiles on the Mesoscopic Scale: The Cox–Voinov Law 181 6.3.3 Dynamics of the Microscopic Contact Angle: The Molecular Kinetic Picture 182 6.3.4 Comparison to Experimental Results 183 6.4 SurfaceWaves and Drop Oscillations 185 6.4.1 SurfaceWaves 187 6.4.2 Oscillating Drops 188 6.4.3 Example: Electrowetting-Driven Excitation of Eigenmodes of a Sessile Drop 192 6.4.4 General Consequences 193 Problems 194 References 196 7 Electrowetting Materials and Fabrication 197 7.1 Practical Requirements 197 7.2 Electrowetting Deviation: Caused by Non-obvious Materials Behavior 198 7.2.1 Commonly Observed Temporal Deviations 199 7.2.1.1 Dielectric Failure (Leakage Current) 199 7.2.1.2 Dielectric Charging 201 7.2.1.3 Charges into the Oil 202 7.2.1.4 Oil Relaxation 202 7.2.1.5 Surfactant Diffusion (Interface Absorption) 203 7.2.1.6 Oil Film Trapping 203 7.2.2 Commonly Observed Nontemporal Deviation 204 7.2.2.1 Unexpected Young’s Angles: Gravity Effects 204 7.2.2.2 Unexpected Young’s Angles: Surface and Interface Fouling 204 7.2.2.3 Unexpected Young’s Angles: Dielectric Charging 205 7.2.2.4 Wetting Hysteresis 205 7.2.3 Deviation That Is Often Both Highly Temporal and Nontemporal 206 7.2.3.1 Chemical/Surface Potentials 206 7.3 Electrowetting Saturation 207 7.4 The Invariant Onset of Deviation or Saturation and Lack of a Universal Theory for This Invariance 208 7.4.1 The Invariance of Saturation for Aqueous Conducting Fluids 208 7.4.2 The Invariance of the Onset of Deviation or Saturation for All Types of Conducting Fluids with 𝛾ci > 5 mNm−1 209 7.4.3 Summary 209 7.5 Choosing Materials: Large Young’s Angle and LowWetting Hysteresis 210 7.5.1 Conventional Ultralow Surface Energy Coatings (Fluoropolymers) 211 7.5.2 Hydrophilic Coatings Made HydrophobicThrough Proper Choice of Insulating Fluid 213 7.5.3 Superhydrophobic Coatings: Larger Young’s Angle in Air but Small Modulation Range 213 7.6 Choosing Materials: the Electrowetting Dielectric (Capacitor) 215 7.6.1 Current State of the Art for Low Potential Electrowetting:Multilayer Dielectrics 218 7.6.2 A Note of Critical Importance for the Topcoat in a Multilayer System 219 7.6.3 Carefully Choosing the Best Materials for Each Individual Layer of the Dielectric Stack 219 7.6.3.1 First Layer: Inorganic Dielectrics 219 7.6.3.2 Second Layer: Organic Dielectrics 220 7.6.3.3 Third Layer: Fluoropolymer 220 7.6.3.4 The Simplest Approaches Available to Electrowetting Practitioners 220 7.7 Choosing Materials: Insulating and Conducting Fluids 221 7.7.1 The Insulating Fluid 221 7.7.2 The Conducting Fluid 221 7.7.2.1 Ionic Content 222 7.7.2.2 Don’t UseWater! 223 7.8 Summary of General Best Practices 224 7.9 Mitigating Surface Fouling in Biological Applications 224 7.10 Additional Issues for Complex or Integrated Devices 226 Acknowledgement 227 7.A Trapped Charge Derivation 227 Problems 229 References 231 8 Fundamentals of Applied Electrowetting 235 8.1 Introduction and Scope 235 8.2 Droplet Transport 235 8.2.1 Basic Force Balance Interpretation of Droplet Transport 235 8.2.2 Advanced Droplet Transport Physics:Threshold and Velocity 237 8.2.2.1 Advanced Droplet Transport Physics: Flow Field 239 8.2.3 Additional Practical Notes on Implementation of Basic Droplet Transport 240 8.3 Droplet Transport for Splitting, Dosing, Merging, and Mixing 240 8.3.1 Simple Experimental Examples 241 8.3.2 Fundamentals of Droplet Splitting 241 8.3.2.1 Influence of Vertical Radii of Curvature 242 8.3.2.2 Influence of Horizontal Radii of Curvature 242 8.3.3 Fundamentals of Droplet Dosing (Dispensing) 243 8.3.4 Fundamentals of Droplet Mixing 244 8.4 Stationary Droplet Oscillation, Jumping, and Mixing 244 8.4.1 Droplet Oscillation 244 8.4.2 Droplet Oscillation and Jumping 245 8.4.3 Droplet Oscillation and Hysteresis 245 8.4.4 Droplet Oscillation and Mixing 246 8.5 Gating, Valving, and Pumping 247 8.5.1 Fundamentals 247 8.6 Generating Droplets and Channels 249 8.6.1 Fundamentals for Droplet Generation 249 8.6.2 Fundamentals for Channel Generation 250 8.7 Shape Change in a Channel 251 8.7.1 Fundamentals 251 8.8 Control of Meniscus Curvature 252 8.8.1 Fundamentals 252 8.8.2 Additional Notes on Implementation 253 8.9 Control of Meniscus Surface Area/Coverage 253 8.9.1 Fundamentals 253 8.9.2 Additional Notes on Implementation 254 8.10 Control of Film Breakup and Oil Entrapment 255 8.10.1 Fundamentals 255 8.11 1D, 2D, and 3D Control of Rigid Objects 257 8.11.1 Fundamentals 257 8.12 Reverse Electrowetting and Energy Harvesting 258 Problems 260 References 261 9 Related and Emerging Topics 265 9.1 Introduction and Scope 265 9.2 Dielectrophoresis and Dielectrowetting 265 9.2.1 Basic Dielectrophoresis 265 9.2.2 Dielectrowetting 267 9.3 Innovations in Liquid Metal Electrowetting and Electrocapillarity 269 9.3.1 Electrowetting of GaInSn Liquid Metal Alloys 269 9.3.2 Giant Electrochemical Changes in Liquid Metal Interfacial Surface Tensions 270 9.4 Nonequilibrium Electrical ControlWithout Contact Angle Modulation 271 9.4.1 Some Limitations of Conventional Electrowetting 271 9.4.2 ElectrowettingWithoutWetting 272 Problems 273 References 274 Appendix Historical Perspective of Modern Electrowetting: Individual Testimonials 277 Introduction and Scope 277 “CJ” Kim 277 Authors Note from Heikenfeld 278 Johan Feenstra 278 Tom Jones 279 FriederMugele 280 Richard Fair 281 Author’s Note from Heikenfeld 282 Bruno Berge 282 Glen McHale 285 Stein Kuiper 286 Jason Heikenfeld 288 Kwan Hyung Kang: An Appreciation by T. B. Jones 289 Author’s Note from Mugele 290 References 290 Index 293

Read more less

Book SynopsisPhysik der Halbleiterbauelemente Das Standardwerk zur Physik der Halbleiterbauelemente – erstmals auf Deutsch! Dieses einzigartige Buch, geschrieben von Pionieren auf dem Gebiet, behandelt sämtliche Aspekte der Physik der Halbleiterbauelemente, die zu deren Verständnis, Betrieb, Weiter- und Neuentwicklung notwendig sind. Wie das englische Original ist die deutsche Ausgabe ein äußerst nützliches Nachschlagewerk in der industrieorientierten Halbleiterforschung und eignet sich ebenfalls ausgezeichnet als Einstiegsliteratur für Studierende sowie als Unterrichtsmaterial für Vortragende. Bei der deutschen Ausgabe wurde besonderer Wert auf eine gute Lesbarkeit gelegt und daher die Übersetzung, teilweise unter Rückgriff auf die von den Autoren zitierten Originalquellen, so gestaltet, dass unnötige Anglizismen vermieden werden. Das englische Fachvokabular ist ergänzend an den entsprechenden Stellen im Text eingearbeitet, um den Leserinnen und Lesern den Gebrauch der englischsprachigen Fachliteratur zu erleichtern. Gelegentliche Anmerkungen im Text und Verweise auf weitere Originalquellen tragen zusätzlich zum besseren Verständnis der Materie bei. Als das Referenzwerk schlechthin ist der „Sze“ ein Muss für alle, die sich in Forschung, Entwicklung und Lehre mit Halbleiterbauelementen beschäftigen. Die Inhalte sind kompakt und präzise beschrieben und eignen sich perfekt für den Einstieg in das jeweilige Gebiet, komplettiert durch vertiefende Übungsbeispiele zu jedem Kapitel. Physik der Halbleiterbauelemente bietet eine unerreichte Detailfülle und ausführliche Informationen über die Physik und den Betrieb aller relevanten Halbleiterbauelemente, mit 1000 Literaturangaben, 650 technischen Illustrationen sowie 25 Tabellen mit Material- und Bauelementparametern. Aus dem Inhalt: Halbleiterphysik-Grundlagen p-n Übergänge Metall-Halbleiter-Kontakte MIS-Kondensatoren Bipolartransistoren MOSFETs Nichtflüchtige Speicher JFETs MESFETs und MODFETs Tunnel-Bauelemente IMPATT-Dioden TE- und RST-Devices Thyristoren und Leistungsbauelemente Photodetektoren und Solarzellen Sensoren Table of ContentsVorwort v Vorwort des Übersetzers vii Biografien xvii Einführung xix Teil I Halbleiterphysik 1 1 Physik und Eigenschaften von Halbleitern – ein Überblick 3 1.1 Einleitung 3 1.2 Kristallstrukturen 3 1.3 Energiebänder und Bandlücken 7 1.4 Ladungsträgerkonzentrationen im thermischen Gleichgewicht 11 1.5 Ladungsträgertransportphänomene 21 1.6 Phononen, optische und thermische Eigenschaften 41 1.7 Heteroübergänge und Nanostrukturen 47 1.8 Halbleitergrundgleichungen und Anwendungsbeispiele 54 Teil II Grundstrukturen der Halbleiter-Bauelemente 71 2 p-n-Übergänge 73 2.1 Einleitung 73 2.2 Raumladungszonen 73 2.3 Strom-Spannungs-Kennlinien 83 2.4 p-n-Übergänge im Durchbruchsbereich 95 2.5 Transientes Verhalten und Rauschen 107 2.6 Der p-n-Übergang als Bauelement 110 2.7 Heteroübergänge 117 3 Metall-Halbleiter-Kontakte 127 3.1 Einleitung 127 3.2 Entstehung der Schottky-Barriere 127 3.3 Transportprozesse 144 3.4 Bestimmung der Barrierenhöhe 162 3.5 Diodenstrukturen 171 3.6 Ohmsche Kontakte 177 4 Metall-Isolator-Halbleiter-Kondensatoren 187 4.1 Einleitung 187 4.2 Idealer MIS-Kondensator 187 4.3 Der Silizium-MOS-Kondensator 200 4.4 Ladungsträgertransport inMOS-Kondensatoren 224 Teil III Transistoren 243 5 Bipolartransistoren 245 5.1 Einleitung 245 5.2 Statische Eigenschaften 246 5.3 Kompaktmodelle von Bipolartransistoren 263 5.4 Mikrowelleneigenschaften 273 5.5 Leistungstransistoren und Logikschaltungen 285 5.6 Heterobipolartransistoren 290 5.7 Selbsterhitzungseffekte 296 6 MOSFETs 305 6.1 Einleitung 305 6.2 Grundlegende Bauteilcharakteristiken 309 6.3 Bauelemente mit inhomogener Dotierung und vergrabenem Kanal 335 6.4 Bauelementeskalierung und Kurzkanaleffekte 346 6.5 MOSFET-Strukturen 363 6.6 Schaltungsanwendungen 375 6.7 NCFET und TFET 380 6.8 Der Einzelelektronentransistor 385 7 Nicht flüchtige Speicher 405 7.1 Einleitung 405 7.2 Das Konzept des Floating-Gate 406 7.3 Speicherstrukturen 411 7.4 Kompaktmodelle von Floating-Gate-Speicherzellen 417 7.5 Mehrstufige Zellen und dreidimensionale Strukturen 420 7.6 Herausforderungen bei der Skalierung 432 7.7 Alternative Speicherstrukturen 437 8 JFETs, MESFETs und MODFETs 455 8.1 Einleitung 455 8.2 JFET und MESFET 456 8.3 MODFET 479 Teil IV Bauelementemit negativemWiderstand und Leistungsbauelemente 505 9 Tunnelbauelemente 507 9.1 Einleitung 507 9.2 Tunneldioden 508 9.3 Verwandte Tunnelbauelemente 522 9.4 Resonante Tunneldioden 540 10 IMPATT-Dioden, TE- und RST-Devices 553 10.1 Einleitung 553 10.2 IMPATT-Dioden 554 10.3 Transferred Electron Devices 582 10.4 Real-Space-Transfer Devices 602 11 Thyristoren und Leistungsbauelemente 615 11.1 Einleitung 615 11.2 Thyristorkennlinien 616 11.3 Thyristorvarianten 636 11.4 Andere Leistungsbauelemente 642 Teil V Photonische Bauelemente und Sensoren 661 12 LEDs und Laser 663 12.1 Einleitung 663 12.2 Strahlende Übergänge 664 12.3 Lichtemittierende Dioden (LEDs) 668 12.4 Laserphysik 682 12.5 Laserbetrieb 691 12.6 Spezielle Laser 708 13 Photodetektoren und Solarzellen 721 13.1 Einleitung 721 13.2 Photoleiter 725 13.3 Photodioden 728 13.4 Lawinenphotodioden 738 13.5 Phototransistoren 748 13.6 Charge-Coupled Devices (CCDs) 751 13.7 Metall-Halbleiter-Metall-Photodetektoren 764 13.8 Quantum-Well-Infrarotphotodetektoren (QWIPs) 767 13.9 Solarzellen 771 14 Sensoren 799 14.1 Einleitung 799 14.2 Thermische Sensoren 801 14.3 Mechanische Sensoren 807 14.4 Magnetische Sensoren 816 14.5 Chemische Sensoren 825 14.6 Biosensoren 830 Anhang A Liste der Symbole 839 Anhang B Internationales Einheitensystem 847 Anhang C Einheitenpräfixe 849 Anhang D Das griechische Alphabet 851 Anhang E Physikalische Konstanten 853 Anhang F Eigenschaften der wichtigsten Halbleiter 855 Anhang G Das Bloch-Theoremund die Energiebänder im reziproken Gitter 857 Anhang H Eigenschaften von Si und GaAs 859 Anhang I Die Boltzmann-Transportgleichung und das hydrodynamische Modell 861 Anhang J Eigenschaften von SiO2 und Si3N4 867 Anhang K Kompaktmodelle von Bipolartransistoren 869 Anhang L Die Entdeckung des Floating-Gate-Speicher-Effekts 877 Stichwortverzeichnis 879

Read more less

Book SynopsisHuman Centric Integrative Lighting Detailed presentation of the technical and non-technical aspects of modern lighting and its effect on humans Human Centric Integrative Lighting provides a highly comprehensive overview of the subject, also referred to as human-centered indoor lighting technology; taking a practice-oriented approach, scientific findings in the field are condensed into models that can be directly used by developers. Written by leading scientists in the field of lighting technology, Human Centric Integrative Lighting includes detailed information on: Fundamentals of lighting technology as it interacts with human perception and the current state of interior lighting today Basic principles of human centric integrative lighting and its various aspects, such as visual performance, color quality, emotional impact, and correlation of relevant parameters Comprehensive lighting quality models and subsequently derived recommendations for the practical implementation of concepts Relevant research findings from journals, patent specifications, and standards to provide a unified outlook on the field Providing a comprehensive overview of the current state of development in the field, Human Centric Integrative Lighting discusses validated physiological and psychological perceptual models on which manufacturers of lighting products and suppliers of lighting technology solutions can base key design and development decisions. lighting products; lighting technology solutions; lighting design; lighting development; human-centered indoor lighting technology; lighting color quality; lighting principles; lighting emotional impact; lighting quality; lighting researchTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgements xvii 1 Introduction and Motivations 1 1.1 Introduction: A Historical Review. Current Issues 1 References 5 2 Fundamentals of Lighting Technology – Basic Visual and Non-visual Aspects 7 2.1 The Human Visual System. Visual and Non-visual Signal Processing 7 2.2 Photometric and Colorimetric Quantities 12 2.2.1 Lighting Technology and Colorimetry 12 2.2.2 Colorimetry: CIE Tristimulus Values and CIE Chromaticity Diagram 13 2.2.3 Colour Appearance, Colour Matching, Colour Spaces, and Colour Difference Formulas 16 2.2.4 The CIECAM02 Colour Appearance Model 18 2.2.5 CAM02-UCS Colour Space 21 2.3 Basics of the Non-visual Aspects 21 2.3.1 Melatonin Suppression at Night 21 2.3.2 Modelling Melatonin Suppression at Night with the Circadian Stimulus (CS) and the Melanopic Action Factor 23 2.3.3 Spectral Sensitivity Functions According to the CIE 25 2.3.4 Correlations Among Circadian Stimulus CS, Melanopic Illuminance, and D65-Equivalent Illuminance 27 2.3.5 Recommendations of Necessary Melanopic EDI (mEDI) Levels for Optimum Sleep and Daytime Environments and Summary of this Chapter 28 References 29 3 Basic Principles of Human-Centric Lighting and Integrative Lighting 33 3.1 Basic Questions, General Aspects 33 3.2 Input Variables – A Systematic Approach 35 3.3 Brain Processing for the Formation of Subjective and Objective Behavioural Variables 38 3.3.1 Visual Processing Systems 38 3.3.1.1 Horizontal Cells of Bipolar Cell Layer 39 3.3.1.2 Ganglion Layer 40 3.3.1.3 The Visual Pathway 41 3.3.1.4 Overall Network Structure of the Visual System: An Overview 42 3.3.2 Processing Centres and Transmission Pathways for Non-visual Light Effects 43 3.3.2.1 Light Effects on Mood and Learning 46 3.3.2.2 General Light Effects on Cognition, Emotion, and Alertness 47 3.3.2.3 Wavelength Dependence of Brain Activities on Light Exposure 48 3.4 ‘Timing System’, Circadian Rhythm, and Sleep Behaviour 48 3.4.1 Questions 48 3.4.2 Timing System: Entrainment, Timing Role 49 3.4.3 PRC – Function, Phase Shift 50 3.4.4 Chronotypes, Sleep Behaviour 51 3.5 Output Variables of the Visual and Non-visual Brain Processing Apparatus: A Systematics 52 3.6 Basic Aspects of Human-Centric Lighting/Integrative Lighting 54 3.7 Tools and Methods for Determining the Subjectively and Objectively Measurable Lighting Effects 57 3.7.1 Questionnaires for Comprehensive Subjective Determination of Indoor Lighting Quality 57 3.7.2 Questionnaires on Sleep Behaviour, Sleepiness, and Alertness: The Subjective Basis 58 3.7.3 Objective Methods and Tools 59 References 60 3.a Appendix A 63 4 Visual Performance–Work Performance 67 4.1 Status of Standardisation for Interior Lighting Using the Example of Din En 12464 67 4.2 Visual Performance 71 4.2.1 Definition and Influencing Factors 71 4.2.2 Rea’s RVP Model, 1991 74 4.2.2.1 Experiments and Results from 1986 74 4.2.2.2 Experiments and Results from 1988 and Modelling from 1991 76 4.2.3 The Model of Kokoschka on the Data Basis of Weston 77 4.3 Work Performance 80 4.3.1 Assignment of Work Performance Aspects 80 4.3.2 Model for Stress Regulation Under Poor Lighting 82 4.3.3 Influence of Lighting Level on Mental Work 83 4.3.3.1 The Experiments of Boyce 84 4.3.3.2 The Experiments of Lindner 86 4.3.4 Influence of Lighting Levels on Work Performance in Industrial Workplaces 88 4.3.4.1 Literature Review Until 1971 88 4.3.4.2 Lindner’s Experiments in 1976 90 4.3.5 Summary of the Significance of the Visual Performance and Work Performance Results – Preliminary Consequences for Indoor Lighting 91 References 92 5 Modern Aspects of Brightness and Visual Clarity in the Context of Light Quality and Visual Performance 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Experimental Method of the Subjective Study 100 5.3 Modelling Brightness and Visual Clarity 102 5.4 Summary 107 References 108 6 Colour Quality and Psychophysical–Emotional Aspects, Laboratory Experiments 111 6.1 Introduction 111 6.2 Preferred Horizontal Illuminance Levels 112 6.3 Preferred Luminance Levels on the Wall for a Computer Monitor 114 6.3.1 Introduction 114 6.3.2 Experimental Method 115 6.3.2.1 Test Series 1: Determining the Most Comfortable Display Brightness at a Constant, Typical Wall Luminance 116 6.3.2.2 Test Series 2: Determining the Most Pleasant Luminance and Colour Temperature on the Wall with Constant Display Luminance 118 6.3.3 Evaluation of the Results 119 6.3.4 Summary 121 6.4 Preferred Colour Temperatures 122 6.4.1 Introduction 122 6.4.2 Experimental Method 123 6.4.3 Results and Discussion 127 6.5 Preferred Ranges of Colour Temperatures and Illuminances 129 6.5.1 The Nature of Illuminance and Colour Temperature 129 6.5.2 Illuminance and Colour Temperature in the Literature 130 6.5.3 Visual Experiments on the Combined Effect of Colour Temperature and Illuminance 132 6.5.4 Results: Combined Effect of Colour Temperature and Illuminance 134 6.5.5 Dependence of Preferred Colour Temperature and Illuminance on Age and Gender for Activation and Relaxation 135 6.6 Preferred White Chromaticities 137 6.6.1 Introduction 137 6.6.2 Experimental Method 139 6.6.3 Results 139 6.7 Colour Quality 140 6.7.1 Perceptual Aspects of Colour Quality 141 6.7.1.1 Naturalness, Colour Fidelity (Colour Rendering) 141 6.7.1.2 Vividness 143 6.7.1.3 Chromatic Lightness (Brilliance) 143 6.7.1.4 Colour Preference 144 6.7.1.5 Memory Colours 144 6.7.2 Modelling Colour Preference, Naturalness, and Vividness 146 6.7.2.1 Modelling of Colour Preference, Naturalness, and Vividness at 750 lx 146 6.7.2.2 Modelling Colour Preference at 2000 lx. Comparison of Colour Preference Between 750 and 2000 lx 149 6.7.3 Consideration of Red Object Colours in the Colour Preference Model 150 6.8 Colour Preference for Skin Tone Lighting 153 6.8.1 Introduction 153 6.8.2 Method of the Colour Preference Experiment for Skin Tone Illumination 154 6.8.2.1 Spectral Measurement of Skin Tones 154 6.8.2.2 Characterisation of the Light Sources Used 156 6.8.3 Results of Subjective Scaling of Colour Preference for Skin Tone. Optimal Saturation Levels 159 6.9 Colour-Rendering Indices and Their Semantic Interpretation 162 6.9.1 Introduction 162 6.9.2 Methodology of the Experiment on the Semantic Interpretation of the Colour-Rendering Indices 162 6.9.3 Results of the Experiment on the Semantic Interpretation of the Colour-Rendering Indices 164 6.10 Summary: Preliminary Consequences for Indoor Lighting 166 References 166 7 New Light-Quality Models from Laboratory Experiments and their Validation in Field Trials 171 7.1 Introduction 171 7.2 Input and Output Parameters of the Light-Quality Models 173 7.2.1 Input Parameters 173 7.2.2 Output Parameters 173 7.3 Experimental Set-Ups for the Light-Quality Models 174 7.4 Equations of the Light-Quality Models 178 7.4.1 Brightness 178 7.4.2 Visual Clarity (VC) 179 7.4.3 Colour Preference (CP) 180 7.4.4 Scene Preference (SP) 183 7.5 Modelling with the Circadian Stimulus (CS) 184 7.5.1 Calculation Method 186 7.5.2 Brightness 186 7.5.3 Visual Clarity (VC) 187 7.5.4 Colour Preference (CP) 187 7.5.5 Scene Preference (SP) 188 7.5.6 Visualisation of the VC, CP, and SP Models in Contour Diagrams 188 7.6 Validation of the Light-Quality Models (in Section 7.4) in Three Museums in Japan 191 7.7 Summary 192 References 194 8 Correlation Analysis of HCL Parameters and Consequences for the Measurement Methods of Non-visual Effects 197 8.1 General Consideration of the Correlation of the Parameters for Visual Performance, Colour Quality, and Non-visual Effects 197 8.1.1 Introduction 197 8.1.2 Evaluation of the Colour-Rendering Indices 202 8.1.3 Assessments of the Brightness Parameters 203 8.1.4 Melanopic Effect and Colour Rendering 205 8.1.5 Correlation Between Further Parameters of Visual Performance, Colour Quality, and Non-visual Effects 206 8.2 Structure and Categories of the Input Parameters of the HCL System 210 References 214 9 Psychophysical–Emotional Aspects – Visual Comfort and Non-visual Effects 217 9.1 Psychological–Emotional Aspects of the Effect of Light 217 9.1.1 Introduction 217 9.1.2 Psychological Effect of the Variable Lighting Situations, Spatial Effects 220 9.1.2.1 Field Trial 221 9.1.2.2 Laboratory Experiment 223 9.2 Space Impression, Space Brightness, and Visual Field Luminance 227 9.3 Visual Comfort: Flicker and Stroboscopic Effects 229 9.3.1 Pulse Width Modulation and Constant Current Control 229 9.3.1.1 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) 229 9.3.1.2 Constant Current Regulation (CCR) 230 9.3.2 Flicker and Stroboscopic Effects 230 9.3.3 State of Research 231 9.3.4 Investigation 233 9.3.4.1 Settings 233 9.3.4.2 Parameters Investigated 234 9.3.4.3 Experimental Procedure 235 9.3.5 Results 236 9.3.5.1 Mean Subjective Values 237 9.3.6 Conclusion 240 9.4 Non-visual Light Effects During the Night Hours 240 9.4.1 Introduction 241 9.4.2 Light Effects in Night Hours with Polychromatic White Light 242 9.4.2.1 Results 243 9.4.3 Light Effects in Nocturnal Hours with Quasi-monochromatic Light 246 9.4.4 Formation of a Metric to Characterise Time-Dependent Melatonin Suppression 249 9.4.5 Determining the Potential Causes of Melatonin Suppression in Nocturnal Hours 253 9.4.6 Lighting Aspects for Shift Work 254 9.5 Psychological and Health Aspects of Daylight 261 9.5.1 Psychological Aspects 261 9.5.2 Health Aspects of Daylight 263 9.5.3 Quantitative Characteristics of Daylight and Electric Light – A Comparison 265 9.6 Influences of Light Intensity and Timing of Light Exposure on Sleep Behaviour 271 9.7 Light Effects on Alertness – Literature Analysis of Various Publications 275 9.7.1 Alertness in the Evening and Night Hours 275 9.7.2 Alertness in the Daytime 276 9.8 Results of the Effect of Light on Alertness and Sleepiness During the Early Shift in an Industrial Company 281 9.8.1 Results of the Data Evaluation 283 9.8.2 Summary and Discussion 284 References 284 10 Practical HCL Light Measurement Technology Indoors and Outdoors 291 10.1 Introduction 291 10.2 Hypotheses and Questions for HCL Light Measurement Technology 293 10.3 Light Measurement Aspects 296 10.3.1 Size of the Viewing Field 296 10.3.2 Current Definitions of Circadian-Effective Irradiance 297 10.3.2.1 DIN Evaluation Procedure 298 10.3.2.2 Procedure according to M. Rea and Figuiero 300 10.3.2.3 Use of the Definitions for the Metrics MDER and MEDI according to CIE, Which Have Been Described in Chapter 2 (Section 2.2.3) of this Book 302 10.3.3 Calculation of the Circadian Stimulus CS from Vertical Illuminance and Chromaticity Coordinate z 302 10.3.4 Computation of the Circadian Stimulus CS from Vertical Illuminance and Correlated Colour Temperature CCT 305 10.4 Circadian-Effective Irradiation Outdoors and Indoors by Integral Field Measurements 307 10.4.1 Field Measurements in Winter 309 10.4.2 Field Measurements on a Summer Day 310 10.4.3 Field Measurements on the Evening of an Autumn Day 312 10.5 Daylight Measurement–Spectral Measurement and Practical Approaches 314 10.5.1 Spectral Measurement of Daylight Spectra 314 10.6 HCL – Light Measurements at Office Workplaces 320 10.6.1 Measured Variables and Measurement Technology 320 10.6.2 Measurement Set-Up 321 10.6.3 The Rooms in which the Measurement Took Place 322 10.6.4 Measurement Results at Different Office Workplaces 324 10.7 Calculation of the Metrics MDER and MEDI from Vertical Illuminance and Chromaticity Coordinate z 326 10.7.1 Definition of MDER and MEDI According to CIE-Publication 326 10.7.2 Mathematical Transformation for Calculation of MEDI and MDER 328 References 331 11 Technological Aspects of Human Centric Lighting in Buildings 335 11.1 Introduction to the Topic ‘Smart Lighting’ 335 11.2 Technical Principles of Smart Lighting 340 11.3 Cloud Software Structure and Use Cases 349 11.4 Light Control and Spectral Optimisation for High-Quality and Healthy Light 353 11.4.1 Stages of the Realisation Possibilities of the Luminaires for HCL Lighting Technology 353 11.4.2 Levels 1 and 2 with Constant Colour Temperature 353 11.4.2.1 Basic Data of Circadian Effectiveness 353 11.4.2.2 Previous Technologies for Generating White LED Light 355 11.4.2.3 Newer Technologies for the Generation of White LED Light with Only One Colour Temperature 356 11.4.3 Levels 3 and 4 (Figure 11.17) with Variable Colour Temperature and Variable Illuminance 361 11.4.4 Level 5 (Figure 11.17) with Variable Colour Temperature, Variable Illuminance, and High Colour Quality 364 11.4.5 Level 6 with Variable Colour Temperature, Variable Illuminance, and Daylight Consideration 365 11.4.5.1 Introduction 365 11.4.5.2 Variation of Daylight and Consequences for Indoor Lighting – Result of a Measurement 366 11.4.5.3 Approaches to Considering Daylight Components in Interior Space 368 11.5 Measurement of Melanopic-Equivalent Daylight Illuminance (MEDI) with RGB Colour Sensors 372 11.5.1 Introduction Into the Context 372 11.5.2 RGB Colour Sensors: Characterisation and Signal Transformation 372 11.5.2.1 Characterisation of RGB Colour Sensors 372 11.5.3 Method of Signal Transformation from RGB to XYZ 376 11.5.4 Matrix Transformation in Practice, Verification with an Actual RGB Colour Sensor 377 11.5.5 Measurement of the Non-visual Quantities MEDI and MDER 378 11.5.6 Summary 382 References 384 12 HCL-Oriented Lighting Design: Basic Aspects and Implementation 387 12.1 Classification of HCL-Oriented Lighting Quality Concepts 387 12.1.1 Conceptions and Thought Processes on Lighting Quality Until 2002 387 12.1.1.1 Flynn et al. 388 12.1.1.2 Rowlands and Loe 389 12.1.1.3 Veitch and Newsham 389 12.1.2 Literature Analysis and New Thoughts on Lighting Quality 393 12.1.3 Summary of the Concepts on HCL and Lighting Quality – A Draft Overall Concept 396 12.2 Lighting Design: The Process and the Influencing Factors to Achieve Lighting Quality 397 12.2.1 Goals and Classification of HCL-Oriented Lighting Design 397 12.2.2 Process Steps of HCL-Oriented Lighting Design 399 12.3 Daylight and Daylight Planning 404 12.3.1 Introduction 404 12.3.2 Daylight from a Lighting Design Perspective – Daylight Design in the Context of Standardisation 405 12.3.3 Daylight Planning for Non-visual Effects 407 12.3.4 Some Data on Daylighting Effects 408 12.4 Specification of HCL Lighting Systems for Daytime – Draft Recommendation 409 12.4.1 Introduction 409 12.4.2 Illumination Level, Circadian-Effective Illuminance Levels 410 12.5 Dynamic Lighting, Control Curves 418 12.6 Lighting for Users with Higher Lighting Requirements 425 12.6.1 Vision in Old Age – Some Aspects 426 12.6.2 Lighting for Elderly People’s Homes and People Suffering from Dementia 431 12.6.3 Proposal for Lighting Design for Elderly People’s Homes and Nursing Homes 433 References 436 13 Numerical Relationship Between Non-visual Metrics and Brightness Metrics – Consequences for the Evaluation of HCL Systems and Facilities 443 13.1 Introduction 443 13.2 Brightness Perception and Modelling 445 13.3 Circadian Stimulus Models CS 2018 and CS 2021 446 13.3.1 The Circadian Stimulus (CS) Models 2005 and 2018 447 13.3.2 The Circadian Stimulus Model 2021 448 13.4 The Formula of Giménez et al. for Nocturnal Melatonin Suppression 450 13.5 Numerical Analysis of the Relationship Between Brightness and Non-visual Metrics 451 13.5.1 Introduction 451 13.5.2 Method of Correlation Analysis 452 13.5.3 Relation Between the Linear Brightness Metrics and the Non-visual-Effect Parameters 452 13.5.4 Relation Between Non-linear Brightness Metrics and Non-visual-Effect Parameters 455 References 457 14 Summary and Outlook 459 14.1 Summary 459 14.2 Outlook 463 Index 465

Read more less

Book SynopsisArbeiten auch Sie nach DevOps-Prinzipien? Sollen oder wollen Sie umstellen? Was ist wichtig? Worauf kommt es an? Das Ziel von DevOps ist, dass Softwareentwicklung und IT-Auslieferung Hand in Hand arbeiten. Das ermöglicht schnellere Release-Zyklen und schont die Ressourcen. Wie das im Einzelnen geht, zeigt dieses Buch. Es stellt eine Roadmap für die Umstellung zur Verfügung, nennt notwendige Management- und Technologie-Entscheidungen und -Tools und scheut auch nicht davor zurück, notwendige Unternehmenskulturänderungen zu benennen, damit der Sprung ins DevOps-Gewässer gelingt.Table of ContentsÜber die Autorin 9 Vorwort 11 Einleitung 25 Über dieses Buch 25 Törichte Annahmen über den Leser 25 Symbole in diesem Buch 26 Wie geht es weiter? 26 Teil I: DevOps entmystifizieren 27 Kapitel 1 Einführung in DevOps 29 Was ist DevOps? 29 DevOps hat sich aus Agile entwickelt 30 DevOps stellt Menschen in den Mittelpunkt 30 Unternehmenskultur ist die Grundlage von DevOps 30 Sie lernen, indem Sie den Prozess überwachen und Daten sammeln 31 Überzeugungskraft ist der Schlüssel zur Umsetzung von DevOps 31 Kleine, inkrementelle Änderungen sind unbezahlbar 32 Von DevOps profitieren 32 Das CALMS-Modell 33 Das Problem der Interessenskonflikte lösen 35 Kapitel 2 Gestalten Sie Ihre Organisation 37 Die Gesundheit Ihrer Unternehmenskultur bewerten 38 DevOps integrieren 39 Die DevOps-Werte im Einzelnen 40 Teamwork fördern 40 Silos reduzieren 41 Denken Sie systemorientiert 41 Fehlschläge akzeptieren 41 Kommunizieren, kommunizieren, kommunizieren 42 Rückmeldungen entgegennehmen 42 Abläufe automatisieren (falls sinnvoll) 43 Die Unternehmenskultur formen 43 Die schlimmsten Fehler der Technologiekultur vermeiden 45 Eine Vision entwerfen 46 Auf ein gemeinsames Ziel hinarbeiten 47 Beurteilungen 48 Prämien 49 Kapitel 3 Überflüssiges erkennen 51 Die sieben Arten von Verschwendung 52 Unnötige Abläufe 52 Wartezeiten 52 Bewegung 53 Kosten für Fehler 53 Überproduktion 53 Transport 53 Lagerbestand 54 Verschwendung in DevOps verstehen 54 Verschwendung vermeiden 56 Flaschenhälse erkennen 56 Auf die Auswirkungen konzentrieren 59 Kapitel 4 Die Kollegen überzeugen, es mit DevOps zu probieren 61 Angst vor Veränderungen 61 Die Leute um Sie herum vom Wechsel zu DevOps überzeugen 63 Unterstützung von Führungskräften erhalten 65 Eine Dünung im Entwicklungsteam aufbauen 66 Die mittleren Manager managen 67 Die Sturköpfe überzeugen 68 Die Adaptionskurve verstehen 69 Den Wandel vorantreiben 71 Auf Gegenwind reagieren 72 Den Abgrund überqueren 72 Fragen Sie »warum« 73 Kapitel 5 Ihr Unternehmen beurteilen 75 DevOps quantifizieren 77 Menschen 77 Abläufe 78 Technologie 79 Die Daten erheben 80 Interne Fallstudien entwickeln 80 Eine qualitative Fallstudie: Konzentrieren Sie sich auf Ihre Mitarbeiter 81 Eine quantitative Fallstudie: Konzentrieren Sie sich auf Deployments 83 Teil II: Eine Pipeline einrichten 85 Kapitel 6 Den neuen Entwicklungslebenszyklus übernehmen 87 Alle an einen Tisch bitten 87 Prozesse umwandeln: Von der Linie zum Kreis 88 Administrative Aufgaben »nach links« schieben: über Infrastruktur nachdenken 92 Auch Deployments nach links verschieben 93 Simulation der Produktion durch Staging 93 Kapitel 7 Vorausplanen 95 Über das Agile-Modell hinausgehen 95 Herausforderungen vorhersehen 97 Herausforderungen und Einschränkungen bei Projekten identifizieren 98 Zeitplan 98 Budget 99 Anforderungen bestimmen 99 Ein MVP entwickeln 100 Herausfinden, welches Problem Ihr MVP lösen muss 101 Herausfinden, wer Ihre Kunden sind 102 Die Konkurrenz unter die Lupe nehmen 102 Funktionen priorisieren 103 Die Benutzererfahrung gestalten 104 Ihre Hypothese überprüfen 105 Beta-Release, ja oder nein? 106 Personas entwerfen, um Ihre Kunden besser kennenzulernen 106 Was ist eine Persona? 107 Eine Persona ausarbeiten 107 Kapitel 8 Aus der DevOps-Perspektive designen 109 Ihr Design konstruieren 110 Für DevOps gestalten 112 Softwareentwicklung für den Wandel 112 Software kontinuierlich verbessern 113 Ihre Software dokumentieren 114 Codearchitektur für die sechs Leistungsmerkmale von DevOps 115 Wartungsfreundlichkeit 116 Skalierbarkeit 116 Sicherheit 118 Benutzerfreundlichkeit 119 Zuverlässigkeit 120 Flexibilität 120 Designentscheidungen dokumentieren 121 Fallstricke bei der Architektur vermeiden 122 Kapitel 9 Code entwickeln 125 Kommunikation rund um den Code 125 Für den Fehlerfall entwickeln 128 Wartungsfreundlichen Code schreiben 128 Code testen 129 Code debuggen 129 Code protokollieren 130 Unveränderbaren Code schreiben 130 Lesbaren Code erstellen 131 Programmiermuster 131 Objektorientierte Programmierung 131 Funktionale Programmierung 132 Eine Programmiersprache wählen 132 Anti-Patterns vermeiden 133 Nach DevOps-Prinzipien entwickeln 134 Sauberen Code schreiben 135 Das Geschäft verstehen 135 Anderen zuhören 135 Die richtigen Schwerpunkte setzen 136 Die Komfortzone verlassen 136 Gute Vorgehensweisen etablieren 137 Ordnung im Quellcode halten 137 Tests schreiben 137 Features dokumentieren 138 Legen Sie den Kollegen Ihren Code zur Kontrolle vor 139 Kapitel 10 Tests vor der Veröffentlichung 141 Warum Tests? 141 Automatisierte Tests sind nicht optional 142 Testen in verschiedenen Umgebungen 143 Lokale Umgebung 144 Entwicklungsumgebung 144 Testumgebung 145 Staging-Umgebung 146 Produktionsumgebung 146 Über den Komponententest hinaus 147 Komponententests: Es lebt! 147 Integrationstests: Spielen alle Teile zusammen? 148 Regressionstests: Verhält sich der Code nach Änderungen noch genauso? 148 Visuelle Tests: Sieht alles noch genauso aus? 148 Performance-Tests 149 Kontinuierliches Testen 149 Kapitel 11 Ein Produkt deployen 151 Code freigeben 151 Kontinuierliche Integration und Auslieferung 152 Von CI/CD profitieren 152 CI/CD implementieren 153 Kontinuierliche Integration 153 Kontinuierliche Bereitstellung 154 Kontinuierliches Deployment 154 Deployments managen 155 Richtig automatisieren 155 Versionierung 156 Fehler abmildern 158 Rollbacks 158 Flucht nach vorne 159 Deployments demokratisieren 159 Einen Deployment-Stil wählen 160 Blue-Green-Deployment 160 Schrödingers Kanarienvogel: Der Deploy ist tot (oder doch nicht?) 162 Rolling Release 163 Feature-Flags 165 Ihre Systeme überwachen 165 Telemetrie verstehen 166 Verhalten aufzeichnen 166 SLAs, SLIs und SLOs 167 Teil III: Den Kreis schließen 169 Kapitel 12 Rapid Iteration implementieren 171 Wichtige Aufgaben zuerst 172 Wichtig und dringend 173 Wichtig, nicht dringend 173 Dringend, nicht wichtig 175 Weder wichtig noch dringend 176 Schneller werden 177 Die Performance verbessern 180 Unvollkommenheit akzeptieren 181 Kleine Teams gestalten 181 Ihre Arbeit nachverfolgen 182 Reibung verringern 183 Warnmeldungen menschlicher gestalten 183 Kapitel 13 Feedback-Schleifen rund um den Kunden einrichten 185 Einen Kundenrückmeldungsprozess erstellen 186 Eine Feedback-Schleife erstellen 187 Empfangen 187 Analysieren 188 Kommunizieren 188 Verändern 189 Feedback sammeln 190 Umfragen zur Zufriedenheit 190 Fallstudien 191 Dogfooding: Selbstanwendung 191 Um kontinuierliche Rückmeldung bitten 193 Promotorenüberhang: Net Promoter Score (NPS) 194 Einen Rhythmus finden 194 Kapitel 14 DevOps-Teams zusammenstellen 197 DevOps-Teams formen 197 So funktionieren funktionale Teams 198 Ein spezielles DevOps-Team bereitstellen 199 Funktionsübergreifende Produktteams bilden 200 Schnell zum Vorstellungsgespräch (aber nicht zu schnell) 202 Eine Stellenbezeichnung wählen 203 Die Personalbeschaffung endet nie 205 Die richtigen Leute finden 206 Hervorragende Kandidaten weiterreichen 206 Technische Fähigkeiten bewerten 207 Überarbeitetes Whiteboarding 207 Hausaufgaben 208 Code-Reviews 209 Schnell feuern 209 Das Ekel 210 Der Märtyrer 211 Der Underperformer 211 Kapitel 15 Eigenverantwortung für die Entwickler 213 Entwicklungsteams mit DevOps skalieren 213 Drei Phasen eines Unternehmens 214 Start-up 215 Etabliertes Start-up oder mittelständisches Unternehmen 215 Großunternehmen 216 Die Mühen der Ebene 218 Die Motivation ergründen 219 Motivation für Entwickler 220 Abhängigkeit von extrinsischen Belohnungen vermeiden 220 Autonomie 221 Meisterschaft 221 Sinnhaftigkeit 222 Arbeit zum Vergnügen machen 222 Den Leuten die Möglichkeit geben, ihre Teams auszuwählen 223 Motivation messen 223 Teil IV: Kaizen: die Kunst der kontinuierlichen Verbesserung 225 Kapitel 16 Erfolgreich mit Fehlschlägen umgehen 227 Schnelles Scheitern im Tech-Bereich 227 Sicheres Scheitern 228 Fehlerausbreitung einschränken 228 Menschliches Versagen akzeptieren – und keine Schuldzuweisungen! 229 Gut scheitern 230 Wachstumsmentalität 230 Die Freiheit zum Scheitern schaffen 231 Kapitel 17 Auf Zwischenfälle vorbereitet sein 235 Mit Automatisierung gegen »menschliches Versagen« ankämpfen 236 Fokussierung auf Systeme: realistische Automatisierung 237 Mit Automatisierungstools Probleme bei der Codeintegration vermeiden 238 Deployments und Infrastruktur managen 240 Overengineering eingrenzen 240 Bereitschaftsdienste menschlicher gestalten 242 Wenn Bereitschaftsdienste unmenschlich werden 242 Humane Erwartungen an den Bereitschaftsdienst 243 Notfallmanagement 245 Beständigkeit zum Ziel machen 246 Standardverfahren einführen 247 Ein realistisches Budget ansetzen 248 Reaktion auf Vorfälle vereinfachen 248 Auf eine ungeplante Unterbrechung reagieren 249 Fortschritt empirisch messen 253 MTTR: Mean Time to Repair 253 MTBF: Mean Time between Failures 254 CPI: Cost per Incident 254 Kapitel 18 Vorfälle nachträglich untersuchen 255 Über die Analyse der Grundursache hinaus 255 Die einzelnen Phasen eines Vorfalls durchgehen 257 Vorfälle erfolgreich nachbereiten 258 Das Treffen sofort anberaumen 258 Alle miteinbeziehen 258 Schuldzuweisungen vermeiden 258 Den zeitlichen Ablauf betrachten 259 Schwierige Fragen stellen 260 Im Nachhinein sind Sie immer schlauer 261 Gesprächsprotokolle anfertigen 262 Einen Plan erstellen 262 Teil V: Werkzeuge für Ihre DevOps-Praxis 263 Kapitel 19 Neue Tools 265 Integration von Open-Source-Software 265 Open Computing als Innovationstreiber 266 Open-Source-Lizenzierung 267 Entscheidung für Open Source 268 Auf neue Sprachen umstellen 270 Compiler- und Interpretersprachen 270 Parallelisierung und Multithreading 271 Funktionale Programmierung 272 Speicherverwaltung 273 Sprachen sinnvoll auswählen 273 Kapitel 20 Verteilte Systeme 277 Monolithen und Microservices 278 Zuerst eine monolithische Architektur wählen 279 Umstieg auf Microservices 280 Großartige APIs entwickeln 281 Was ist eine API? 282 Auf einheitliches Design achten 282 Container: Viel mehr als virtuelle Maschinen 285 Container und Images verstehen 286 Microservices in Containern deployen 286 Orchestrierer vergleichen: Die Harmonisierung des Schwarms 288 Container konfigurieren 290 Container überwachen: Halten Sie sie am Leben, bis Sie sie töten 291 Container absichern: Diese Kisten brauchen ein Schloss 292 Kapitel 21 Migration in die Cloud 295 DevOps in der Cloud 295 Ihre DevOps-Kultur in die Cloud bringen 296 Lernen durch Übernahme 296 Von Cloud-Diensten profitieren 297 Arten von Clouds 298 Public Cloud 298 Private Cloud 299 Hybrid Cloud 299 Cloud as a Service 299 Infrastructure as a Service 300 Platform as a Service 300 Software as a Service 301 Den besten Cloud-Anbieter wählen 301 Amazon Web Services (AWS) 302 Microsoft Azure 302 Google Cloud Platform (GCP) 303 Tools und Services in der Cloud finden 303 Teil VI: Der Top-Ten-Teil 307 Kapitel 22 (Mehr als) 10 wichtige Gründe für DevOps 309 Beständigen Wandel akzeptieren 309 Die Cloud nutzen 310 Die Besten einstellen 310 Wettbewerbsfähig bleiben 311 Menschliche Probleme lösen 311 Mitarbeiter fordern 312 Brücken schlagen 312 Gut scheitern 312 Kontinuierliche Verbesserung 313 Mühsame Arbeiten automatisieren 314 Auslieferung beschleunigen 314 Kapitel 23 Die zehn größten DevOps-Fallstricke 315 Kultur vernachlässigen 315 Nicht alle mitnehmen 316 Anreize schlecht aufeinander abstimmen 316 Stillschweigen 317 Vergessen zu messen 318 Micromanaging 318 Zu schnell zu viel verändern 319 Schlechte Werkzeugauswahl 319 Angst vor Misserfolgen 320 Zu hart sein 320 Stichwortverzeichnis 323

Read more less

Book SynopsisFür den Erfolg von Softwareprojekten ist es entscheidend, sich erstmal klar zu machen, wozu das System überhaupt dienen soll und wie es dafür beschaffen sein muss. Klingt eigentlich selbstverständlich, und doch scheitern Projekte oft gerade an der Anforderungsanalyse. Das Buch "Requirements Engineering für Dummies" beschreibt verständlich und pragmatisch, wie Sie vorgehen sollten - und zwar sowohl für klassische als auch für agile Projekte. Es liefert Ihnen Techniken, wie Sie Ziele bestimmen und Releases sinnvoll zusammenstellen, wie Sie Anforderungen erheben und verstehen, wie Sie mit Änderungen umgehen und wie Sie Fallstricke vermeiden. Das Buch ist auch geeignet zur Vorbereitung auf die CPRE-FL-Prüfung.Table of ContentsÜber den Autor 13 Einleitung 25 Über dieses Buch 25 Konventionen in diesem Buch 26 Was Sie nicht lesen müssen 26 Törichte Annahmen über die Leser 26 Wie dieses Buch aufgebaut ist 26 Teil I: Requirements Engineering verstehen 27 Teil II: Vorgehen im Requirements Engineering 27 Teil III: Anforderungsanalyse 27 Teil IV: Requirements Management 27 Teil V: Der Top-Ten-Teil 27 Symbole, die in diesem Buch verwendet werden 27 Wie es weitergeht 28 Teil I: Requirements Engineering verstehen 29 Kapitel 1 Das ist Requirements Engineering 31 Warum uns Requirements Engineering weiterhelfen kann 31 Aufgaben im Requirements Engineering 34 Wer das Requirements Engineering macht 36 Der Requirements Engineer 37 Wer sonst noch das Requirements Engineering macht 37 Viele Arten von Anforderungen 38 Funktionale Anforderungen 38 Nichtfunktionale Anforderungen 39 Randbedingungen 40 Abstraktionsstufen von Anforderungen 41 Möglichkeiten der Zertifizierung 42 Zertifikate des IREB 43 Zertifikate des IIBA 44 PMI Professional in Business Analysis (PMI-PBA) 45 Kapitel 2 Einbettung des Requirements Engineering 47 Das Zusammenspiel mit den übrigen Beteiligten 47 Die Kunden des Requirements Engineering 48 Wer sonst noch so wichtig ist: die Stakeholder 48 Die Basis vieler Anforderungen: die Geschäftsprozesse 49 Das Anforderungsdokument: eines für alle? 50 Requirements Engineering im klassischen Vorgehen: alles klar 52 Was zu erwarten ist 52 Was nicht zu erwarten ist 52 Requirements Engineering in agilen Projekten: just in time 53 Beliebte Missverständnisse beim agilen Requirements Engineering 53 Was agiles Vorgehen vom klassischen unterscheidet 54 Klassisch, agil, Festpreis, Aufwandspreis –nicht jede Kombination ist sinnvoll 56 Klassisch und Festpreis 56 Agil und Aufwandspreis 56 Agil und Festpreis 57 Klassisch und Aufwandspreis 57 Alles im Überblick 57 Kapitel 3 Fallstricke 59 Was wir von den Kunden erwarten dürfen – und sie von uns 59 Wer nimmt die Anforderungen auf? 60 Der Projektleiter als Requirements Engineer 60 Der Product Owner als Requirements Engineer 61 Entwickler als Requirements Engineers 61 Kunde und Nutzer als Requirements Engineers 62 Die richtige Detaillierung von Anforderung 63 Umgang mit Änderungen 64 Dokumentation von Anforderungen 66 Teil II: Vorgehen im Requirements Engineering 69 Kapitel 4 Vorgehen in klassischen Projekten 71 Einordnung in den Projektablauf 71 Der Ablauf 73 Kapitel 5 Vorgehen in agilen Projekten 77 Direkte Kommunikation statt Dokumentation 78 Der Wert gibt den Takt an 79 Das Ziel immer vor Augen 80 Die Vorbereitungsphase 80 Requirements Engineering in Scrum 82 Scrum kurz erklärt 82 Wo das Requirements Engineering in Scrum stattfindet 84 Das Product Backlog weiterentwickeln: Refinement 86 Fertig heißt fertig: die Definition of Done 88 Welche Rolle für die Anforderungen zuständig ist 89 Wenn mehrere Teams an einem System arbeiten 90 Fortwährende Analyse statt Änderungsmanagement 91 Die Unterschiede zwischen klassischem und agilem Requirements Engineering 92 Kapitel 6 Anpassung des Requirements-Engineering-Prozesses 93 Einflussfaktoren 93 Facetten des Requirements-Engineering-Prozesses 94 Zeitfacette 95 Zweckfacette 96 Zielfacette 96 Konfiguration des Prozesses 97 Teil III: Anforderungsanalyse 99 Kapitel 7 An die Anforderungen herankommen 101 Stakeholderanalyse 102 Stakeholder identifizieren 103 Stakeholder verstehen 105 Maßnahmen zur Einbindung der Stakeholder 110 Zusätzliche Anforderungsquellen 111 Anforderungen ermitteln 112 Von geheimen und selbstverständlichen Anforderungen: das Kano-Modell 113 Wer fragt, gewinnt: die Befragungstechniken 115 Anforderungen gemeinsam erheben: Kooperationstechniken 121 Schauen Sie genau hin: Beobachtungstechniken 123 Systemarchäologie und der Blick zurück: artefaktbasierte Techniken 126 Recycling im Requirements Engineering: die Wiederverwendung von Anforderungen 127 Seien Sie kreativ: Entwurfs- und Ideenfindungstechniken 128 Hypothesen bilden und ausprobieren 133 Techniken, die Sie zusätzlich unterstützen 134 Welche Technik Ihnen weiterhilft 135 Konflikte und der Umgang damit 138 Analyse von Konflikten 138 Auflösung von Konflikten 139 Kapitel 8 Was uns zu Beginn klar sein sollte 145 Wohin soll die Reise gehen? Das Ziel klar vor Augen 145 Auf die Verpackung kommt es an: der Produktkarton 147 Alles auf einem Blick: das Product Vision Board 150 Auf die Schnelle: das Fahrstuhlgespräch 152 Den Überblick gewinnen 153 Den Kontext des Systems verstehen 154 Wie das System verwendet werden soll: Anwendungsfälle 156 Der Überblick über die ganze Geschichte: Story Map 159 Releases schneiden 164 Werden Sie zum Minimalisten: das Minimale Marktfähige Release 164 Von der Story Map zum Releaseplan 167 Kapitel 9 Funktionale Anforderungen verstehen und beschreiben 175 Die Systemverwendung mit Anwendungsfällen beschreiben 176 Wer das System zu welchem Zweck verwendet: das Anwendungsfalldiagramm 178 Anwendungsfälle Schritt für Schritt: Abläufe beschreiben 180 Anwendungsfälle mit Anwendungsfällen erweitern 192 Die Geschichten der Nutzer: User Stories 196 Die Akzeptanzkriterien einer User Story 198 Wie kleine User Stories große ersetzen 201 Anwendungsfälle oder User Stories? 205 Anwendungsfälle klassisch 205 Von der Story Map über Anwendungsfälle zu den User Stories 205 Kapitel 10 Weitere Aspekte funktionaler Anforderungen 209 Fachliche Begriffe begreifen 210 Alle wichtigen Begriffe auf einem Blick: das Glossar 210 Der Zusammenhang zwischen den fachlichen Gegenständen im Fachklassenmodell 212 Das sind ja Zustände 220 Die Zustände fachlicher Gegenstände 220 Das System bekommt Zustände 225 Wie das Geschäft zu regeln ist 232 Prototypen 243 Die natürliche Sprache 247 Man kann nicht alles verstehen 248 Tipps zum Umgang mit der Sprache 248 Ein Bausatz für Sätze: Satzschablonen 250 Die Sprache und nichts als die Sprache 254 Kapitel 11 Nichtfunktionale Anforderungen und Randbedingungen 257 Die Bedeutung der nichtfunktionalen Anforderungen 258 Nichtfunktionale Anforderungen verstehen 260 Nichtfunktionale Anforderungen ermitteln 265 Nichtfunktionale Anforderungen in der agilen Entwicklung 270 Was schon vorher feststeht: die Randbedingungen 273 Kapitel 12 Wer weiß, ob das auch so stimmt – Anforderungen prüfen 277 Was gibt es denn da zu prüfen? 278 Vorgehen im klassischen Requirements Engineering 279 Qualitätskriterien zur Verifikation und Validierung 279 Vorgehen im agilen Requirements Engineering 281 Techniken für die Prüfung 282 Reviewtechniken 282 Explorative Validierungstechniken 284 Prinzipien der Überprüfung 286 Kapitel 13 Anforderungen festhalten 289 Zweck der Dokumentation 289 Der richtige Zeitpunkt 292 Hilfreiche Regeln 294 Arten der Dokumentation 295 Dokumente 296 Modelle 302 Anforderungssammlungen im Requirements-Management-Tool 304 Product Backlog 305 Story Map 306 Formularvorlagen für Anforderungen 306 Teil IV: Requirements Management 309 Kapitel 14 Anforderungen organisieren 311 Requirements Management im agilen Vorgehen 312 Der Lebenszyklus einer Anforderung 314 Versionierung 316 Attribute einer Anforderung 317 Kann man so oder so sehen: Sichtweisen 318 Konfigurationen 320 Kapitel 15 Ist das wirklich wichtig? – Priorisierung von Anforderungen 323 Was wichtig ist 324 Ad-hoc-Priorisierungstechniken 325 Priorisierung mittels Stufen 325 Ranking 326 Top-Ten-Technik 326 Kauf dir ein Feature 326 Analytische Priorisierungstechniken 327 Wiegers’sche Priorisierungsmatrix 327 Kano-Modell 330 Vorgehen 330 Kapitel 16 Die Anforderungen verfolgen 333 Zweck der Verfolgbarkeit 333 Verfolgbarkeit darstellen 335 Methodisches Verfolgen 338 Kapitel 17 Umgang mit Änderungen 341 Ganz normal und doch unbeliebt 341 Der Änderungsprozess und seine Bestandteile 342 Kapitel 18 Werkzeuge im Requirements Engineering: Unterstützung und Last 347 Arten von Werkzeugen 348 Office-Tools 348 Requirements-Management-Tools 349 Modellierungstools 350 Was schon da ist: Bugtracker und Wiki 351 Lowtech-Tools 351 Kombinationen von Tools 352 Einführung von Werkzeugen 352 Teil V: Der Top-Ten-Teil 355 Kapitel 19 Zehn Prinzipien des Requirements Engineering 357 Zusammenarbeit: Requirements Engineering allein funktioniert nicht 357 Wertorientierung: Anforderungen sind kein Selbstzweck 358 Stakeholder: Es geht darum, ihren Bedarf zu erfüllen 358 Gemeinsames Verständnis: Die Basis für erfolgreiche Systementwicklung 358 Kontext: Notwendig, um Systeme zu verstehen 359 Problem, Anforderung, Lösung: Eine untrennbare Verbindung 359 Validierung: Ungeprüfte Anforderungen sind nutzlos 360 Evolution: Änderungen sind normal 360 Innovation: Mehr vom Gleichen reicht nicht 361 Systematische und disziplinierte Arbeit: Ohne geht es nicht 361 Kapitel 20 Zehn beliebte Fehler im Requirements Engineering 363 Die Suche nach dem Schuldigen 363 Lösungen beschreiben anstatt Probleme zu verstehen 364 Anforderungen einfach vom Altsystem übernehmen 364 Die Nutzer beschreiben die Anforderungen 364 Wir arbeiten agil und dokumentieren nichts 365 Entweder keine oder unverständliche Systemdokumentationen 365 User Stories sind allein dazu da, die bestehenden Anforderungen in das Backlog aufzunehmen 365 Agil und Modellierung geht nicht zusammen 366 Fachleute und Entwickler sprechen nicht miteinander 366 Das Requirements Engineering läuft nicht, also brauchen wir ein Tool 366 Kapitel 21 Zehn Online-Quellen 369 IREB-Lehrpläne, Handbücher und Glossar 369 Requirements Engineering Magazine 369 Scrum-Guide 369 Online Browsing Platform der ISO 370 V-Modell 370 UML-Spezifikation 370 UML-Übersicht 371 DMN-Spezifikation 371 Übersicht über Requirements-Tools 371 Übersicht über UML-Tools 371 Stichwortverzeichnis 375

Read more less

Book Synopsis»Wie leicht zu sehen ist, folgt?!« ? dieser Ausspruch sorgt in Vorlesungen stets für Verwirrung. Meist sind für diese vermeintlich leicht zu sehenden Schritte jedoch mehrere Zeilen mit mathematischen Gleichungen erforderlich. Doch keine Sorge: Dieses Buch ist anders! Michael Felleisen führt Sie Schritt für Schritt durch alle Herleitungen und Berechnungen. Dabei werden alle mathematischen Grundgesetze, die Sie zum Verständnis der Wechselstromtechnik beziehungsweise zum Lösen der Übungsaufgaben benötigen in einem Vorspann ausführlich erklärt. Von den besonderen Eigenschaften von Widerstand, Spule und Kondensator an sinusförmigen Wechselgrößen über spezielle Filterschaltungen bis zur Drehstromtechnik ist alles dabei. Auch die praktische Umsetzung der genialen Ideen von Elektropionieren wie Tesla, Gauß, Steinmetz und Bode kommen nicht zu kurz.Table of ContentsÜber den Autor 13 Danksagung 13 Einführung 23 Über dieses Buch 23 Konventionen in diesem Buch 24 Was Sie nicht lesen müssen 24 Törichte Annahmen über den Leser 24 Wie dieses Buch aufgebaut ist 25 Teil I: Besonderheiten der Wechselstromtechnik 25 Teil II: Widerstand, Spule und Kondensator an Wechselgrößen 25 Teil III: Gemischte Schaltungen an Wechselgrößen 25 Teil IV: Frequenzgang, Ortskurve und Filterschaltungen 26 Teil V: Drehstrom als Dreiphasen-Wechselstrom 26 Teil VI: Der Top-Ten-Teil 26 Symbole, die in diesem Buch verwendet werden 27 Wie es weitergeht 27 Teil I: Besonderheiten der Wechselstromtechnik 29 Kapitel 1 Stets zuerst die mathematischen Grundlagen 31 Geradengleichungen, wohin das Auge blickt 31 Ohne den Logarithmus geht es nicht 32 Auch die Exponentialfunktion spielt mit 33 Dreiecke und deren Winkel braucht das Land 34 Und dann noch Skalare und Vektoren 35 Schwingungen gehören zur Wechselstromtechnik 37 Auch Ableitungen werden gebraucht 39 Die irre tolle Integration 41 Das Wunder der komplexen Rechnung 42 Zeigerdarstellung in der Gauß’schen Zahlenebene 43 Umrechnung der Darstellungsformen komplexer Zahlen 47 Addition und Subtraktion komplexer Zahlen 49 Multiplikation und Division 50 Kehrwert einer komplexen Zahl 51 Potenzieren und Radizieren 52 Differenzieren und Integrieren von Schwingungsfunktionen 52 Bestimmung von Real- und Imaginärteil einer komplexen Zahl 57 Real- und Imaginärteil einer Summe oder Differenz 58 Anwendungsbeispiel zum Rechnen mit komplexen Zahlen 58 Kapitel 2 Auf und ab: Sinusförmige Wechselgrößen 63 Von der Gleich- zur periodischen Wechselgröße 65 Erzeugung einer sinusförmigen Wechselspannung 68 Kapitel 3 Kennwerte sinusförmiger Wechselgrößen 75 Amplitude, Augenblickswert und Frequenz 75 Woher kommt die Phasenverschiebung? 78 Phasenverschiebung der Spule 79 Phasenverschiebung des Kondensators 82 Wechselgrößen und deren Mittelwerte 84 Gleichanteil 84 Gleichrichtwert 85 Effektivwert 86 Kapitel 4 Zeiger- und Liniendiagramme für Wechselgrößen 91 Vom Zeiger- zum Liniendiagramm 91 Komplexe Darstellung sinusförmiger Wechselgrößen 96 Teil II: Widerstand, Spule und Kondensator an Wechselgrößen 99 Kapitel 5 Vom Scheinwiderstand zum Scheinleitwert 101 Widerstand an Wechselstrom 102 Kapitel 6 Der Wirkwiderstand an Wechselstrom 109 Ohm’scher Widerstand an Wechselstrom 109 Leistungen am Ohm’schen Widerstand 111 Kapitel 7 Der induktive Blindwiderstand der Spule 113 Spule an Wechselstrom 113 Leistungen an der Spule 117 Kapitel 8 Der kapazitive Blindwiderstand des Kondensators 121 Kondensator an Wechselstrom 121 Leistungen am Kondensator 125 Vergleich der Grundschaltungen an Wechselstrom 127 Teil III: Gemischte Schaltungen an Wechselgrößen 131 Kapitel 9 Reihenschaltung linearer Zweipole 133 Reihenschaltung von Widerstand und Spule 136 Entwurf des Zeigerdiagramms 138 Entwurf des Spannungsdreiecks 139 Entwurf des Widerstandsdreiecks 142 Reihenschaltung von Widerstand und Kondensator 145 Entwurf des Zeigerdiagramms 146 Entwurf des Spannungsdreiecks 147 Entwurf des Widerstandsdreiecks 149 Reihenschaltung von Widerstand, Spule und Kondensator 152 Entwurf des Zeigerdiagramms 153 Entwurf des Spannungsdreiecks 155 Entwurf des Widerstandsdreiecks 156 Reihenresonanz 159 Reihenschaltung komplexer Widerstände 161 Spannungsteilerregel für komplexe Widerstände 162 Kapitel 10 Parallelschaltung linearer Zweipole 165 Parallelschaltung von Widerstand und Spule 166 Entwurf des Zeigerdiagramms 168 Entwurf des Stromdreiecks 169 Entwurf des Leitwertdreiecks 172 Parallelschaltung von Widerstand und Kondensator 174 Entwurf des Zeigerdiagramms 175 Entwurf des Stromdreiecks 176 Entwurf des Leitwertdreiecks 178 Parallelschaltung von Widerstand, Spule und Kondensator 181 Entwurf des Zeigerdiagramms 182 Entwurf des Stromdreiecks 183 Entwurf des Leitwertdreiecks 185 Parallelresonanz 187 Parallelschaltung komplexer Leitwerte 189 Stromteilerregel für komplexe Leitwerte 190 Kapitel 11 Umwandlung von Reihen- und Parallelschaltung – Ersatzzweipole 193 Ersatz für die Parallelschaltung 194 Ersatz für die Reihenschaltung 195 Kapitel 12 Leistung im Wechselstromkreis 197 Leistung bei Wirklast – Wirkleistung am Ohm’schen Widerstand 199 Leistung bei induktiver Belastung – Blindleistung der Spule 205 Leistung bei kapazitiver Belastung – Blindleistung des Kondensators 207 Scheinleistung und Leistungsfaktor 210 Komplexe Leistung 211 Blindleistungskompensation 212 Reihenkompensation 214 Parallelkompensation 214 Teil IV: Frequenzgang, Ortskurve und Filterschaltungen 223 Kapitel 13 Frequenzgangdarstellung und das Bode-Diagramm 225 Der Frequenzgang und seine Eigenschaften 226 Eigenschaften des Bode-Diagramms 228 Kapitel 14 Frequenzkennlinien braucht das Land 231 Die Frequenzkennlinie – auf dem Weg zum Bode-Diagramm 232 Was geschieht mit der Ortskurvendarstellung? 237 Beispiele zur Konstruktion der Ortskurve 239 Kapitel 15 Elektrische Filterschaltungen 249 RC- und RL-Tiefpassschaltungen 250 RC- und RL-Hochpassschaltungen 255 RC-Bandpass 258 Kapitel 16 Resonanz im Wechselstromkreis 263 Die Spannungsresonanz in Reihenschaltungen 263 Die Resonanzfrequenz und die Thomson’sche Schwingungsformel 267 Die Stromresonanz in Parallelschaltungen 267 Teil V: Drehstrom als Dreiphasen-Wechselstromsystem 271 Kapitel 17 Erzeugung und Darstellung von Dreiphasen-Wechselstrom 273 Erzeugung von Dreiphasen-Wechselstrom 274 Generator für Drehstrom 278 Motor im Drehstromnetz 280 Kapitel 18 Stern- und Dreieckschaltung des Generators 289 Sternschaltung des Generators 289 Dreieckschaltung des Generators 293 Kapitel 19 Anschluss des Verbrauchers ans Drehstromnetz 295 Sternschaltung des Verbrauchers 295 Sternschaltung mit Neutralleiter 296 Sternschaltung ohne Neutralleiter 298 Dreieckschaltung des Verbrauchers 300 Kapitel 20 Leistung bei Drehstrom 305 Teil VI: Der Top-Ten-Teil 309 Kapitel 21 Zehn wichtige Erfinder der Wechselstromtechnik 311 Kapitel 22 Zehn wichtige Einheiten und deren Bedeutung 323 Kapitel 23 Zehn Dekaden der Elektrizität im 19 Jahrhundert 327 Kapitel 24 Meine zehn Lieblingsbücher für die Wechselstromtechnik 331 Anhang A: Lösungen der Aufgaben 333 Stichwortverzeichnis 371

Read more less

Book SynopsisBastelst du gern? Und liebst du es, wenn es leuchtet, piept und blinkt? In diesem Buch erfährst du Schritt für Schritt, wie du mit LEDs, Kondensatoren, Transistoren, Widerständen und anderen elektronischen Bauteilen nützliche und schöne Dinge wie Glückwunschkarten, Geschicklichkeitsspiele, Gespenster, Weihnachtsschmuck und Spielzeugautos basteln kannst. Du wirst von Anfang an auch löten! Nebenher lernst du, was Strom ist, warum man dafür Spannung braucht und wie alles funktioniert. Die Bauteile kannst du dir für wenig Geld im Internet oder im Elektronikmarkt besorgen. Leg einfach los! Bestens geeignet für Kinder und Jugendliche ab 10 Jahren.Table of ContentsEinführung 6 Hallo, zukünftige Elektronik-Profis 6 Über Strom und Spannung 6 Über dieses Buch 6 Über dich 7 Über die Symbole, die wir in diesem Buch verwenden 8 Kapitel 1: Auf die Plätze … 9 Von Elektrizität zur Elektrotechnik 9 Strom: Wie Wasser, aber trocken 10 Spannung: Der Fluss soll fließen können 11 Strom und Spannung messen 12 Stromkreis: Ein Bett für den Stromfluss 13 Batterie: Die Quelle des Stromflusses 14 Von der Elektrotechnik zur Elektronik 20 Rück- und Ausblick 22 Kapitel 2: Was du alles brauchst 23 Werkzeuge erleichtern das Leben 24 Elektronische Bauteile: Was ist wofür? 29 Das Multimeter: Messen, was du nicht siehst 32 Experiment: »Spannung einer Batterie messen« 34 Kinder betet, Vater lötet! 38 Lötanleitung »Drähte verbinden« 39 Lötanleitung »Bauteil auf Platine löten« 43 Alles wieder ab: Anleitung zum »Entlöten« 46 Kapitel 3: Leuchtende Grüße 48 Hier geht dir ein Licht auf 48 Projekt »LED-Glückwunschkarte« 52 Was du brauchst … 53 Jetzt wird gebaut! 54 Mögliche Fehlerquellen 67 Erweiterung: Zwei LEDs sollen leuchten 68 Experiment: »Parallel- und Reihenschaltung« 71 Für richtige Profis 78 Kapitel 4: LED-Geist mit leuchtenden Augen 79 Der Widerstand 80 Experiment »Eine LED und ihr Vorwiderstand« 85 Experiment »Drei LEDs in Reihe und ihr Vorwiderstand« 88 Projekt »LED-Geist« 91 Was du brauchst … 91 Jetzt wird gebaut! 92 Projektvariante »Leuchtende Weihnachtskugel« 101 Was du brauchst 101 Jetzt wird gebaut! 102 Kapitel 5: Heißer Draht 106 Experiment »Optisches Signal mit einer Alarm-LED« 107 Experiment »Akustisches Signal mit Summer« 111 Der Kondensator 113 Experiment »Die Warnsignale nicht übersehen« 114 Projekt »Heißer Draht« 116 Was du brauchst … 117 Jetzt wird gebaut! 118 Kapitel 6: Blinkende Weihnachtskugel 129 Der Transistor 130 Die Blinkschaltung 134 Experiment: Blinkendes Steckbrett 137 Mögliche Fehlerquellen 141 Projekt: Weihnachtskugel mit blinkenden LEDs 142 Was du brauchst … 142 Jetzt wird gebaut! 143 Projektvariante »LED-Geist mit blinkenden Augen« 152 Was du brauchst … 153 Jetzt wird gebaut! 153 Kapitel 7: Elektromobil 156 Der Elektromotor 158 Die Magnetkraft 158 Das elektromagnetische Prinzip 159 Die Spule dreht sich 159 Der Reflexkoppler 161 Ins Innere hineingeschaut 161 Da siehst du Schwarz 162 Die Linienfolger-Schaltung des Elektromobils 163 Projekt: Elektromobil mit Linienfolger-Schaltung 166 Was du brauchst … 167 Jetzt wird gebaut! 168 Und nun? 177 Anhang: Werkzeuge, Bauteile und Bastelmaterial besorgen 179 Werkzeugliste 180 Bauteileliste 183 Stichwortverzeichnis 193 Über die Autorinnen 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisDieses Buch erklärt Ihnen die Grundlagen von Azure, der Microsoft-Cloud-Technologie, und beschreibt klar und verständlich die grundlegenden Dienste. Nach der Lektüre können Sie die unterschiedlichen Cloud-Betriebsmodelle (Infrastructure as a Service, Platform as a Service und Software as a Service) unterscheiden und einschätzen. Sie kennen die wichtigsten Azure-Dienste und können dann eigene Azure-Umgebungen aufbauen. Damit Sie die Dienste auch automatisieren können, finden Sie im Buch viele Beispiele mit Azure CLI Code.Trade Review"...Das Buch gliedert sich in vier große Teile: Azure-Grundlagen, Azure-Infrastrukturdienste, Azure-Plattformdienste (Serverless-Computing, ...) und Azure-Mehrwertdienste (Machine Learning in Azure, ...). Sehr wichtig sind auch die abschließenden Kapitel über die zehn wichtigsten Dienste von Azure, die zehn wichtigste Hilfsmittel und Tools und die zehn wichtigsten Tipps, um Kosten zu sparen. Über Azure haben sich viele Mythen gebildet, so über die Lagerung und die Sicherheit von Daten und Zugriffsmöglichkeiten von Außenstehenden. Auch hier erfolgt abschließend eine sehr überzeugende Aufklärung. (EKZ im Oktober 2021) Table of ContentsÜber die Autoren 13 Vorwort 23 Einführung 27 Über dieses Buch 27 Über Azure 27 Was Sie nicht lesen müssen 28 Törichte Annahmen über den Leser 29 Wie dieses Buch aufgebaut ist 30 Teil I: Azure-Grundlagen 30 Teil II: Azure-Infrastrukturdienste 31 Teil III: Azure-Plattformdienste 31 Teil IV: Mehrwertdienste auf Azure 32 Teil V: Der Top-Ten-Teil 32 Symbole, die in diesem Buch verwendet werden 32 Wie es weitergeht 33 Teil I: Azure-Grundlagen 35 Kapitel 1 Was ist Cloud Computing? Was ist Microsoft Azure? 37 Cloud-Merkmale 39 Geschmacksrichtungen der Cloud 41 Cloud-Bereitstellungsmodelle 45 Die Cloud wirtschaftlich betrachtet 46 Kapitel 2 Die Azure-Architektur 49 Azure-Management-Tools 52 Azure-Konten, -Abonnements und –Verwaltungsgruppen 57 Azure-Regionen und -Geografien 59 Azure-Ressourcen und -Ressourcengruppen 61 Kapitel 3 Azure Marketplace und Dienste 63 Kapitel 4 Rechte, Rollen und Richtlinien 69 Sicherheitskonzepte in Azure 69 Geteilte Verantwortlichkeit für die Sicherheit 72 Rollenbasierte Zugriffskontrolle 74 Azure-Sperren 77 Azure-Richtlinien 77 Kapitel 5 Support anfordern 81 Ein Ticket eröffnen 83 Azure Service Level Agreements (SLAs) 84 Der Azure Advisor 85 Weitere Unterstützungsangebote 87 Kapitel 6 Azure und der Datenschutz 89 Das Azure Trust Center 89 Das Service Trust Portal 90 Der Compliance-Manager 91 Das Azure Security Center 92 Azure-Security-Komponenten für den Datenschutz 93 Kapitel 7 Was kostet das alles? 95 Bezugsmodelle für Azure 98 Der Azure-Preisrechner in Aktion 100 Teil II: Azure-Infrastrukturdienste 103 Kapitel 8 Virtuelle Maschinen 105 Eine virtuelle Maschine anlegen 106 Im Azure-Portal 106 In PowerShell 123 In Azure-CLI 132 Mit einer ARM-Vorlage 135 Eine virtuelle Maschine konfigurieren 137 Backup einrichten 138 Überwachung mit Log Analytics 139 Der Bastionhost 142 Verfügbarkeitsoptionen für virtuelle Maschinen 144 Kapitel 9 Netzwerk, Firewalls und VPN 147 Virtuelle Netzwerke 147 VPN-Gateways (Gateways für virtuelle Netzwerke) 149 Netzwerk-Peering 153 Netzwerksicherheitsgruppen 156 Loadbalancer 160 VNET-Dienstendpunkte.162 Azure-Firewall und Application Gateway 163 Benutzerdefinierte Routing-Tabellen und Routen 164 Kapitel 10 Storage 165 Azure-Speicherkonten 168 Tools, mit denen Sie mit Azure-Speicherkonten arbeiten können 173 Kapitel 11 Active Directory 175 Azure Active Directory 176 Azure-Active-Directory-Gruppen 180 Active Directory Domain Services 181 Wann sollte man was verwenden? 182 Hybride Umgebungen 183 Teil III: Azure-Plattformdienste 187 Kapitel 12 Relationale Datenbanken: Open Source 189 Relationale Datenbanken 189 Open Source in Azure? 190 Azure Database for MySQL 192 Azure Database for MariaDB 196 PostgreSQL 198 Redis Cache 199 Kapitel 13 Relationale Datenbanken: Azure SQL 203 Preismodelle und SKUs 206 Dienstebenen 209 Verwenden Ihrer Datenbank 210 Kapitel 14 Nicht-relationale Datenbanken 215 Cosmos DB 216 Weitere NoSQL-Datenspeicher 222 Weitere Dienste im Marktplatz 224 Kapitel 15 Web-Apps und APIs 227 Architektur für Cloud-Anwendungen 228 App-Service-Pläne 229 Webanwendungen 232 Berechtigungen und Integration 234 Überwachung und Skalierung 237 Kapitel 16 Serverless Computing in Azure 243 Serverlose Azure Functions 245 Weitere Serverless-Dienste 253 Bringen Sie alles zusammen 256 Kapitel 17 Daten bewegen: Azure Data Factory 259 Eine Azure Data Factory anlegen 260 Die Oberfläche der Azure Data Factory kennenlernen 261 Ihre erste Pipeline in der Azure Data Factory 265 Ein Blick hinter die Kulissen 273 Kapitel 18 Container, Registries und Kubernetes 277 Grundlegende Elemente der Container-Technologie 278 Azure Container Instance 283 Azure Container Registry 285 Azure Kubernetes Service 286 Kapitel 19 IoT, Datenströme und weitere Dienste 289 Azure IoT Hub 290 Azure Event Hub 293 Azure Service Bus 296 Azure Storage Queues 297 Azure Stream Analytics und Time Series Insights 298 Teil IV: Mehrwertdienste auf Azure 303 Kapitel 20 Cognitive Services 305 Im Angebot 306 Verwendung der Cognitive Services 308 Kapitel 21 Azure Synapse Analytics 313 Lernen Sie Synapse Analytics kennen 314 Erstellen Sie einen Synapse-Analytics-Arbeitsbereich 316 Mit Azure Synapse Analytics arbeiten 318 Kapitel 22 Azure Databricks 325 Verwaltete Databricks-Cluster 326 Die Databricks-Weboberfläche 328 Azure-Ressourcen 332 Kapitel 23 Azure Bot Service 335 Das Bot-Framework 335 Bereitstellung auf Azure 338 Ihren Bot entwickeln 340 Kapitel 24 Machine Learning in Azure 345 Die Azure Data Science VM 345 Azure Machine Learning 347 Teil V: Der Top-Ten-Teil 351 Kapitel 25 Die zehn wichtigsten Dienste 353 Virtuelle Maschinen 353 Azure Active Directory 353 Azure-SQL-Datenbank 354 Azure Data Factory 354 Azure IoT Hub 354 Azure Virtual Network Gateway 354 Azure-Webanwendungen 354 Azure Event Hub 355 Azure Logic Apps 355 Azure Functions 355 Kapitel 26 Die zehn wichtigsten Hilfsmittel und Tools 357 Visual Studio Code 357 Git 357 Azure DevOps 358 Power BI 358 Azure Kostenrechner 358 Azure Storage Explorer 358 Azure Data Studio 359 Azure-Portal 359 Azure-CLI 359 Visual Studio 359 Kapitel 27 Die zehn wichtigsten Tipps, um Kosten zu sparen 361 Start small 361 Stoppen Sie nicht benötigte Dienste und VMs 361 Nutzen Sie den Azure Advisor 362 Minimieren Sie ausgehenden Datenverkehr 362 Nutzen Sie alle Optionen für Azure-Speicherkonten 362 Nutzen Sie die Skalierungsmöglichkeiten der Cloud 362 Nutzen Sie Plattformdienste 362 Nutzen Sie serverlose Dienste 363 Skripten Sie Ihre Umgebung 363 Lesen Sie die Anleitung 363 Kapitel 28 Zehn Mythen über Azure 365 Azure ist teuer! 365 Die Daten sind nicht sicher! 365 Ich habe keine Kontrolle, wo meine Daten liegen! 366 Azure kostet mich meinen Arbeitsplatz! 366 Microsoft kann auf alle meine Daten zugreifen! 366 Man kann nur Microsoft-Software in Azure laufen lassen! 366 Wenn ich mit Azure starte, bin ich für immer an Microsoft gebunden! 367 Ich muss alles auf einer virtuellen Maschine betreiben! 367 Ich brauche einen Windows-PC, um Azure-Ressourcen zu administrieren 367 Für unsere Systemlandschaft bietet Azure keine Vorteile 367 Stichwortverzeichnis 371

Read more less

Book SynopsisHomeoffice ist für viele inzwischen Alltag geworden, Tendenz steigend. Vorbei die Zeiten, als Kollegen, die ab und zu von zu Hause arbeiteten, unter Verdacht standen, sich nur einen lauen Arbeitstag machen zu wollen. Trotzdem gibt es noch zahlreiche Fragen und Herausforderungen für viele Mitarbeiter, Führungskräfte, Unternehmen und Kunden: Wie ist Arbeit zu organisieren, wenn viele Mitarbeiter im Homeoffice sind, aber eben nicht alle? Wie bleiben wir in gutem Kontakt? Welche Arbeitsmittel und Schulungen werden benötigt? Und: Welche Chancen und Risiken verbergen sich in der Arbeitsform Homeoffice? Wie kann ich mein Büro zu Hause am besten einrichten und worauf muss ich dabei achten? Wie schaffe ich es, Berufliches und Privates im Homeoffice unter einen Hut zu bekommen? Wann ist Präsenz eben doch die bessere Wahl? Welche Haltung braucht es beim Einzelnen, in der Firma, bei der Führungskraft, damit "Homeoffice" gut gelingt? All diese Fragen und noch viele mehr beantwortet dieses Buch.Table of Contents1 Introduction to Financial Statements 1-1 Knowing the Numbers: Columbia Sportswear Company 1-1 1.1 Business Organization and Accounting Information Uses 1-2 Forms of Business Organization 1-3 Users and Uses of Financial Information 1-4 Data Analytics 1-6 Ethics in Financial Reporting 1-7 1.2 The Three Types of Business Activity 1-8 Financing Activities 1-9 Investing Activities 1-9 Operating Activities 1-10 1.3 The Four Financial Statements 1-11 Income Statement 1-12 Retained Earnings Statement 1-13 Balance Sheet 1-14 Statement of Cash Flows 1-16 Interrelationships of Statements 1-17 Elements of an Annual Report 1-20 Appendix 1A: Career Opportunities in Accounting 1-23 “Show Me the Money” 1-24 2 A Further Look at Financial Statements 2-1 Just Fooling Around?: The Motley Fool 2-2 2.1 The Classified Balance Sheet 2-3 Current Assets 2-3 Long-Term Investments 2-5 Property, Plant, and Equipment 2-5 Intangible Assets 2-5 Current Liabilities 2-7 Long-Term Liabilities 2-7 Stockholders’ Equity 2-7 2.2 Analyzing the Financial Statements Using Ratios 2-8 Ratio Analysis 2-8 Using the Income Statement 2-9 Using a Classified Balance Sheet 2-10 2.3 Financial Reporting Concepts 2-14 The Standard-Setting Environment 2-14 Qualities of Useful Information 2-16 Assumptions in Financial Reporting 2-17 Principles in Financial Reporting 2-18 Cost Constraint 2-18 3 The Accounting Information System 3-1 Accidents Happen: MF Global Holdings Ltd 3-1 3.1 Using the Accounting Equation to Analyze Transactions 3-3 Accounting Transactions 3-3 Analyzing Transactions 3-4 Summary of Transactions 3-10 3.2 Accounts, Debits, and Credits 3-11 Debits and Credits 3-11 Debit and Credit Procedures 3-12 Stockholders’ Equity Relationships 3-15 Summary of Debit/Credit Rules 3-16 3.3 Using a Journal 3-17 The Recording Process 3-17 The Journal 3-18 3.4 The Ledger and Posting 3-20 The Ledger 3-20 Chart of Accounts 3-21 Posting 3-21 The Recording Process Illustrated 3-22 Summary Illustration of Journalizing and Posting 3-28 3.5 The Trial Balance 3-30 Limitations of a Trial Balance 3-31 4 Accrual Accounting Concepts 4-1 Keeping Track of Groupons: Groupon 4-1 4.1 Accrual-Basis Accounting and Adjusting Entries 4-2 The Revenue Recognition Principle 4-3 The Expense Recognition Principle 4-4 Accrual versus Cash Basis of Accounting 4-5 The Need for Adjusting Entries 4-5 Types of Adjusting Entries 4-6 4.2 Adjusting Entries for Deferrals 4-7 Prepaid Expenses 4-7 Unearned Revenues 4-12 4.3 Adjusting Entries for Accruals 4-15 Accrued Revenues 4-15 Accrued Expenses 4-17 Summary of Basic Relationships 4-20 4.4 The Adjusted Trial Balance and Closing Entries 4-23 Preparing the Adjusted Trial Balance 4-23 Preparing Financial Statements 4-24 Quality of Earnings 4-24 Closing the Books 4-27 Summary of the Accounting Cycle 4-30 Appendix 4A: Using a Worksheet 4-34 5 Merchandising Operations and the Multiple-Step Income Statement 5-1 Buy Now, Vote Later: REI 5-1 5.1 Merchandising Operations and Inventory Systems 5-2 Operating Cycles 5-3 Flow of Costs 5-4 5.2 Recording Purchases Under a Perpetual System 5-6 Freight Costs 5-8 Purchase Returns and Allowances 5-9 Purchase Discounts 5-10 Summary of Purchasing Transactions 5-11 5.3 Recording Sales Under a Perpetual System 5-11 Sales Returns and Allowances 5-13 Sales Discounts 5-14 Data Analytics and Credit Sales 5-15 5.4 Preparing the Multiple-Step Income Statement 5-16 Single-Step Income Statement 5-16 Multiple-Step Income Statement 5-17 5.5 Cost of Goods Sold Under a Periodic System 5-21 5.6 Gross Profit Rate and Profit Margin 5-23 Gross Profit Rate 5-23 Profit Margin 5-24 Appendix 5A: Periodic Inventory System 5-27 Recording Merchandise Transactions 5-27 Recording Purchases of Merchandise 5-28 Freight Costs 5-28 Recording Sales of Merchandise 5-28 Comparison of Entries—Perpetual vs. Periodic 5-29 Appendix 5B: Adjusting Entries for Credit Sales with Returns and Allowances 5-30 Data Analytics in Action 5-52 6 Reporting and Analyzing Inventory 6-1 “Where Is That Spare Bulldozer Blade?”: Caterpillar 6-1 6.1 Classifying and Determining Inventory 6-2 Classifying Inventory 6-2 Determining Inventory Quantities 6-4 6.2 Inventory Methods and Financial Effects 6-7 Specific Identification 6-7 Cost Flow Assumptions 6-8 Financial Statement and Tax Effects of Cost Flow Methods 6-13 Using Inventory Cost Flow Methods Consistently 6-15 6.3 Inventory Presentation and Analysis 6-17 Presentation 6-17 Lower-of-Cost-or-Net Realizable Value 6-17 Financial Analysis and Data Analytics 6-18 Adjustments for LIFO Reserve 6-21 Appendix 6A: Inventory Cost Flow Methods in Perpetual Inventory Systems 6-24 First-In, First-Out (FIFO) 6-24 Last-In, First-Out (LIFO) 6-25 Average-Cost 6-26 Appendix 6B: Effects of Inventory Errors 6-27 Income Statement Effects 6-27 Balance Sheet Effects 6-28 Data Analytics in Action 6-49 7 Fraud, Internal Control, and Cash 7-1 Minding the Money in Madison: Barriques 7-1 7.1 Fraud and Internal Control 7-3 Fraud 7-3 The Sarbanes-Oxley Act 7-3 Internal Control 7-4 Principles of Internal Control Activities 7-5 Data Analytics and Internal Controls 7-10 Limitations of Internal Control 7-11 7.2 Cash Controls 7-12 Cash Receipts Controls 7-12 Cash Disbursements Controls 7-14 Petty Cash Fund 7-16 7.3 Control Features of a Bank Account 7-17 Electronic Banking 7-18 Bank Statements 7-18 Reconciling the Bank Account 7-20 7.4 Reporting Cash 7-25 Cash Equivalents 7-26 Restricted Cash 7-26 Managing and Monitoring Cash 7-27 Cash Budgeting 7-29 Appendix 7A: Operation of a Petty Cash Fund 7-32 Establishing the Petty Cash Fund 7-33 Making Payments from the Petty Cash Fund 7-33 Replenishing the Petty Cash Fund 7-34 Data Analytics in Action 7-56 8 Reporting and Analyzing Receivables 8-1 What’s Cooking?: Nike 8-1 8.1 Recognition of Accounts Receivable 8-3 Types of Receivables 8-3 Recognizing Accounts Receivable 8-3 8.2 Valuation and Disposition of Accounts Receivable 8-5 Valuing Accounts Receivable 8-5 Disposing of Accounts Receivable 8-13 8.3 Notes Receivable 8-15 Determining the Maturity Date 8-16 Computing Interest 8-16 Recognizing Notes Receivable 8-17 Valuing Notes Receivable 8-17 Disposing of Notes Receivable 8-17 8.4 Receivables Presentation and Management 8-20 Financial Statement Presentation of Receivables 8-20 Managing Receivables 8-21 Evaluating Liquidity of Receivables 8-23 Accelerating Cash Receipts 8-24 Data Analytics and Receivables Management 8-25 Data Analytics in Action 8-46 9 Reporting and Analyzing Long-Lived Assets 9-1 A Tale of Two Airlines: American Airlines 9-1 9.1 Plant Asset Expenditures 9-3 Determining the Cost of Plant Assets 9-3 Expenditures During Useful Life 9-6 To Buy or Lease? 9-7 9.2 Depreciation Methods 9-8 Factors in Computing Depreciation 9-9 Depreciation Methods 9-9 Revising Periodic Depreciation 9-14 Impairments 9-15 9.3 Plant Asset Disposals 9-16 Sale of Plant Assets 9-16 Retirement of Plant Assets 9-18 9.4 Intangible Assets 9-19 Accounting for Intangible Assets 9-19 Types of Intangible Assets 9-20 Research and Development Costs 9-22 9.5 Statement Presentation and Analysis 9-23 Presentation 9-23 Analysis 9-25 Appendix 9A: Other Depreciation Methods 9-30 Declining-Balance Method 9-30 Units-of-Activity Method 9-31 Data Analytics in Action 9-55 10 Reporting and Analyzing Liabilities 10-1 And Then There Were Two: Maxwell Car Company 10-1 10.1 Accounting for Current Liabilities 10-3 What Is a Current Liability? 10-3 Notes Payable 10-3 Sales Taxes Payable 10-4 Unearned Revenues 10-5 Current Maturities of Long-Term Debt 10-6 Payroll and Payroll Taxes Payable 10-6 10.2 Characteristics of Bonds 10-9 Types of Bonds 10-9 Issuing Procedures 10-10 Bond Trading 10-10 Determining the Market Price of a Bond 10-11 10.3 Accounting for Bond Transactions 10-14 Issuing Bonds at Face Value 10-14 Discount or Premium on Bonds 10-14 Issuing Bonds at a Discount 10-15 Issuing Bonds at a Premium 10-17 Redeeming Bonds at Maturity 10-19 Redeeming Bonds Before Maturity 10-19 10.4 Presentation and Analysis 10-20 Presentation 10-20 Analysis 10-22 Appendix 10A: Straight-Line Amortization 10-26 Amortizing Bond Discount 10-26 Amortizing Bond Premium 10-28 Appendix 10B: Effective-Interest Amortization 10-29 Amortizing Bond Discount 10-29 Amortizing Bond Premium 10-31 Appendix 10C: Accounting for Long-Term Notes Payable 10-32 11 Reporting and Analyzing Stockholders’ Equity 11-1 Oh Well, I Guess I’ll Get Rich: Facebook 11-1 11.1 Corporate Form of Organization 11-3 Characteristics of a Corporation 11-3 Forming a Corporation 11-6 Stockholder Rights 11-7 Stock Issue Considerations 11-8 Corporate Capital 11-10 11.2 Accounting for Common, Preferred, and Treasury Stock 11-12 Accounting for Common Stock 11-12 Accounting for Preferred Stock 11-13 Accounting for Treasury Stock 11-14 11.3 Accounting for Dividends and Stock Splits 11-16 Cash Dividends 11-16 Dividend Preferences 11-19 Stock Dividends 11-21 Stock Splits 11-22 11.4 Presentation and Analysis 11-24 Retained Earnings 11-24 Retained Earnings Restrictions 11-25 Balance Sheet Presentation of Stockholders’ Equity 11-26 Analysis of Stockholders’ Equity 11-28 Debt versus Equity Decision 11-29 Appendix 11A: Entries for Stock Dividends 11-32 Data Analytics in Action 11-55 12 Statement of Cash Flows 12-1 Got Cash?: Microsoft 12-2 12.1 Usefulness and Format of the Statement of Cash Flows 12-3 Usefulness of the Statement of Cash Flows 12-3 Classification of Cash Flows 12-3 Significant Noncash Activities 12-4 Format of the Statement of Cash Flows 12-5 12.2 Preparing the Statement of Cash Flows—Indirect Method 12-6 Indirect and Direct Methods 12-7 Indirect Method—Computer Services Company 12-7 Step 1: Operating Activities 12-9 Summary of Conversion to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities—Indirect Method 12-12 Step 2: Investing and Financing Activities 12-13 Step 3: Net Change in Cash 12-15 12.3 Analyzing the Statement of Cash Flows 12-17 The Corporate Life Cycle 12-17 Free Cash Flow 12-19 Appendix 12A: Statement of Cash Flows—Direct Method 12-22 Step 1: Operating Activities 12-24 Step 2: Investing and Financing Activities 12-28 Step 3: Net Change in Cash 12-30 Appendix 12B: Worksheet for the Indirect Method 12-30 Preparing the Worksheet 12-31 Appendix 12C: Statement of Cash Flows—T-Account Approach 12-35 Data Analytics in Action 12-61 13 Financial Analysis: The Big Picture 13-1 It Pays to Be Patient: Warren Buffett 13-2 13.1 Sustainable Income and Quality of Earnings 13-3 Sustainable Income 13-3 Quality of Earnings 13-7 13.2 Horizontal Analysis and Vertical Analysis 13-9 Horizontal Analysis 13-10 Vertical Analysis 13-12 13.3 Ratio Analysis 13-15 Liquidity Ratios 13-16 Solvency Ratios 13-17 Profitability Ratios 13-17 Financial Analysis and Data Analytics 13-18 Comprehensive Example of Ratio Analysis 13-18 Appendix A Specimen Financial Statements: Apple Inc. A-1 Appendix B Specimen Financial Statements: Columbia Sportswear Company B-1 Appendix C Specimen Financial Statements: Under Armour, Inc. C-1 Appendix D Specimen Financial Statements: Amazon.com, Inc. D-1 Appendix E Specimen Financial Statements: Walmart Inc. E-1 Appendix F Time Value of Money F-1 F.1 Interest and Future Values F-2 Nature of Interest F-2 Future Value of a Single Amount F-3 Future Value of an Annuity F-5 F.2 Present Values F-8 Present Value Variables F-8 Present Value of a Single Amount F-9 Present Value of an Annuity F-11 Time Periods and Discounting F-13 Present Value of a Long-Term Note or Bond F-13 F.3 Capital Budgeting Situations F-16 F.4 Using Technological Tools F-18 Present Value of a Single Sum F-19 Present Value of an Annuity F-20 Future Value of a Single Sum F-21 Future Value of an Annuity F-22 Internal Rate of Return F-22 Useful Applications F-23 Appendix G Reporting and Analyzing Investments G-1 G.1 Accounting for Debt Investments G-2 Why Corporations Invest G-2 Accounting for Debt Investments G-2 G.2 Accounting for Stock Investments G-4 Holdings of Less Than 20% G-5 Holdings Between 20% and 50% G-6 Holdings of More Than 50% G-7 G.3 Reporting Investments in Financial Statements G-9 Debt Securities G-9 Equity Securities G-12 Balance Sheet Presentation G-13 Presentation of Realized and Unrealized Gain or Loss G-14 Company Index I-1 Subject Index I-5 Rapid Review: Chapter Content

Read more less

Book SynopsisDigitaltechnik kann ganz schön kompliziert sein, dafür, dass sie sich hauptsächlich mit den Zahlen 0 und 1 beschäftigt. Aber Hilfe naht: Bernd Büchau erklärt Ihnen von der Pike auf, worum es geht. Er erläutert, was analoge und digitale Signale sind, wie Sie mit numerischen und alphanumerischen Codes arbeiten, was es mit Schaltalgebra auf sich hat und vieles mehr. Danach beschäftigt er sich mit Schaltkreisen, Schaltnetzen und Schaltwerken sowie der Speicherung binärer Informationen. So hilft Ihnen das Buch bei Ihren ersten Schritten in die Digitaltechnik.

Read more less

Book SynopsisSie möchten hochwertige Bilder mit Ihrem Android-Smartphone aufnehmen? In diesem Buch erfahren Sie, wie Sie mit der Kamera, die Sie jeden Tag dabei haben, beeindruckende Fotos schießen. Mark Hemmings bringt Ihnen die Grundprinzipien der Fotografie bei und zeigt Ihnen, wie Sie dieses Wissen auf Außenaufnahmen, Actionfotos, Portraits und in Videos anwenden. Außerdem erfahren Sie alles über die Möglichkeiten der Bildbearbeitung und bekommen praktische Tipps, wie Sie Ihre Aufnahmen organisieren und Fotos online teilen.Trade Review"... Für Android-Smartphone-Nutzer*innen zweifellos eine überzeugende Hilfe." (EKZ im August 2022)Table of ContentsÜber den Autor 11 Widmung 11 Danksagung 11 Einleitung 21 Über dieses Buch 21 Törichte Annahmen über die Leser 23 Symbole, die in diesem Buch verwendet werden 23 Konventionen in diesem Buch 23 Wie es weitergeht 24 Teil I: Die Kamera direkt nach dem Auspacken verwenden 25 Kapitel 1 Mit Android-Smartphones fotografieren – eine Einführung 27 Machen Sie sich mit Ihrer Android-Kamera vertraut 27 Modelle mit einem Objektiv 28 Modelle mit zwei Objektiven 28 Modelle mit drei Objektiven 30 Modelle mit mehr als drei Objektiven 30 Ein Blick auf die Kamera-App 31 Ein Bild aufnehmen 33 Fotos ansehen 34 Fotos bearbeiten 37 Fotos teilen 38 Kapitel 2 Lernen Sie Ihre Kamera kennen 39 Das Telefon richtig halten – für scharfe Fotos 39 Verschiedene Möglichkeiten, die Kamera zu öffnen 43 An Motive heranzoomen 45 Der digitale Zoom 46 Den optischen Zoom anstelle des digitalen Zooms verwenden 48 Selfies mit und ohne Hintergrundunschärfe aufnehmen 50 Wann der Kamerablitz zu verwenden ist (und wann nicht) 51 Mit dem Kamera-Timer für scharfe Fotos sorgen 55 Landschaftsfotografie mit Timer 56 Familienporträts 57 Selfies mit einem Stativ oder einem Ständer 57 Kapitel 3 Kameraeinstellungen ändern und Fotos speichern 59 Google Fotos öffnen und aktivieren 60 Auswahl der Speicheroptionen für Ihre Fotos 62 Die Qualität der hochgeladenen Fotos festlegen 64 Das Speichern von Fotos auf dem Gerät verwalten 65 Alle Ihre Fotos archivieren 66 Zu archivierenden Fotos auswählen 68 Fotos auf einen PC oder Mac übertragen 70 Auf die übermäßige Nutzung von Mobilfunkdaten achten 72 Ihrer Kamera erlauben, Ihren Standort zu verfolgen 76 Kapitel 4 Die Kamera-App im Detail 79 Vorbereitungen für Selfies 79 Beleuchtung und Hintergrund 80 Selfie-Sticks und Stabilisatoren 81 Selfies machen 83 Den Porträt-Selfie-Modus wählen 84 Die Hintergrundunschärfe einstellen 84 Eine Glättung der Gesichtshaut erreichen 86 Wählen Sie Ihren bevorzugten Selfie-Effekt 87 Ihren Selfies Live-Filter hinzufügen 90 Den Selfie-Zoom einstellen, um Freunde mit auf dem Bild zu zeigen 91 Alternative Seitenverhältnisse erkunden 92 Panoramafotos erstellen 96 Horizontale Panoramafotos 96 Vertikale Panoramafotos 99 Teil II: Die Grundlagen der fotografischen Genres 101 Kapitel 5 Das perfekte Landschaftsfoto 103 Überlegungen zur Kamera: Waagerechte Ausrichtung und Belichtung 103 Die Kamera waagerecht ausrichten 103 Belichtungskontrolle 105 Überlegungen zum Licht 107 Fotografieren während der magischen Stunden 108 Das Timing der magischen Stunden 109 Die Ausrüstung 110 Halten Sie Ihre Android-Kamera mit einem Stativ stabil 110 Auswahl eines Objektivs (für Android-Kameras mit mehreren Objektiven) 113 Fotografie-Tipps für Ihren nächsten Ausflug 115 Anwendung der Drittel-Regel für bessere Kompositionen 115 Framing durch eine »L«-förmige Komposition 117 Positionierung eines primären und sekundären Motivs 117 Kapitel 6 Sportaufnahmen schießen 119 Überlegungen zur Kamera: Verwendung des Serienbildermodus zur Erfassung von Bewegungen 120 Überlegungen zur Ausrüstung 122 Batteriepacks oder Batteriegehäuse 123 Touchscreen-Handschuhe bei kaltem Wetter 124 Überlegungen zur Beleuchtung 124 Fotografieren gegen die untergehende Sonne 125 Mannschaftssportarten mit der Sonne im Rücken fotografieren 127 Die untergehende Sonne für Porträts nutzen 127 Kühle und warme Farbtöne einbeziehen 128 Wahl einer kontrastreichen Beleuchtung 129 Fotografie-Tipps für dynamische Sportfotos 130 Verwendung des Porträtmodus 130 Das Motiv in die Komposition einfließen lassen 131 Auswahl von gekrümmten Hintergründen 133 Setzen Sie Ihre Athleten in den richtigen Rahmen 134 Negativen Raum schaffen 134 Kapitel 7 Mit Familien-und Einzelporträts Erinnerungen bewahren 137 Überlegungen zur Kamera: Porträtmodus und Objektive 137 Wissen, wann Sie den Porträtmodus verwenden sollten 137 Die Objektivkompression verstehen 139 Überlegungen zur Ausrüstung: Bearbeitungswerkzeuge für bessere Kompositionen 140 Überlegungen zur Beleuchtung 143 Bestimmte Arten von Innenbeleuchtung vermeiden 143 Hintergrundbeleuchtung im Innenraum 144 Silhouetten – für künstlerische Impressionen der Familienporträts 145 Mit Schatten künstlerische Porträts aufnehmen 145 Familienmitglieder in den Schatten stellen – für gleichmäßiges Licht 147 Fotografie-Tipps für Ihre nächste Porträtsitzung 148 Fotografieren aus einer niedrigeren Position 148 Nehmen Sie mehrere Fotos von einem Standort auf 150 Vermeiden Sie auf Ihren Fotos Gegenstände, die aus den Köpfen der Menschen herausragen 151 Klein komponieren für künstlerische Porträts 151 Interessen von Familienmitgliedern einbeziehen 152 Porträts in Nahaufnahme üben 152 Selfies ohne Hände mit Spiegeln 154 Futter als Lockmittel für Haustierfotos 154 Kapitel 8 Auf Reisen und im Urlaub fotografieren 157 Überlegungen zur Kamera: mehrere Objektive und Belichtung 157 Dieselbe Szene mit mehreren Objektiven fotografieren 158 Schnelle der Belichtungssteuerung für flüchtige Motive 159 Überlegungen zur Ausrüstung 160 Schützen Sie Ihr Android-Smartphone! 160 Packen Sie ein Stativ ein! 162 Überlegungen zur Beleuchtung 163 Frontallicht 163 Gegenlicht 163 Seitenlicht 165 Diagonales Licht bei 45 Grad 165 Blaues Licht und goldene Stunde 168 Lens-Flares beim Fotografieren in die untergehende Sonne 169 Nutzen Sie bewölkte Tage 170 Fotografie-Tipps für Ihre nächste Reise 172 Freiraum für Text 172 S-Kurven in Ihren Kompositionen platzieren 173 Kompositionen mit geometrischen Formen 175 Bewertungen für gerade neu entdeckte Geschäfte 176 Auf der Suche nach »Gesichtern« 177 Kapitel 9 Dynamische Stillleben und Produktfotografie 179 Überlegungen zur Kamera: Hintergrundunschärfe 179 Überlegungen zur Ausrüstung 182 Den Hintergrund für Ihr Produkt auswählen 182 Tischstative verwenden 183 Überlegungen zur Beleuchtung 185 Verwendung von Seitenlicht für Produkte 185 Positionierung für die Lichtstrahlen bei Sonnenuntergang 186 Architekturfotografie im Freien 190 Innenarchitekturfotografie 190 Schöne Stilllebenfotos 191 Gleiche Abstände für den Hintergrund finden 191 Durch Fenster fotografieren 191 Lebensmittel fotografieren 193 Kapitel 10 Auf der Straße: Fremde fotografieren 195 Überlegungen zur Kamera: Auswahl von Objektiven und Standorten 195 Wählen Sie Ihr Objektiv 196 Wählen Sie Ihren Standort 197 Überlegungen zur Ausrüstung 199 Überlegungen zur Beleuchtung 201 Tipps für Ihre nächste Straßenfotografie-Session 206 Pfeile – für die konzeptionelle Straßenfotografie 206 Den Kompositionsfluss berücksichtigen 207 Kompositionen in Schwarz-Weiß umwandeln 207 Designbasierte Hintergründe auswählen 208 Halten Sie den Alltag fest! 208 Anonymität durch Größenverhältnisse und Schattenwurf 210 Achten Sie auf die Privatsphäre anderer Menschen! 210 Teil III: Fotos bearbeiten, organisieren und weitergeben 213 Kapitel 11 Fotobearbeitung mit der Google-Fotos-App 215 Die Bearbeitungswerkzeuge der Google-Fotos-App 216 Einen Filter auswählen 216 Änderungen speichern 216 Zwischen Speichern und Speichern als Kopie wählen 218 Filter anwenden 219 Fotos zuschneiden 226 Automatisches Begradigen verwenden 226 Die Zuschneidegriffe verschieben 229 Fotos drehen 230 Seitenverhältnisse beim Zuschneiden verstehen 231 Fotos um 90 oder 180 Grad drehen 236 Fotos schräg stellen 237 Fotobearbeitung 242 Porträtfotos bearbeiten 249 Porträt 250 Schwarz-Weiß-Porträt 250 Weichzeichnen 251 Tiefe 253 Farbfokus 254 Porträtbeleuchtung 254 Kapitel 12 Fotos wie ein Profi organisieren und weitergeben 257 Workflows für die Nachbearbeitung verstehen 257 Unerwünschte Fotos löschen 258 Fotos löschen 258 Ein gelöschtes Foto wiederherstellen 260 Fotos mit dem Sternsymbol zu Favoriten machen 262 Alben perfekt organisieren 264 Fotos zum Erstellen eines neuen Albums auswählen 264 Fotos aus einem Album entfernen 267 Alben logisch benennen 269 Die Suchwerkzeuge kennenlernen 270 Suche nach Fotos einer einzelnen Person mit Personen 270 Ihren Standort mit Orte einfügen 273 Dinge zum Auffinden von Fotos nach Typ verwenden 274 Zugriff auf Fotos über Ihre Aktivität 275 Kategorien und Kreationen zum Sortieren nach Medientyp verwenden 275 Fotoalben teilen 277 Teil IV: Der Top-Ten-Teil 279 Kapitel 13 Zehn Android-Apps zur Verbesserung Ihrer Fotos 281 Adobe Photoshop Express 282 Adobe Photoshop Camera 282 Foto365 282 Foodie 282 Prisma Foto Editor 283 Facetune2 283 Canva 283 VSCO 283 TouchRetouch 283 Fotoscanner 284 Kapitel 14 Zehn Tipps zum Erstellen beeindruckender Videos 285 Auf die Videokamera zugreifen 285 Die Kamera für Videos richtig halten 286 Videoclips kürzen 287 Verwacklungen im Video reduzieren 289 Standbilder exportieren 290 Videos zuschneiden 292 Videos anpassen 293 Filter auf Ihr Video anwenden 294 Videoclips in Zeitlupe aufnehmen 295 Zeitraffer-Videoclips erstellen 296 Kapitel 15 Zehn zusätzliche Funktionen von Google Fotos 297 In Erinnerungen schwelgen 297 Kreationen beobachten 298 Automatisch Panoramen erstellen 299 Partnerkonten hinzufügen 300 Fotos markieren 301 Auf Metadaten zugreifen 302 Mit Google Lens suchen 303 Fotobücher kaufen 304 Screenshots erstellen 304 Unwichtige Fotos ausblenden 305 Abbildungsverzeichnis 307 Stichwortverzeichnis 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisTragfähige Literatur für Ihre Softwarearchitekturen Besuchen Sie eine Veranstaltung zu Softwarearchitektur oder stehen Sie in einem Projekt vor Architekturentscheidungen und wollen daher die aktuellen Architekturansätze verstehen? Dann hilft Ihnen dieses Buch. Holger Gast erläutert zunächst die grundlegenden Elemente von Architekturen und führt die technischen Hintergründe aus. Er erklärt Ihnen danach die klassischen Stile und Patterns und geht schließlich auf Cloud-Architekturen ein. Durchgängig legt er den Fokus auf konkrete Softwarestrukturen statt auf Theorie und ermöglicht Ihnen so einen verständlichen und zügigen Einstieg in das Thema. Sie erfahren Wie Sie Entscheidungen zum Aufbau einer Anwendung treffen Wann bestimmte Architekturen oder Frameworks für Ihr Projekt geeignet sind Welche Herausforderungen Sie bei der Erstellung oder Weiterentwicklung einer Anwendung lösen müssen Table of ContentsEinleitung 23 Teil I: Überblick 29 Kapitel 1: Wie wir Software-Systeme bauen 31 Kapitel 2: Das Mindset des Architekten 41 Teil II: Elemente von Architekturen 53 Kapitel 3: Das hab ich extra vergessen – Abstraktion 55 Kapitel 4: Wenn Rechner gesprächig werden – Netzwerke 65 Kapitel 5: Zu viel zu tun für einen allein – Nebenläufigkeit 89 Kapitel 6: Vom Notizblock bis zum Aktenschrank – Datenhaltung 113 Teil III: Klassische Patterns und Stile 145 Kapitel 7: Wer macht was – Grundlegende Modularisierungsansätze 147 Kapitel 8: Ich hätt’ noch eine kleine Bitte – Erweiterbarkeit 171 Kapitel 9: Rechnen auf dem Schreibtisch – Aufbau lokaler Anwendungen 185 Kapitel 10: Steckdosen und Verbindungen – Netzwerkanwendungen 207 Kapitel 11: Alle Hände voll zu tun – wenn viele Dinge gleichzeitig passieren 225 Kapitel 12: Der neue Ölboom – Analysen auf Daten 241 Teil IV: Architekturen für die Cloud 259 Kapitel 13: Das erledige ich schnell für Sie – Services 261 Kapitel 14: Hab ich dir doch gesagt – Messages 299 Kapitel 15: Zusammenwachsen – Enterprise-Integration-Patterns 323 Kapitel 16: Auf den Punkt fit – Reactivity 341 Kapitel 17: Das weiß ich schon längst – Verteilte Datenhaltung 373 Teil V: Top-Ten 405 Kapitel 18: Zehn Meilensteine des Software-Engineerings 407 Kapitel 19: Zehn einflussreiche Ideen 415 Kapitel 20: Zehn Hypes 425 Literaturverzeichnis 435 Abbildungsverzeichnis 441 Stichwortverzeichnis 445

Read more less

Book Synopsis Fangen Sie spannende Motive in der Natur ein – mit Ihrer Kamera Schon mit wenig Ausrüstung können Sie wunderbare Momente festhalten – nicht nur in Einzelbildern, sondern auch im Film. Wie Sie Landschaften und Tiere filmen und fotografieren, lernen Sie in diesem Buch. Svenja und Ralph Schieke zeigen Ihnen Schritt für Schritt von der Planung bis zur Veröffentlichung, wie spannende und interessante Naturfotografien und Naturfilme mit dem gewissen Etwas entstehen. Sie erfahren, wie Sie Motive finden, welche Ausrüstung Sie benötigen, was Sie bei den Aufnahmen beachten müssen und wie Sie Ihre Ergebnisse weiter bearbeiten. Sie erfahren Wie Sie auch mit Ihrem Smartphone gelungene Aufnahmen machen Warum sich die Stadt nicht verstecken muss, wenn es um Naturaufnahmen geht Wie Sie einen Film planen und in der Natur Schritt für Schritt umsetzen Wo Sie Ihre Aufnahmen präsentieren können

Read more less

Book SynopsisDas Schöne an Scrum ist, dass das Regelwerk so überschaubar ist. Es schafft nur so viel Struktur, dass Teams sich ganz und gar auf die Lösung der eigentlichen Herausforderung konzentrieren können und keine Zeit mit der Abarbeitung unnötiger und bereits überholter Prozesse verlieren. Das Buch zeigt Ihnen, wie Sie ein Team zusammenstellen und diese beliebte agile Projektmanagementmethode implementieren, um Projekte reibungsloser zu gestalten und zwar vom Anfang bis zum Ende. Wenn Sie möchten auch in Ihrem Privatleben: Scrum wird Ihnen das Leben leichter machen. Warum probieren Sie es nicht einfach aus?Table of ContentsÜber die Autoren 13 Einleitung 27 Teil I: Erste Schritte mit Scrum 31 Kapitel 1: Die Grundlagen von Scrum 33 Teil II: Ein Scrum-Projekt durchführen 51 Kapitel 2: Die ersten Schritte 53 Kapitel 3: Planen Sie Ihr Projekt 71 Kapitel 4: Talent und Timing 91 Kapitel 5: Release- und Sprint-Planung 111 Kapitel 6: Das Beste aus Sprints herausholen 135 Kapitel 7: Überprüfen und anpassen: So korrigieren Sie Ihren Kurs 153 Teil III: Scrum in der gewerblichen Wirtschaft 161 Kapitel 8: Software-Entwicklung 163 Kapitel 9: Produktion materieller Güter 181 Kapitel 10: Dienstleistungssektor 197 Kapitel 11: Medienlandschaft im Umbruch 217 Teil IV: Scrum für betriebliche Funktionen 227 Kapitel 12: IT-Management und Operations 229 Kapitel 13: Portfoliomanagement 247 Kapitel 14: Personal und Finanzen 275 Kapitel 15: Business Development – Geschäftsfeldentwicklung 291 Kapitel 16: Kundendienst 305 Teil V: Scrum im Alltag 315 Kapitel 17: Partnersuche und Familienleben 317 Kapitel 18: Scrum für Lebensziele 335 Teil VI: Der Top-Ten-Teil 351 Kapitel 19: Zehn Schritte für die Einführung von Scrum 353 Kapitel 20: Zehn Klippen, die Sie umschiffen sollten 363 Kapitel 21: Zehn Hauptvorteile von Scrum 367 Kapitel 22: Zehn wichtige Kennzahlen für Scrum 375 Abbildungsverzeichnis 383 Stichwortverzeichnis 387

Read more less

Book SynopsisNeue Hauptversion 4.0: Neuer Lehrplan, geänderter Prüfungsumfang! Soll in Ihrem Unternehmen neue Software eingeführt werden und Sie müssen sie testen? Oder wollen Sie als Entwickler über den Tellerrand schauen und sich auch mit dem Softwaretesten beschäftigen? Leicht verständlich erläutert Ihnen Maud Schlich alle vom ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level geforderten Lerninhalte sowohl für Programmierer als auch mit Blick auf Fachanwender, die die Software später einsetzen. Zahlreiche praxisorientierte Beispiele und übungen sorgen für eine optimale Prüfungsvorbereitung. Darüber hinaus erfahren Sie für alle Testaktivitäten, wie sie jeweils im klassischen oder im agilen Kontext geplant und durchgeführt werden. Sie erfahren Aus welchen Aktivitäten der Testprozess bestehtWie Sie unterschiedliche Testverfahren nutzenWie Entwickler und Tester optimal zusammenarbeitenWie Sie prüfen, ob Sie noch im Plan sind

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisTauchen Sie ein in die Welt des Quantencomputing! In diesem Buch erfahren Sie, wieso Quantencomputer Probleme lösen können, für die Supercomputer Millionen von Jahren brauchen würden. Die Autoren zeigen Ihnen, welche wirtschaftlichen Potenziale das Quantencomputing für Ihr Unternehmen birgt und wie es Ihre Arbeit unterstützen kann. Sie vermitteln Ihnen nicht nur die Grundlagen, sondern zeigen Ihnen ganz konkret, wie das Quantencomputing Industrien wie das Finanzwesen, Transportwesen, die Pharmazie und Cybersecurity transformieren wird. Um Quantencomputing und sein Potenzial verstehen zu können, benötigen Sie keinen Doktortitel, sondern nur dieses Buch. Sie erfahren Welche Arten von Quantencomputern existieren und was sie unterscheidetWas Quantencomputing schon heute kannWie Sie Ihr Unternehmen auf Quantencomputing vorbereitenWie Sie Ihr erstes eigenes Quantencomputing-Programm schreiben

Read more less

Book SynopsisAuch Maschinen haben ihre Regeln Auch wenn der Name sehr geordnet klingt, ist Regelungstechnik bisweilen komplex. Damit Sie dennoch damit zurechtkommen, erklärt Erwin Hasenjäger Schritt für Schritt und mit zahlreichen Beispielen, was Sie über dieses Thema unbedingt wissen sollten. Sie erfahren, welche Reglertypen es gibt, weshalb Simulationen so wichtig sind, was es mit Schwingungen sowie Dynamik auf sich hat und vieles mehr. Natürlich kommen dabei auch die mathematischen Grundlagen und die passende Software nicht zu kurz. So ist Regelungstechnik für Dummies der perfekte Einstieg in dieses anspruchsvolle Thema. Sie erfahren Wie Sie digitale und andere Besonderheiten berücksichtigen Wie Sie die richtigen Reglereinstellungen wählen Was SISO und MIMO bedeuten Wie Sie Prozesse geschickt optimieren können

Read more less